cad-cam Modeling.pdf

ModelingVersion 13

All rights reserved by Cimatron Ltd.

No part of this software or document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by anymeans, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying or recording, for any purpose, withoutwritten permission from Cimatron Ltd.

Cimatron may make improvements and changes in the software described in this document at anytime and without prior notice. These changes will be documented in future editions of thispublication.

Copyright Cimatron Ltd. 1984-2002

Cimatron, Cimatronit, Cimulator, Sketcher, CimaRender, CimaDEK, MoldBase, MoldBase 3D,Re-Enge, CPDM, MPDM, Cimagrafi and the C logo design are trademarks of Cimatron Ltd.QuickCompare, QuickElectrode, QuickConcept, QuickSplit, QuickMold and Quick Tooling arepending trademarks of Cimatron Ltd. Cimatron, Cimulator, Sketcher, CimaRender, CimaRenderPro, CimaDEK, Cimagrafi, and the C logo design are registered in the U.S. Patent and TrademarkOffice. CimaRender and CimaRender Pro are copyrighted by Graffiti Software Industries Ltd.MoldBase 3D is based on a product copyrighted by R&B Ltd. Cimatron IMSpost is based on aproduct copyrighted by Intelligent Manufacturing Software, Inc. IMSpost is a trademark ofIntelligent Manufacturing Software, Inc. MODView is copyrighted by Dataface, Co. Ltd.

All other company and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respectiveowners.

All references to other trademarks and/or copyrighted material is for identification purposes and/orunintentional.

Cimatron Ltd. is not necessarily associated with any other product or vendors mentioned herein.

Disclaimer of Warranty and Liability.

No representations or warranties, expressed or implied, of any kind are made by orwith respect to anything in this document.

In no event shall Cimatron Ltd., its employees or previous employees, be liable forany incidental, direct or indirect, special or consequential damages whatsoever(including but not limited to loss of profits) arising out of or related to this manual,and/or the product, or any use thereof.

Revised 2002.

SPreface

Cimatron develops, markets and supports tools to automate the mechanical engineering process.Our systems support all phases of product development, with solutions for computer aided design(CAD) and manufacturing (CAM). Cimatron‘s integrated technology approach combines designtools with optimized command output to computer-controlled manufacturing equipment.Drafting-table-to-shopfloor integration lets Cimatron clients realize dramatic efficiencies in productdevelopment and manufacturing.

Cimatronit - Cimatron’s flagship product - covers the entire spectrum of design, engineering andmanufacturing processes, including:

• A complete range of wireframe, surface and parametric solid modeling tools

with rendering capabilities;

• Advanced assembly, sub-assembly and part management, and associative

drafting functionality;

• Comprehensive, accurate data exchange interface utilities covering DXF,

DWG, IGES, JAMA-IS, VDA, PTC, STEP, SAT, CATIA and

UNIGRAPHICS;

• Powerful and intelligent NC applications for precise multi-axis machining.

The modular yet integrated structure of Cimatronit grows to accommodate cutting edge tools andtechniques. These now include the new Quick Tooling applications:

• QuickSplit

QuickSplit automates the search and separation of core, cavity and sliders to

assist in determining the number of actions required to create a mold. After

separating core, cavity and slides, QuickSplit identifies the parting lines and

generates the parting surface.

Automatic and interactive tools allow the construction of parting surfaces for

any complex geometry. Embedded Draft Analysis enables designers to identify

potential problems with undercuts and confirm minimum draft per side.

QuickSplit is tolerant of surface models with gaps, mismatched boundaries or

missing faces, therefore bypassing data corrections and saving precious time.

Component motion animation, dynamic cross-sectioning and clipping planes,

reduce human error and verify parting design. QuickSplit enables several trial

and error iterations in a very short time - resulting in optimal draw directions.

• QuickElectrode

QuickElectrode is an EDM electrode design solution used for shortening the

electrode process. QuickElectrode is used for burn area selection, electrode

design, management, documentation and manufacturing.

The QuickElectrode Navigator enables full control over the display and

activation of electrodes, while allowing several users to collaborate on the same

part.

QuickElectrode’s report generation features includes set-up sheets, burn location

Preface-1

reports and a full electrode schedule, therby alleviating the tedious task of

documenting the process .

• QuickConcept

QuickConcept is a preliminary design and review package which allows tool

designers and their suppliers to hold virtual review meetings over the Internet

in real-time. Multiple users can connect to each other to section, label,

dimension, and identify points of interest and problem areas of any given tool.

All members of the review meeting will interactively view the same screen at

the same time.

• QuickCompare

QuickCompare assists the tool designer in determining the scope and effect of

Engineering Changes (ECOs) on the tooling process. QuickCompare

mathematically compares the geometrical differences between two sets,

graphically marks these differences and documents the changes in a CAD file.

Here, the designer updates related components and tooling, while archiving

ECOs. The typically long CAD investigation process is significantly shortened.

QuickCompare ensures that all ECOs have been located, whether or not they

were communicated from design.

• MoldBase 3D

MoldBase3D offers an innovative wizard-based approach to parametric mold

base design. MoldBase3D automatically creates 3D solid (parametric &

associative) moldbases, with all components and accessories, from

industry-standard catalog suppliers such as HASCO, DME, PCS, FUTABA,

DMS, PEDROTTI, RADOURDIN, SIDECO, STRACK and MISUMI. Creation

of the assembly and detailed drawings of each plate are automated, complete

with 2D and 3D section views, ordinate dimensions, labels, balloons, and an

itemized Bill of Materials. This module is fully associative to the mold design

and changes are automatically reflected in all stages of the design process.

Cimatron’s automated engineering expertise benefits many industries, as competition requirestighter development cycles and efficient fabrication.

Powerful modules within Cimatronit expand your system’s capabilities. These may be purchasedfrom your Cimatron representative.

This publication provides a detailed description of the major features of the appropriate Cimatronit

application/topic. It is intended to help users in the daily operation of Cimatronit.

A list of Cimatronit documentation, for the current version, is shown on the next page.

Preface-2

Cimatron DocumentationCimatronit documentation comprises Reference Manuals, On-Line Help and Tutorials whichtogether provide a comprehensive guide to Cimatronit.

The list of Cimatronit documentation, for the current version, is as follows:

Publication DescriptionDisplayOptions *

Cimatronit

ReferenceManuals

Fundamentals &

General Functions

Introduction to the fundamentals of Cimatronit

and

description of the General functions.A H

ModelingDescription of the wireframe and surface Modeling

functions.A H

QuickSplit

QuickSplit automates the search and separation of core,

cavity and sliders to assist in determining the number of

actions required to create a mold.

A H

QuickElectrodeQuickElectrode is an EDM electrode design solution used

for shortening the electrode process.A H

QuickCompare

QuickCompare mathematically compares the geometrical

differences between two models, graphically marks these

differences and documents the changes in a CAD file.

A H

Drafting Description of the Drafting functions. A H

Solid Modeling Solid Modeling functions including Sketcher. A H

MoldBase 3D

Description of the functions associated with the detailed

design of mold plates and components.

MoldBase3D offers an innovative wizard-based approach

to parametric mold base design.

A W

Numerical Control Description of the NC functions. A H

Cimatron IMSpostCimatron IMSpost is a macro-based system for

developing and customizing postprocessors.A W

General Post Processor General Post Processor (GPP) functions. A

Finite Element Modeling Description of Finite Element Modeling (FEM) functions. A H

Utilities

Various utilities that may be used with Cimatronit.

These

utilities are either Internal, run via the USER function, or

External, run via the Main Menu.

A H

Data Interface Utilities

Description of Cimatron’s comprehensive data interface

utilities; DXF, DWG, IGES, JAMA-IS, VDA, PTC, STEP,

SAT, CATIA and UNIGRAPHICS.

A W

CimaDEKCimatron’s specialized Developer’s kit, for programming

customized functions.A

CimaRender Pro A photo-realistic rendering package. A W

MPDM: Getting Started

MPDM: Administrator

Description of how to use Manufacturing Product Data

Management to track and organize all files and data

associated with a project.

A W

Re-Enge Description of Reverse Engineering design functions. A

* Legend: A Acrobat PDF

H HTML

W Winhelp

�

Preface-3

Table of Contents

Introduction

About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intro-1

Typographical Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intro-2

SECTION I Modeling Functions

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1

Chapter 1 Wireframe Modeling Functions

CIRCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

COMCRV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

CONIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

CORNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

HELIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25

LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30

MOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49

OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59

POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-72

PROJECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-88

SPLINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-101

STRETCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-109

SWEEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-113

TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-120

WIRE_EDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-126

Chapter 2 Assembly Design and Management

EXPLODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

EXTRACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

PLACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Cimatron Modeling 13 i

Table of Contents

Chapter 3 Parametric Shape Functions

PATTDIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

PATTERN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

PATTUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

SECTION II Surface Functions

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II-1

Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II-2

Surface Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II-2

Trimmed Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II-3

Trimming by Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II-4

Differences Between a Trimmed Surface and Other Surfaces . . . . . . . . II-4

Summary of Surface Types Available in Cimatron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II-5

Display of the Surface on the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II-6

Chapter 4 Basic Surface Functions

REVOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

RULED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

SURF_CUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

ii Cimatron Modeling 13

Table of Contents

Chapter 5 Advanced Surface Functions

BLEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

COMSRF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

EDIT_SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43

FILLET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44

MESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63

MODIFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67

PARTLN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109

PLFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112

PNTSRF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114

SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-117

SRFCRV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-119

SRFLAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128

SRFSEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130

SURF_EXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-136

SURFSORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-146

SWEEPF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-148

TRMPLF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-151

TRMSRF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-152

Cimatron Modeling 13 iii

Table of Contents

SIntroduction

We recommend that new users of Cimatronit read at least the first three chapters of the

Fundamentals & General Functions Manual, to acquire a working knowledge of Cimatronit.

As you work with the system, different function overlays will be displayed. At the beginning ofmany chapters, you will find an overlay diagram which shows the functions described in the chapterand indicates how to access them. Within chapters, functions are listed in alphabetical order. Thenames of the functions and their options appear in capital letters. At the top of each page a statusline tells you which option or sub-option is described on that page.

Although you may only need one particular option within a function, we recommend that you readthe description of the interaction for the entire function. Modal parameters, which determine themode which will be active when the function is executed, are explained at the end of each function.

After you are familiar with the basic system, scan the manual occasionally to discover functions youare not using and to learn how to take full advantage of the power of Cimatron

it.

About This Manual

This manual provides explanations of the functions used in the Modeling application, and describesthe advanced surface functions used to create sophisticated surfaces in Cimatron.

SECTION I, Modeling Functions

Chapter 1 Wireframe Modeling Functions, describes the wireframe modelingfunctions, used to create entities, and perform operations on entitiesto create models.

Chapter 2 Assembly Design and Management, explains the functions used tohandle the assembly, design and management of entities.

Chapter 3 Parametric Shape Functions, presents the functions used to handleparametric shapes.

SECTION II, Surfaces Functions

Chapter 4 Basic Surface Functions, describes the functions used to createbasic surfaces.

Chapter 5 Advanced Surfaces Functions, presents the advanced surfacefunctions used to create different types of surface entities withinCimatron.

Cimatron Modeling 13 Introduction Intro-1

Typographical Conventions

Throughout this manual, certain conventions have been used to present different types ofinformation.

For each function in the manual the following information is presented (in the order listed below):

Function & Purpose

The name of the function as it appears in the function bank, presented in large bold upper case type,followed by the purpose of the function. For example:

Main Options

Presents the first level of options within each function in table format, as they appear on the screen.For example:

The interaction for each main option is described separately within the function. Where thedescription begins, the main option name is presented, preceded by the function name and graphicarrows. For example:

LINE >> PT-ANGLE

Intro-2 Introduction Cimatron Modeling 13

LINE The purpose text, presented in regular type,describes what the function does.

Main Options:

SELECT 2 POINTS

PARALLEL

OFFSET

PT-ANGLE

PT-CURVE

LN-CURVE

2 CURVES

HOR/VER

BOX

DIVID-LN

SURF-TAN

SURF-NRM

TAN/NORM

2 PLANES

Sub-options

When branching occurs in the interaction of a function, the interaction for each option is describedseparately. The option names are presented in bold, block letters and the option path is representedby graphic arrows. For example:

PT-ANGLE >> FROM UCS +X AXIS

Actions (optional)

Summarizes the recommended interaction to be followed in the current function/option, presentedin sans serif type. For example:

Action:

1. Set the parameters in the option table.

2. Pick a given line.

3. Indicate a reference point. It does not have to be on the line.

4. Indicate the position for the new line.

Interaction

The prompts which tell you how to execute the function are listed in upper case sans serif italicletters.

Prompt explanations are shown to the right of the prompts. (Some additional notes are also providedin the right column.) For example:

PICK 1ST CURVE Pick any curve on the closed contour.

Modal Parameters

The modal parameters for each function appear at the end of the function under the heading<function name> Modal Parameter Definitions. For example:

MODIFY Modal Parameter Definitions

Within this section, modal parameters are listed in alphabetical order. Modal parameters arerepresented in the text by a filled box as shown below. Modal parameters marked with an asteriskare system generated and cannot be changed.

Parameter explanations are to the right of the parameters.

For example

� * ANG = For CYLINDRICAL coordinates, this is the angle between theX axis and the line defined by the projection of the points onthe XY plane.

Cimatron Modeling 13 Introduction Intro-3

Notes

Provides information to help you avoid problems and achieve accurate results. Each note ispreceded by a bullet character for immediate identification. For example:

Notes: • The default active work plane is the XY plane of the activecoordinate system.

System Messages

System messages appear in upper case sans serif type and are preceded by an explanation statingthat they are system messages. For example:

CURRENT SURFACE ALREADY SATISFIES TOLERANCE + SLOPE CONDITIONS

End of Function

The end of a function or section is marked by a box character (�).

Intro-4 Introduction Cimatron Modeling 13

S SECTION I

Modeling Functions

IntroductionThe Modeling Application Functions are organized in seven overlays, as shown below. (To switchfrom one overlay to the next, press <SUBMENU>. To access the previous overlay press<REJECT>.)

The first overlay (and part of the second overlay) contains wireframe modeling functions. Thesefunctions are used to create entities and perform operations on entities to create models. Thesefunctions are explained in Chapter 1, Wireframe Modeling Functions.

Four of the functions in the second overlay (GROUP, PLACE, EXPLODE and EXTRACT)handle the assembly, design and management of entities. These functions are described in detail inChapter 2, Assembly, Design and Management.

Three of the functions in the second overlay (PATTDIM, PATTERN and PATTUSE) are used tocreate and work with parametric shapes or patterns. These are described in detail in Chapter 3,Parametric Shape Functions.

Overlays III and IV contain surface modeling functions and are described in Section II of thismanual. Overlay IV contains the function SURFSORT which is described in the UTILITIESmanual.

Overlay V contains the BEND, RE-ENGE and WIRE_EDM applications. BEND produces anunfolded version of a given geometry and is described in the Utilities Manual. The RE-ENGEManual describes the Reverse Engineering design functions. The WIRE_EDM function runs theCimatron-WireEDM program (the Cimatronit part of the program is explained in this manual).

Overlay VI contains the functions associated with QuickElectrode. See the QuickElectrode Manualand the on-line help for additional information.

Most of the functions in Overlay VII are associated with QuickSplit. The function COMPAREruns QuickCompare. See the QuickSplit and QuickCompare Manual and the appropriate on-linehelps for additional information.

Overlay I Overlay II Overlay III Overlay IV Overlay V Overlay VI Overlay VII

POINT GROUP DRIVE PLFACE BEND ELECTROD QSPLIT

LINE PLACE RULED SWEEPF RE_ENGE

CIRCLE EXPLODE REVOL TRMPLF E_MANAGE P_SURF

CORNER EXTRACT MESH EDIT SET WIRE_EDM

TRIM PATTDIM PNTSRF QE_BLANK COMPARE

OFFSET PATTERN FILLET

PATTUSE BLEND SCALE EXTNSION

SWEEP COMSRF PARTLN SIDE_EXT

SPLINE SRFLAT AUTO_EXT EXTR_OBJ

CONIC COMCRV SRFCRV MODIFY TOOLS

PROJECT HELIX SRFSEC QE_TOOLS EDIT

MOVE STRETCH TRMSRF SURFSORT PREFRNCE Q_DISP

Cimatron Modeling 13 Modeling Functions I-1

S Chapter 1

Wireframe Modeling Functions

The first overlay of modeling functions (and part of the second overlay) contains wireframemodeling functions. These functions are used to create entities, and perform operations on entitiesto create models. The fifth overlay conatins the function that accesses the Cimatron-WireEDMprogram.

Overlay I Overlay II Overlay V

POINT

LINE

CIRCLE

CORNER WIRE_EDM

TRIM

OFFSET

SWEEP

SPLINE

CONIC COMCRV

PROJECT HELIX

MOVE STRETCH

CIRCLE Create a circle/arc entity.

COMCRV Create a composite curve or NURBS spline entity from asequence of specified curves, or explode a composite curveinto its original entities.

CONIC Create a conic section entity.

CORNER Create a rounded, chamfered or sharp corner at theintersection point of two lines or curves.

HELIX Create a helix entity.

LINE Create a line entity.

MOVE Translate, rotate, mirror, copy and scale entities.

OFFSET Create an offset entity.

POINT Create a point entity.

PROJECT Create a new entity by projecting curves or points onto aplane, planar face or surface.

SPLINE Create a spline entity.

STRETCH Stretch all line entities and planar faces which were pickedby defining a BOX around them and move all other entitytypes which were in the box.

SWEEP Sweep entities along a vector or about a rotation axis; createa bounding box around selected entities.

TRIM Trim, divide or extend curves.

WIRE_EDM Run the Cimatron WireEDM program.

Cimatron Modeling 13 Wireframe Modeling 1-1

CIRCLE Create a circle/arc entity.

Main Options:

SELECT: CENTER + RADIUS/DIAM

CENTER + POINT

2 POINTS

3 POINTS

POINT + CURVE (RAD)

POINT + CURVE (PT)

2 CURVES

3 CURVES

POINT + 2 CURVES

2 POINTS + CURVE

CENTER+ RADIUS

/DIAM

Create a circle/arc defined by its radius (or diameter) andcenter point.

CENTER+POINT Create a circle/arc defined by its center and a point on thecircumference.

2 POINTS Create a circle/arc with a given radius, between two pointswhich are projected onto a plane parallel to the active workplane.

3 POINTS Create a circle/arc defined by three points on itscircumference.

POINT+CURVE(RAD) Create a circle/arc defined by a point on its circumference, acurve tangent to the circle and a defined radius.

POINT+CURVE(PT) Create a circle/arc defined by a point on its circumferenceand a curve tangent to the circle.

2 CURVES Create a circle/arc defined by two curves tangent to the circleand a defined radius.

3 CURVES Create a circle/arc defined by three curves tangent to thecircle.

POINT + 2 CURVES Create a circle defined by a point on its circumference andtwo curves tangent to the circle.

2 POINTS + CURVE Create a circle defined by two points on its circumference andtangent to the circle.

Notes: • The first three options create the circle/arc on the active work planeor on a plane which is parallel to the active work plane. In the nextseven options, the arc’s plane is implicitly defined by the input.

• The default active work plane is the XY plane of the activecoordinate system.

1-2 Wireframe Modeling Cimatron Modeling 13

CIRCLE

CIRCLE >> CENTER + RADIUSCIRCLE >> CENTER + DIAM

Create a circle/arc defined by its radius (or diameter) and center point.

How To:

1. Set the center, radius/diameter parameters in the modal table.

2. Pick screen area as center of circle.

Interaction:

IND. CENTER POINT RADIUS RADIUS =START = DELTA = DEFINE PLN

DIAMETER DIAMETER =

.CENTER POINT The circle/arc is created on a plane which is parallel to theactive work plane and contains the center point.


CIRCLE

START ANGLE

CENTER

DELTA ANGLE

RADIUS

Figure 1-1: CIRCLE >> CENTER + RADIUS/DIAM

CIRCLE >> CENTER + POINT

Create a circle/arc defined by its center point and a point on the circumference.

How To:


2. Pick screen area to define center point and then a point through which thecircumference will pass.

Interaction:

IND. CENTER POINT START = DELTA = CENTER DEPTH / DEFINE PLN

POINT DEPTH /

ACTIVE UCS DEPTH

. CENTER POINT Indicate the circle’s center point.

. POINT ON CIRCLE Indicate a point on the circle’s circumference.


CIRCLE

IND. POINT ON CIRCLE

IND. CENTER POINT

Figure 1-2: CIRCLE >> CENTER + POINT

CIRCLE >> 2 POINTS

Create a circle/arc with a given radius, between two points which are projected onto aplane parallel to the active work plane.

How To:


2. Pick screen area to define a the start point of the circle and then a point throughwhich the circumference will pass.

Interaction:

IND. 1ST ENDPOINT RADIUS = ARC / 1ST POINT DEPTH DEFINE PLN

CIRCLE

1ST POINT DEPTH

2ND POINT DEPTH

ACTIVE UCS DEPTH

. 1ST ENDPOINT Indicate the first point.

. 2ND ENDPOINT Indicate the second point.

INDICATE SIDE Indicate a side of the two points to determine the orientationof the arc/circle in the specified plane.

If an ARC is being created, the smallest arc between the twopoints will be displayed first. Confirm that it is the one youwant or answer NO to display its complement.

ARC O.K.? YES NO YES The arc will be created.

NO The complement to the first arc will be displayed.

If CIRCLE was specified, it will be created as soon as a sideis indicated.

CIRCLE O.K.? YES NO YES The circle will be created.

NO The complement to the first circle will be displayed.


CIRCLE

INDICATE SIDE

IND. 2ND ENDPOINTIND.1ST ENDPOINT

Figure 1-3: CIRCLE >> 2 POINTS

CIRCLE >> 3 POINTS

Create a circle/arc defined by three points on its circumference. The circle/arc is created on theplane that passes through the three points.

How To:

1. Pick screen area to define a the start point of the circle and then 2 points throughwhich the circumference will pass.

Interaction:

IND. 1ST POINT ARC /

CIRCLE

IND. 1ST POINT Indicate first point.

IND. 2ND POINT Indicate second point.

IND. 3RD POINT Indicate third point.


CIRCLE

IND. 3RD POINT

IND. 2ND POINT

IND. 1ST POINT

Figure 1-4: CIRCLE >> 3 POINTS

CIRCLE >> POINT + CURVE(RAD)

Create a circle/arc defined by a curve tangent to the circle, a defined radius and a point on thecircle’s circumference. The circle is created on the plane that passes through the curve and thepoint.

How To:

1. Set the value in the parameter table.

2. Pick a curve

3. Pick a point through which the circumference will pass.

Interaction:

PICK CURVE RADIUS = ARC /

CIRCLE

PICK CURVE Pick a curve which is tangent to the circle close to its pointof tangency.

IND. POINT Indicate a point on the circle’s circumference.

If there are two arcs which meet the given conditions,indicate which one is desired.


CIRCLE

IND. POINT

PICK CURVE

R

Figure 1-5: CIRCLE >> POINT + CURVE(RAD)

CIRCLE >> POINT + CURVE(PT)

Create a circle/arc defined by a curve tangent to the circle, a point on that curve and a point on thecircle’s circumference. The circle is created on the plane that passes through the curve and thepoints.

How To:

1. Pick a curve

2. Pick a point on the curve then a point where the circle’s circumference will pass.

Interaction:

PICK CURVE ARC /

CIRCLE

PICK CURVE Pick a curve which is tangent to the circle close to its pointof tangency.

IND. POINT ON CURVE Indicate a point on the curve.


If there are two arcs which meet the given conditions,indicate which one is desired.

POINT O.K.? YES NO YES The circle/arc will be created.

NO Re-indicate the point on the circle’s circumference.


CIRCLE

IND. POINT ON CURVE

PICK CURVE

IND. POINT

Figure 1-6: CIRCLE >> POINT + CURVE(PT)

CIRCLE >> 2 CURVES

Create a circle/arc defined by two curves tangent to the circle and a defined radius. The circle/arc iscreated on the plane that passes through the two curves.

How To:

1. Set a radius value.

2. Pick 2 curves.

Interaction:

PICK 1ST CURVE RADIUS = ARC /

CIRCLE

PICK 1ST CURVE Pick a curve which is tangent to the circle. In the modelingapplication, the curves must be coplanar.

PICK 2ND CURVE Pick a second curve which is tangent to the circle.


CIRCLE

PICK 2ND CURVE

PICK 1ST CURVE

CIRCLE

PICK 2ND CURVEPICK 1ST CURVE

ARC

Figure 1-7: CIRCLE >> 2 CURVES

CIRCLE >> 3 CURVES

Create a circle/arc defined by three curves tangent to the circle. The circle/arc is created on theplane that passes through the three points of tangency.

How To:

1. Pick 3 curves.

Interaction:

PICK 1ST CURVE ARC /

CIRCLE

IND. 1ST CURVE Pick a curve, tangent to the circle. In the modelingapplication, the curves must be coplanar.

IND. 2ND CURVE Pick a second curve, tangent to the circle.

IND. 3RD CURVE Pick a third curve, tangent to the circle.

CIRCLE >> POINT + 2 CURVES

Create a circle defined by a point on its circumference and two curves tangent to the circle.

How To:

1. Pick 2 curves plus a point

Interaction:

PICK 1ST CURVE Pick a curve which is tangent to the circle.

PICK 2ND CURVE Pick a second curve which is tangent to the circle.


If more than one circle meets the given conditions, indicatethe desired circle:

CIRCLE O.K. ? YES NO YES The circle will be created.

NO The complement to the first circle will be displayed.


CIRCLE

PICK 1ST CURVE

PICK 2ND CURVE

IND. POINT

Figure 1-8: CIRCLE >> POINT + 2 CURVES

CIRCLE >> 2 POINTS + CURVE

Create a circle defined by two points on its circumference and tangent to the circle.

How To:

1. Pick a curve plus 2 points

Interaction:

PICK CURVE Pick a curve which is tangent to the circle.

IND. 1ST POINT Indicate a point on the circle’s circumference.

IND. 2ND POINT Indicate a second point on the circle’s circumference.

CIRCLE Modal Parameter Definitions

This section explains each of the modal parameters used in this function.

� 1ST POINT DEPTH Create the circle/arc on a plane which is parallel to the activework plane and with the circumference passing through thisfirst indicated point.

� 2ND POINT DEPTH Create the circle/arc on a plane which is parallel to the activework plane and with the circumference passing through thissecond indicated point.

� ACTIVE UCS DEPTH Create the arc on the work plane. In this case, both thecenter point and the point on the circumference will beprojected onto the active work plane and they define only thecircle’s radius, and not the plane on which it will be created.

� ARC Create an arc.

� CENTER DEPTH Create the arc on a plane which is parallel to the active workplane and contains the indicated center point.

� CIRCLE Create a circle.

� DEFINE PLN Select this modal to define a different temporary active workplane.


CIRCLE

IND. 1ST POINT

PICK CURVE

IND. 2ND POINT

Figure 1-9: CIRCLE >> 2 POINTS + CURVE

See Defining a Plane in Chapter 3, of the Fundamentals &General Functions Manual.

� DIAMETER Define the circle/arc by its diameter.

� DIAMETER = Diameter of the circle/arc.

� DELTA = Delta angle from the start angle.

� POINT DEPTH Create the circle/arc on a plane which is parallel to the activework plane, with the circumference passing through theindicated point.

� RADIUS Define the circle/arc by its radius.

� RADIUS = Radius of the circle/arc.

� START = Start angle. The arc’s starting point is defined by an anglewhich is measured from the active work plane’s X axis. Apositive angle is in a counterclockwise direction. �


CIRCLE

COMCRV Create a composite curve or NURBS spline entity from asequence of specified curves, or explode a composite curveinto its original entities.

Main Options:

SELECT OPTION CREATE

EXPLODE

CREATE Create a composite curve or NURBS spline entity from asequence of specified curves.

EXPLODE Explode a composite curve into its original entities.

Notes: • A composite curve may be created from a sequence of specifiedcurves and/or the boundaries of surfaces and trimmed surfaces.

• Curves with break points are not applicable.

COMCRV >> CREATE

Create a composite curve or a NURBS spline entity from a sequence of specified curves.

SELECT OPTION COMPOSITE CURVE SPLINE APPROXIM.


COMCRV

IND. DIRECTION

PICK 1ST CRV

PICK NTH CRV/EXIT

GAP

COMPOSITECURVE

DEFINERADIUS

AUTO SMOOTH

SPLINE APPROXIMATION

Figure 1-10: Comparison of COMPOSITE CURVE and SPLINE APPROXIMATION

CREATE >> COMPOSITE CURVE

Create a composite curve from a sequence of specified curves.

SELECT 2D CURVE 3D CURVE

Notes: • The default active work plane is the XY plane of the activecoordinate system.

• To create a 2D composite curve, the specified curves must lie on thesame plane.

CREATE >> COMPOSITE CURVE >> 2/3D CURVE

How To:

1. Pick a curve then indicate the direction of the curve to be created.

2. Set the modal options then pick the other curves to form the new curve.

Interaction:

PICK CONTOUR DELETE ORIGINAL /

KEEP ORIGINAL

PICK CONTOUR Pick the first curve to be used to form the new compositecurve.

INDICATE DIRECTION Indicate the desired direction.

PICK 2ND CURVE

. . . . PICK NTH CURVE

When the modals are set, pick the curves and <EXIT>.

EXECUTING . . . The composite curve is created.

CREATE >> SPLINE APPROXIM.

Create a NURBS spline entity from a sequence of specified curves. Gaps are automatically closed,and corners are smoothed. The radius used for smoothing can be defined by the user, or setautomatically by the system.

SELECT 2D CURVE 3D CURVE

Note: • The spline entity may not be exploded into its original entities.

• When creating a 2D curve, the specified curves must lie on the sameplane.


COMCRV

CREATE >> SPLINE APPROXIM. >> 2/3D CURVE

How To:

1. Pick a curve then indicate the direction of the curve to be created.

2. Set the modal options then pick the other curves to form the new curve.

Interaction:

PICK CONTOUR DELETE ORIGINAL / TOL =

KEEP ORIGINAL

PICK CONTOUR Pick the first curve to be used to form the new spline entity.


PICK 2ND CURVE/EXIT

. . . PICK NTH CURVE/EXIT

When the modals are set, pick the curves and <EXIT>.

If the contour is smooth, the spline will be created.

If the contour is not smooth, the break points are highlightedin red, and following message appears:

CONTOUR NOT SMOOTH

CONTINUE? YES NO YES Smooth the contour.

NO Redefine the contour.

<CR> TO CONTINUE DELETE ORIGINAL / TOL = DEFINE RADIUS RADIUS =

KEEP ORIGINAL AUTOSMOOTH

EXECUTING . . . The spline entity is created.

COMCRV >> EXPLODE

Explode a composite curve into its original entities.

How To:

1. Pick a composite curve then confirm its selection.

Interaction:

PICK COMPOSITE CURVE DELETE ORIGINAL /

KEEP ORIGINAL

PICK COMPOSITE CURVEPick a composite curve.

COMPOSITE CURVE OK? YES Confirm the composite curve.

NO Select a different curve.

EXECUTING . . . The composite curve is exploded into its original entities.

Note: A NURBS spline entity may not be exploded into its originalentities.


COMCRV

COMCRV Modal Parameter Definitions


� AUTOSMOOTH The system will fit a spline to the contour according to thedefined tolerance, including the regions where breakpointswere located. Therefore, the radius of curvature in theseregions will vary.

� DEFINE RADIUS A spline will be created which has the defined radius ofcurvature in the regions where the breakpoints were located,and is within the tolerance in all other regions.

Enter a radius value and <CR>. If the value entered is toolarge, the following message appears.

COULD NOT CREATE SMOOTH CONTOUR,

RECOMMENDED RADIUS = 10.5

The largest radius that can be used will be suggested by thesystem.

CONTINUE? YES NO YES The recommended radius will appear in the modal. Usethis radius, or enter another value, and <CR>.


� DELETE ORIGINAL The original curves (in EXPLODE: the composite curve) willbe deleted.

� KEEP ORIGINAL The original curves (in EXPLODE: the composite curve) willbe retained.

� RADIUS Radius used to smooth the contour when creating a splineentity.

� TOL = Tolerance used to approximate the selected curves whencreating a spline entity.

COMCRV Usage Envelope

SPLINE APPROXIMATION

1. The algorithm starts to search for a suitable radius using the input radius and reducesthe value until a ‘good’ radius is achieved. This radius is not necessarily the ‘ideal’radius (i.e. the largest possible ‘good’ radius).

2. When smoothing with a user-defined radius, the following relation should be followed:RADIUS > TOL > GAP. �


COMCRV

CONIC Create a conic section entity on the active work plane, or aplane parallel to it..

Main Options:

SELECT ELLIPSE

ENDS & SHLDR PT

ENDS & P/Q

ELLIPSE Create an ellipse by defining its axes.

ENDS & SHLDR PT Create a conic section by indicating two endpoints and ashoulder point.

ENDS & P/Q Define a conic section by its endpoints and a shapeparameter.

Note: • The default active work plane is the XY plane of the activecoordinate system.

CONIC >> ELLIPSE

Create an ellipse by defining its axes.

IND. CENTER POINT A = B = START = DELTA =

ROTATION = DEFINE PLN

How To:

1. Set the modal parameters then pick the center point of the ellipse to be created.

Interaction:

IND. CENTER POINT Set the modal parameters, then indicate the ellipse’s centerpoint.

The ellipse is created on a plane which is parallel to theactive work plane and contains the center point.


CONIC

CONIC >> ENDS & SHLDR PT

Create a conic section by indicating two endpoints and a shoulder point.

Notes: • The shoulder point must be indicated within the triangle created bythe tangent vectors at the two endpoints of the conic section.

• The tangent vectors can be defined either by point indication of theirintersection, or by separate direction definition.

• The intersection occurs between the projected vectors on the activework plane.

How To:

1. Pick 4 points to form the 2 end points of the conic, the shoulder point and the slopeintersection point.

Interaction:

IND.CONIC 1ST END PT SLOPES INTERS. / DEFINE PLN

DEFINE SLOPES

IND.CONIC 1ST END PT Indicate the conic section’s first endpoint.

If DEFINE SLOPES was selected, press <SUBMENU> touse one of the five DEFINE SLOPE submenu options todefine the slope at the first endpoint. See Defining a Slope inChapter 3, of the Fundamentals & General FunctionsManual.

IND.CONIC 2ND END PT Indicate the conic section’s second endpoint.

If DEFINE SLOPES was selected, define the slope for thesecond endpoint as described above.


CONIC

IND. CONIC 1ST END PT

IND.SHOULDER POINT

IND. SLOPE INTERSECTION

IND. CONIC 2ND END PT

Figure 1-11: CONIC >> ENDS & SHLDR PT

IND. SHOULDER POINT Indicate a point on the conic section.

The shoulder point must be included within the trianglecreated by the two endpoints and the intersection point of thetangents.

IND. SLOPES INTERS. If SLOPES INTERS. was selected, indicate the intersectionpoint of both tangents.

CONIC >> ENDS & P/Q

Define a conic section by its endpoints and a shape parameter.

How To:

1. Set the modal parameters.

2. Pick 3 points to form the 2 end points of the conic and the slope intersection point.

Interaction:

IND.CONIC 1ST PT SLOPES INTERS. / P/Q = DEFINE PLN

DEFINE SLOPES

IND.CONIC 1ST PT Indicate the conic section’s first endpoint.

IND.CONIC 2ND PT Indicate the conic section’s second endpoint.

For DEFINE SLOPES modal option, follow the slopedefinition for the endpoints as described above.

IND. SLOPES INTERS. If SLOPES INTERS. was selected, indicate the intersectionpoint of both tangents.


CONIC

IND. CONIC 1ST END PT

INTERSECTION POINT

IND. CONIC 2ND END PT

P/Q=0.25ELLIPSE

P/Q=0.5PARABOLA

P/Q=0.75HYPERBOLA

Figure 1-12: CONIC >> ENDS & P/Q

CONIC Modal Parameter Definitions


� A = Half the length of major symmetry axis.

� B = Half the length of minor symmetry axis.

� DELTA = Delta angle from the start angle. This is the angle betweenthe first and the second endpoints of the conic section. Apositive angle is in a counterclockwise direction.

� DEFINE PLN Use one of the work plane options to define a different activeplane temporarily.


Note: • A different work plane may not be defined after the first endpointhas been indicated.

� DEFINE SLOPES Define the slopes of the conic section by defining the tangentvectors at each endpoint separately.

See Defining a Slope in Chapter 3, of the Fundamentals &General Functions Manual.

Remember: • The tangent vectors at both endpoints must intersect.

� P/Q = Shape parameter of the conic section (0<P/Q<1):

Ellipse: 0.0 < P/Q < 0.5Parabola: P/Q = 0.5Hyperbola: 0.5 <P/Q < 1.0

� ROTATION = The rotation angle of the conic section on the active workplane. This is the angle between the X axis of the activework plane and the major symmetry axis of the ellipse.

� START = Start angle. The conic section’s starting point is defined by anangle which is measured from the major symmetry axis of theellipse. A positive angle is in a counterclockwise direction.

� SLOPES INTERS. Define the direction for the slopes of the conic section at thetwo endpoints by indicating their intersection point.

Indicate a point which defines a triangle with both endpoints.�


CONIC

CORNER Create a corner at the intersection point of two lines or curves.

Main Options:

SELECT RADIUS

CHAMFER

MULTI RADIUS

CORNER

RADIUS Create a rounded corner between two curves. This optioncreates an arc entity between the two lines or curves.

CHAMFER Create a new line between two lines at a specified angle withthe first line.

MULTI RADIUS Create rounded corners between multiple curves.

CORNER Create a sharp corner between two curves by extending themuntil they intersect, or trimming them beyond the intersectionpoint.

CORNER >> RADIUS

Create a rounded corner between two curves. An arc is created between coplanar 2D curves,and a 3D Rational NURBS spline is created between 3D curves, or curves which are notcoplanar.

PICK 1ST CURVE RADIUS = TRIM OFF

TRIM OFF

TRIM 1ST

TRIM 2ND

TRIM BOTH

How To:


2. Pick 2 curves between which the corner is to be formed

Interaction:

PICK 1ST CURVE Pick the first curve near the intersection with the secondcurve.

PICK 2ND CURVE Pick the second curve near the intersection point.

If the curves are 3D or are not coplanar, define a plane to beused in the calculations.

DEFINE PLANE Select an option and define a plane.


CORNER

CORNER >> CHAMFER

Create a new line between two lines at a specified angle with the first line.

The chamfer starts at a point on the first line, whose distance from the intersectionpoint of the lines equals the value of the LENGTH parameter. The extensions of thetwo lines, which are between the chamfer and the intersection point of the lines, maybe trimmed.

PICK 1ST LINE LENGTH = ANGLE = TRIM OFF

TRIM OFF

TRIM 1ST

TRIM 2ND

TRIM BOTH

How To:

1. Set the modal parameters and pick 2 curves.

Interaction:

PICK 1ST LINE Pick the first curve near the intersection point with the secondcurve.

PICK 2ND LINE Pick the second curve near the intersection point with the firstcurve.

CORNER >> MULTI RADIUS

Create rounded corners between multiple curves.


CORNER

IND. DIR.

PICK 1ST CRV

PICK NTH CRV/EXIT MULTI RADIUS

Figure 1-13: CORNER >> MULTI RADIUS

How To:


2. Pick the first curve, indicate the direction and then pick the remaining curves

Interaction:

PICK 1ST CRV/EXIT RADIUS = TRIM ON /

TRIM OFF

PICK 1ST CRV/EXIT Select the first curve in the contour.

INDICATE DIRECTION Indicate the direction in which the contour will be defined.Define the contour and then <EXIT>. See Defining Contoursin Chapter 3, of the Fundamentals & General FunctionsManual.

CORNER >> CORNER

Create a sharp corner between two curves by extending them until they intersect, ortrimming them beyond their intersection point.

How To:

1. Pick 2 curves.

Interaction:

PICK 1ST CURVE Pick the first curve close to the intersection point with thesecond curve.

PICK 2ND CURVE Pick the second curve close to the intersection point with thefirst curve.


CORNER

PICK 2ND CURVE

PICK 1ST CURVE

Figure 1-14: CORNER >> CORNER

CORNER Modal Parameter Definitions


� ANGLE = The chamfer line’s angle with the first line. Positive angle isin the counterclockwise direction.

� LENGTH = Distance from the intersection point of both corner lines tothe starting point for the chamfer line, along the first line.

� RADIUS = Define the radius of the arc or the radius of curvature of the3D Rational NURBS spline.

� TRIM 1ST Trim the 1st curve beyond the corner (or extend up to it).

� TRIM 2ND Trim the 2nd curve beyond the corner (or extend up to it).

� TRIM BOTH Trim both curves beyond the corner (or extend up to it).

� TRIM OFF Do not trim curves.

� TRIM ON Trim all curves at the corners.

CORNER Usage Envelope

GENERAL

1. 3D curves may be selected in 2D mode.

2. In VIEW/MACSYS, a 2D curve in a plane that is perpendicular to the VIEW/MACSYSplane initially appears as a line. After some functions, such as CORNER and TRIM,the curve actually becomes a line.

RADIUS

1. When the curves are coplanar 2D curves, this option creates an arc entity with thespecified radius.

2. When the curves are not coplanar, and/or at least one is a 3D curve, this optioncreates a 3D Rational NURBS spline with the specified radius.

CHAMFER

1. In 3D mode, both curves must be coplanar.

MULTI RADIUS

1. All contours are treated as open contours. For closed contours, define the contour asusual, then use the MP function (from the Immediate Function Menu), to add the firstcurve to the end of the contour.

2. This option can be used to create a smoothly connected contour as required byCOMCRV >> SPLINE APPROXIMATION.

3. When the intersecting curves are coplanar 2D curves, this option creates an arc entitywith the specified radius.

4. When the intersecting curves are not coplanar, and/or at least one is a 3D curve, thisoption creates a 3D Rational NURBS spline with the specified radius. �


CORNER

HELIX Create a helix entity.

Main Options:

SELECT RADIUS TYPE FIXED

LINEAR

EXPONENTIAL

FIXED Create a helix with a constant radius.

LINEAR Create a helix whose radius changes linearly by a specificincrement.

EXPONENTIAL Create a helix whose radius changes exponentially from aspecified start radius to a specified end radius.

Note: • If the PITCH is equal to 0, a 2D entity will be created.

How To:

1. Select a radius type to determine the shape of the helix.

2. Set modals which define the direction (C.C.W./C.W.), the number of cycles(THREADS), the rise between cycles (PITCH) and radius size(s) and/or increment.Indicate the base point of the helix which will be the center point of the first cycle.

3. Indicate the points that will determine the positioning of the helix.


HELIX

HELIX >> FIXED

Create a helix with a constant radius.

How To:


2. Pick 3 points to indicate start point, base point and axis direction.

Interaction:

IND. BASE POINT C.C.W. / THREADS = PITCH = RADIUS =

C.W.

IND. BASE POINT Indicate the center point of the first cycle.

IND. AXIS DIRECTION The axis of the helix will start from the BASE POINT andpass through the indicated point.

IND. START POINT The first cycle of the helix will begin on the line joining theSTART POINT and the BASE POINT.

EXECUTING . . . The helix will be created and displayed.


HELIX

IND. AXIS DIRECTION

PITCH = 1.00

RADIUS = 1.00

IND. BASE POINT

THREADS = 6.00

IND. START POINT

Figure 1-15: HELIX >> FIXED

HELIX >> LINEAR

Create a helix whose radius changes linearly by a specific increment.

How To:


2. Pick 3 points to indicate base point, axis direction and start point.

Interaction:

IND. BASE POINT C.C.W. / THREADS = PITCH = RADIUS =

C.W.

RADIUS STEP =






HELIX

RADIUS STEP

START RADIUS

IND. BASE POINT

PITCH

IND. AXIS DIRECTION

IND. START POINT

Figure 1-16: HELIX >> LINEAR

HELIX >> EXPONENTIAL

Create a helix whose radius changes exponentially from a specified start radius to aspecified end radius.

How To:


2. Pick 3 points to indicate base point, axis direction and start point.

Interaction:

IND. BASE POINT C.C.W. / THREADS = PITCH = START RAD =

C.W.

END RAD =






HELIX

IND. START POINT

IND. BASE POINT

START RAD. = 2.00

PITCH = 1.00

THREADS = 6.00

END RAD. = 10.00

IND. AXIS DIRECTION

Figure 1-17: HELIX >> EXPONENTIAL

HELIX Modal Parameter Definitions


� C.C.W. The helix will be created in a counterclockwise direction.

� C.W. The helix will be created in a clockwise direction.

� END RAD = The radius of the last cycle.

� PITCH = Rise between cycles.

� RADIUS = Radius of helix, if FIXED, or of the first cycle, if LINEAR.

� RADIUS STEP = The amount which the radius will be incremented per cycle.

� START RAD = The radius of the first cycle.

� THREADS = Number of cycles in the helix. �


HELIX

LINE Create a line entity.

Main Options:

SELECT 2 POINTS

PARALLEL

OFFSET

PT-ANGLE

PT-CURVE

LN-CURVE

2 CURVES

HOR/VER

BOX

DIVID-LN

SURF-TAN

SURF-NRM

TAN/NORM

2 PLANES

2 POINTS Create a line by defining its endpoints.

PARALLEL Create a line which is parallel to a given line and positionedrelative to a position point.

OFFSET Create a line on the active work plane, offset a specifieddistance from a given line.

PT-ANGLE Create a line on the active work plane defined by a startingpoint, a given angle and a specified length.

PT-CURVE Create a line perpendicular or tangent to a curve and passingthrough an indicated point.

LN-CURVE Create a line that is tangent to an indicated curve at auser-defined angle from the specified direction.

2 CURVES Create a line tangent or perpendicular to two curves.

HOR/VER Create a horizontal or vertical line on the active work plane.

BOX Create four lines in a box formation which passes through anindicated point, by specifying the length and width, or bydragging a dynamic rectangle.

DIVID-LN Create a line which divides two specified lines.

SURF-TAN Create a line which is tangent to a surface and passes throughan indicated point.

SURF-NRM Create a line which is perpendicular to a surface and passesthrough an indicated point.

TAN/NORM Create a line which is perpendicular or tangent to a curve atan indicated point on the curve.

2 PLANES Create a line at the intersection of two planes.


LINE

Notes: • Three of the options to create a line, OFFSET, PT-ANGLE andHOR/VER, operate on the active work plane. In these options alocal plane may be defined, which is valid only during the currentsession of the function. When LINE is <EXIT>ed, the active planereverts to the one which was active before entering this function.


LINE >> 2 POINTS

Create a line by defining its two endpoints.

How To:


2. Indicate the two end points of the line you wish to create.

Interaction:

IND. 1ST POINTCONTINUOUS /

SINGLEFREE DEFINE PLN

FREE

HORIZONTAL

VERTICAL

PERPEND.

IND. 1ST POINT Indicate the line’s first endpoint. See Defining Points inChapter 3, of the Fundamentals & General FunctionsManual.

A line follows every movement of the mouse. A dynamicline connects the first point with the current position of themouse.


LINE

IND. 1ST POINT

LINE

IND. 2ND POINT

Figure 1-18: LINE >> 2 POINTS

IND. 2ND POINT Indicate the second endpoint of the line.

Note: • If the point indication option displayed in the STATUS area of thescreen is SCREEN, and the modal option which sets the orientationof the line is either HORIZONTAL or VERTICAL; use the cursorarrows to move the cursor. The mouse will be able to move thecursor in any direction but the line can only be drawn horizontallyor vertically.

This action is repeated for a continuous sequence of lines. In such acase, the first point of each line is the second point of the previousline.

IND. NEXT POINT If CONTINUOUS is selected (in the first modal), indicate thenext point of the continuous line.

LINE >> PARALLEL

Create a line which is parallel to a given line and is positioned relative to a positionpoint as it was to a given reference point.

The new line passes through the position point only if the reference point lies on thegiven line. If the reference point is outside the given line, then the new line ispositioned relative to the position point as the given line was to the reference point.

How To:


2. Pick a given line.

3. Indicate a reference point. It does not have to be on the line.

4. Indicate the position for the new line.

Interaction:

PICK LINE AS ORIGINAL / NO ATTRIB / SAME LENGTH /

AS ACTIVE SAME ATTRIB. NEW LENGTH NEW LENGTH =

PICK LINE Pick a given line.

IND. REF. PT. ON LINE Indicate a reference point for the given line.

IND. NEW POSITION Indicate a position point for the new line.


LINE

PICK LINE IND. REF. PT. ON LINE

IND. NEW POSITION

Figure 1-19: LINE >> PARALLEL

LINE >> OFFSET

Create a line on the active work plane which is parallel to a given line at a specifieddistance from it.

How To:


2. Pick a given (reference) line.

3. Indicate the side on which to create the new line.

Interaction:

OFFSET: PICK LINE OFFSET = NO. LINES = AS ORIGINAL / NO ATTRIB / DEFINE PLN

AS ACTIVE SAME ATTRIB

OFFSET: PICK LINE Pick a reference line which lies on a plane which is parallelto the active work plane.

IND. OFFSET SIDE Indicate the desired side.


LINE

IND. OFFSET SIDE

PICK LINE

LINE

OF

FS

ET

Figure 1-20: LINE >> OFFSET

LINE >> PT-ANGLE

Create a line on the active work plane defined by a starting point, a given angle and aspecified length.

DEFINE ANGLE: FROM UCS +X AXIS FROM REFERENCE AXIS

PT-ANGLE >> FROM UCS +X AXIS

Create a line which forms a given angle with the positive X axis of the active workplane.

How To:


2. Indicate the starting point of the line you wish to create.

3. Either accept the displayed line forming the given angle with the X axis, or select NOto display a line forming the opposite angle.

Interaction:

IND. LINE START PT. ANGLE = LENGTH = DEFINE PLN

IND. LINE START PT. Indicate the starting point of the line.

RIGHT SIDE? YES NO YES To accept the displayed line.

NO To create the line in a clockwise direction from the Xaxis.


LINE

IND. LINE START PT.

ANGLE = 30

LINE

Y

X

Figure 1-21: LINE >> PT-ANGLE >> FROM UCS +X AXIS

PT-ANGLE >> FROM REFERENCE AXIS

Create a line which forms a given angle with a reference axis.

How To:

1. Indicate the start point and direction of the reference axis.


3. Indicate the starting point of the line you wish to create.

4. Either accept the displayed line forming the given angle with the reference axis,or select NO to display a line forming the opposite angle.

Interaction:

IND. AXIS START PT. DEFINE PLN

IND. AXIS START PT. Indicate starting point for the reference axis.

IND. AXIS DIREC. PT. Indicate direction point for the reference axis.

IND. LINE START PT. ANGLE = LENGTH =

IND. LINE START PT. Indicate the starting point of the line.

RIGHT SIDE? YES NO YES To accept the displayed line.

NO To create the line in a clockwise direction from thereference axis.


LINE

IND. LINE START PT.

LINE

ANGLE = 30

IND. AXIS DIREC. PT

IND. AXIS START PT.

Figure 1-22: LINE >> PT-ANGLE >> FROM REFERENCE AXIS

LINE >> PT-CURVE

Create a line perpendicular or tangent to a curve, and passing through an indicatedpoint.

How To:

1. Pick a curve at a point on the curve close to the expected intersection point.

2. Indicate a point to define the starting point of the line to be created. Depending uponthe position of the indicated point, a line will be produced either normal (perpendicular)to the curve or tangent to it.

Interaction:

PICK CURVE Pick a curve at a point on the curve close to the expectedintersection point.

IND. POINT Indicate a point. The program will either produce a linenormal (perpendicular) to the curve or tangent to it,depending upon the position of the indicated point.


LINE

PICK CURVE

LINE

IND. POINT

Figure 1-23: LINE >> PT-CURVE

LINE >> LN-CURVE

Create a line that is tangent to the indicated curve, at a user-defined angle in thespecified direction.

How To:


2. To define a direction, pick a curve or press <SUBMENU>.

3. Indicate the direction.

4. Pick the curve to which the new line will be tangent.

Interaction:

DIRECTION: PICK CURVE LENGTH = ANGLE =

DIRECTION:

PICK CURVE

Pick a curve to define the direction.

or: Press <SUBMENU> to choose a sub-option for indicating thedesired direction.


PICK CURVE Pick the curve to which the new line will be tangent. Theline is then created.


LINE

PICK CURVE

ANGLE = 10

PICK CURVE

IND. DIRECTION

Figure 1-24: LINE >> LN-CURVE

LINE >> 2 CURVES

Create a line tangent or normal (perpendicular) to two curves depending on where thecurves are picked.

How To:

1. Pick the first curve.

2. Pick the second curve.

3. Confirm the curves. The line between the two curves is drawn.

Interaction:

PICK 1ST CURVE Pick the first curve at a position near which the new line willpass.

PICK 2ND CURVE Pick the second curve at a position near which the new linewill pass.

CURVES O.K.? YES NO YES Confirm the picked curves.

NO Pick new curves.


LINE

PICK 1ST CURVE

PICK 2ND CURVE

LINE

LINE

PICK 1ST CURVE

PICK 2ND CURVE

Figure 1-25: LINE >> 2 CURVES

LINE >> HOR/VER

Create horizontal or vertical lines on the active work plane (parallel to the X or Yaxis of the active work plane).

How To:


2. Indicate the starting point of line.

3. Indicate the direction in which to create the line (horizontal or vertical).

Interaction:

IND. 1ST POINT CONTINUOUS / BY LENGTH / LENGTH = DEFINE PLN

SINGLE BY POINT

IND. 1ST POINT Indicate the line’s starting point.

IND. DIRECTION Point to either a horizontal or a vertical direction.


LINE

IND. 1ST POINT IND. DIRECTION

LINE

Figure 1-26: LINE >> HOR/VER

LINE >> BOX

Create a rectangle from four line entities by specifying length and width, ordynamically by dragging.

How To:

1. Pick a point on the screen and drag the rectangle to the desired size or set theheight and width parameters and indicate a position the screen.

Interaction:

IND. 1ST POINT BY LENGTH WIDTH = HEIGHT = CENTER DEFINE PLN

BY POINT

CENTER

LOWER LEFT

LOWER RIGHT

UPPER RIGHT

UPPER LEFT

IND. 1ST POINT Set modals and indicate a point.

IND. 2ND POINT / EXIT A dynamic rectangle appears. Drag the rectangle to thedesired size, and pick the second point.

A rectangle consisting of four line entities is created.


LINE

IND. 1ST POINT ( CENTER )

BOX

Figure 1-27: LINE >> BOX >> BY LENGTH >> LOWER LEFT

LINE >> DIVID-LN

Create dividing lines between two given lines.

If the given lines are parallel, the dividing lines will be equally spaced between thegiven lines and parallel to them.

If the two lines are not parallel, the angle formed by them will be equally dividedinto the number of sections entered in the first modal below, and the dividing lineswill be created accordingly.

In both cases, the length of the dividing lines will be limited by invisible lines whichconnect the endpoints of the picked lines.

How To:

1. Set the modal parameters then pick the lines between which the dividing lines will becreated.

Interaction:

PICK 1ST LINE DIVISIONS =

PICK 1ST LINE Pick the first line.

PICK 2ND LINE Pick the second line.


LINE

PICK 1ST LINE

PICK 2ND LINE

DIVIDING LINES

PICK 1ST LINE PICK 2ND LINE

DIVIDING LINE

24.4 24.4

DIVISIONS = 3

Figure 1-28: LINE >> DIVID-LN

LINE >> SURF-TAN

Create a line entity which is tangent to a surface and passes through an indicatedpoint. The tangent may be in either the ±U or ±V direction.

How To:

1. Set the parameters for the V and U directions.

2. Pick a surface and then a point on the surface where the line is to begin.

Interaction:

<CR> TO CONTINUE DIRECT. +U LENGTH =

DIRECT. +U

DIRECT. -U

DIRECT. +V

DIRECT. -V

PICK SURFACE Pick a surface to which the line will be tangent.

IND. PT ON SURFACE Indicate a point on the surface from which the line will begin.


LINE

IND. PT. ON SURFACE

IND. PT. ON SURFACE

PICK SURFACE

LINE

U

V

V - DIR

U - DIR

Figure 1-29: LINE >> SURF-TAN

LINE >> SURF-NRM

Create a line entity which is perpendicular to a surface and passes through anindicated point.

SELECT NORMAL: FROM PNT TO SURFACE AT A PNT ON SURFACE

FROM PNT TO SURFACE Create a line entity which is perpendicular to asurface and passes through an indicated point.

AT A PNT ON SURFACE Create a line entity which is perpendicular to asurface and passes through an indicated point

SURF-NRM >> FROM PNT TO SURFACE

Create a line entity which is perpendicular to a surface and passes through anindicated point

How To:

1. Pick a surface and then a point outside the surface from where the line is to begin.

Interaction:

PICK SURFACE Pick a surface to which the line will be perpendicular.

IND.POINT Indicate a point, not on the surface, from which the line willbegin.

EXECUTING . . . The line will be created.

If the perpendicular is outside the surface area, the followingmessage is displayed:

THE LINE IS NORMAL AT A SURFACE POINT THATIS OUTSIDE THE SURFACE BOUNDARY.


LINE

IND. POINT

LINE

PICK SURFACE

Figure 1-30: LINE >> SURF-NRM >> FROM PNT TO

SURFACE

SURF-NRM >> AT A PNT ON SURFACE

Create a line entity which is perpendicular to a surface and passes through anindicated point

How To:

1. Choose option: tangent or normal.

2. Pick a surface and then a point on the surface from where the line is to begin.

3. Indicate the direction in which to create the tangent or normal.

Interaction:

PICK SURFACE LENGTH =

PICK SURFACE Pick the surface from which the line will be created.

IND. PT ON SURFACE Indicate a point on the surface from which the line will begin.

INDICATE SIDE Indicate the direction in which to extend the line.


LINE

IND. SIDE

PICK SURFACE

IND. POINT ON SURFACE

Figure 1-31: LINE >> SURF-NRM >> AT A PNT ON SURFACE

LINE >> TAN/NORM

Create a line entity that is either normal or tangent to a specified curve at anindicated point.

How To:

1. Pick a curve and indicate a starting point for the line.

2. Indicate the direction in which to extend the line.

Interaction:

PICK CURVE NORMAL / LENGTH =

TANGENT

Note: • A line created normal to a 3D curve will be parallel to the activework plane.

PICK CURVE The curve may be 2D or 3D.

IND. POINT ON CURVE Indicate a starting point for the line.

INDICATE SIDE Indicate the direction in which to extend the line.


LINE

PICK CURVE

PICK CURVE

IND. SIDE

IND. SIDEIND. POINT ON CURVE

IND. POINT ON CURVE

NORMAL TANGENT

Figure 1-32: LINE >> TAN/NORM

LINE >> 2 PLANES

Create a line entity of a specified length at the intersection of two planes.

How To:

1. Indicate 1st and 2nd planes.

2. Indicate the midpoint of the line to be created.

Interaction:

IND. 1ST PLANE

IND. 2ND PLANE

Indicate the planes using the displayed plane definitionoptions. The prompts displayed are dependent upon thechosen method of defining the planes.


IND. LINE MID POINT: LENGTH =

IND. LINE MID POINT: Indicate the MID point of the line to be created.


LINE

IND. 1ST PLANE

IND. 2ND PLANEIND. LINE MID POINT

LINE

Figure 1-33: LINE >> 2 PLANES

LINE Modal Parameter Definitions


� ANGLE = Enter an angle value for the creation of a new line.

� AS ACTIVE Assign the active level, line font, pen and color to the line.

� AS ORIGINAL Assign the level, line font, pen and color of the original lineto the new line.

� BY LENGTH Create lines with a specified length. LINE >> BOX: Create abox by specifying its length and width.

� BY POINT LINE >> HOR/VER: Determine the length of the lines fromthe projection of the direction point on the axis.

LINE >> BOX: Create a box by dragging a dynamicrectangle.

� CENTER When creating a box, the indicated point lies at the center ofthe box.

� CONTINUOUS Create a continuous sequence of lines where the secondendpoint of a line is the first endpoint for the next line.

� DEFINE PLN Change the active work plane temporarily. Access this fieldto display the options. Defining a Plane in Chapter 3, of theFundamentals & General Functions Manual.

� DIRECT. +U Select the direction in which the line is to be created.Depending upon the position of the point on the surface, theU and/or V directional arrows are displayed on the pickedsurface.

DIRECT. -U

DIRECT. +V

DIRECT. -V

� DIVISIONS = Enter the number of divisions. The minimum value, which is2, results in the bisection of the space or angle, therebycreating one section line between the two picked lines.

� FREE The line can assume any direction.

� HEIGHT = When creating a box, enter its height.

� HORIZONTAL The line will be parallel to the X axis of the active workplane. The second point is projected onto the active workplane’s X axis.

� LENGTH = Enter line length.

When creating a box, enter its length.

� LOWER LEFT When creating a box, the indicated point lies at the lower leftcorner of the box.

� LOWER RIGHT When creating a box, the indicated point lies at the lowerright corner of the box.

� NEW LENGTH Length of line will be defined ( >> PARALLEL).


LINE

� NO ATTRIB Do not attach any attribute records to the new line.

� NO. LINES = The number of lines to be created.

� NORMAL The line will be normal to the curve.

� OFFSET = Enter offset value. Distance of the offset line from thereference line.

� PERPEND. The line will be parallel to the Z axis. The second point isprojected onto the active work plane’s Z axis.

� SAME ATTRIB Attach attribute records of the original line to the new line.

� SAME LENGTH Line will have length of previous line ( >> PARALLEL).

� SINGLE Create a single line.

� TANGENT The line will be tangent to the curve.

� UPPER LEFT When creating a box, the indicated point lies at the upper leftcorner of the box.

� UPPER RIGHT When creating a box, the indicated point lies at the upperright corner of the box.

� VERTICAL The line will be parallel to the Y axis of the active plane.The second point is projected onto the active work plane’s Yaxis.

� WIDTH = When creating a box, enter its width.

�


LINE

MOVE Translate, rotate, and scale entities.

Main Options:

SELECT OPTION POINT-ANGLE

DELTA

ROT.AXIS

REF. POINT(S)

MIRROR

UCS TO UCS

POINT-ANGLE Scale, and move or copy entities by rotating them a givenangle in the active work plane.

DELTA Move or copy entities by translating them delta distances in agiven coordinate system.

ROT.AXIS Move or copy entities by rotating them around a definedaxis.

REF. POINT(S) Scale, and move or copy entities from one coordinate systemto another. This option performs translation and optionalrotation.

MIRROR Copy or move entities by mirroring them onto a given plane.

UCS TO UCS Scale, and move or copy entities from one UCS to another.

PICK ENTITIES & <EXIT> Pick the entities to be transformed and terminate with<EXIT> to display the main options.


MOVE

MOVE >> POINT-ANGLE

Scale, and move or copy entities by rotating them by a given angle in the active workplane.

How To:

1. Indicate a reference point according to which the picked entity will be moved orcopied.

2. Indicate the new location for the reference point.

Interaction:

IND. REFERENCE POINT Indicate a reference point which will be used to move or copythe picked entities.

IND. POSITIONING PNT Indicate a new location for the reference point.


MOVE

IND. REF. POINT

PICK ENTITY

ANGLE = 0.0

SCALE = 1.0

COUNT = 1

IND. POSITIONING PNT.

ANGLE = 0.0

SCALE = 0.5

COUNT = 1


ANGLE = 45

SCALE = 1.0

COUNT = 1

IND. REF. POINT

PICK ENTITY

IND. POSITIONING PNT.( CLOSE )

ANGLE = 45

SCALE = 1.0

COUNT = 2

IND. REF. POINT

PICK ENTITY


IND. REF. POINT

PICK ENTITY

ANGLE

Figure 1-34: MOVE >> POINT-ANGLE

<CR> TO

CONTINUECOPY / AS ORIGINAL/ NO ATTRIB / ANGLE = SCALE = COUNT =

DEFINE

PLN

MOVE AS ACTIVE SAME ATTRIB

<CR> TO CONTINUE Set the modals and press <CR>.

IND. POSITIONING PNT Indicate a new location for the reference point or press<EXIT> if finished.


MOVE

MOVE >> DELTA

Move or copy entities by translating them delta distances in a given coordinatesystem.

SELECT TWO POINTS KEY IN

TWO POINTS Move or copy entities by indicating two points that define thedistance and direction to be moved/copied.

KEY IN Move or copy entities by translating them delta distances in agiven coordinate system.

DELTA >> TWO POINTS

Move or copy entities by indicating two points that define the distance and directionto be moved/copied.

How To:

1. Indicate the 1st and 2nd points for locating the picked entitiy.

Interaction:

IND. 1ST POINT Indicate the first point.

IND. 2ND POINT Indicate the second point.

<CR> TO CONTINUE COPY AS ORIGINAL NO ATTRIB COUNT =


<CR> TO CONTINUE The defined MOVE or COPY will be performed each time<CR> is pressed. <EXIT> when finished.


MOVE

IND. 1ST POINT

IND. 2ND POINT

Figure 1-35: MOVE >> DELTA >> TWO POINTS

DELTA >> KEY IN

Move or copy entities by translating the delta distances in a given coordinate system.

How To:

1. After picking the entity, set the modal parameters.

2. Click continue to create the new entity.

Interaction:

<CR> OR PICK UCS DX = DY = DZ = CARTESIAN / MODEL /

CYLINDRICAL / UCS /

SPHERICAL UCS LIST

<CR> OR PICK UCS Set modal parameters and press <CR>.

<CR> TO CONTINUE COPY / AS ORIGINAL / NO ATTRIB / COUNT =




MOVE

DX = 0.000DY = 0.000DZ = 0.000

DX = 80.000DY = 30.000DZ = 0.000

Y

X

Figure 1-36: MOVE >> DELTA >> KEY-IN

MOVE >> ROT.AXIS

Move or copy entities by rotating them around a defined axis.

How To:

1. After picking the entity, pick axis origin then axis direction.

2. Set modal parameters and press Continue.

Interaction:

IND. AXIS ORIGIN Indicate a point for the origin of the rotation axis.

IND. AXIS DIR/EXIT In 3D mode, indicate a point to define the direction of therotation axis.

In 2D mode, press <EXIT> to define the rotation axis whichis always perpendicular to the work plane.

<CR> TO CONTINUE COPY / AS ORIGINAL / NO ATTRIB / ANGLE = COUNT =




MOVE

PICK ENTITIES ( ALL )

IND. AXIS ORIGIN

IND. AXIS DIR./EXIT

ANGLE = 90

Figure 1-37: MOVE >> ROT.AXIS

MOVE >> REF. POINT(S)

Scale, and move or copy entities from one coordinate system to another. This optionperforms translation and optional rotation.

How To:

1. After picking the entity, pick the axis origin then the axis X, Y directions.

2. If required, define the second coordinate system (origin and directions).

3. Set modal parameters and press Continue.

Interaction:

IND. 1ST ORIGIN Indicate an origin point for the first reference coordinatesystem.

IND.1ST +X AXIS/EXIT Indicate a point on the first +X axis, or <EXIT> to acceptthe active UCS orientation.

IND. 1ST +Y/EXIT Indicate a point in the direction of the first +Y axis, or<EXIT> to accept the active +Y axis direction.

POINTS O.K.? YES NO YES Accept the orientation of the defined axes.

NO Redefine the axes.

IND. 2ND ORIGIN Indicate an origin point for the second reference coordinatesystem.

IND. 2ND +X AXIS/EXIT Indicate a point on the second +X axis, or <EXIT> to acceptthe active UCS orientation.

IND.2ND +Y/EXIT Indicate a point in the direction of the second +Y axis, or<EXIT> to accept the active +Y axis direction.

<CR> TO CONTINUE COPY / AS ORIGINAL / NO ATTRIB / SCALE =



IND. 2ND ORIGIN Indicate an origin point for the second reference coordinatesystem.

The defined MOVE or COPY will be performed each time asecond coordinate system is defined. <EXIT> when finished.


MOVE

MOVE >> MIRROR

Copy or move entities by mirroring them onto a given plane.

How To:

1. Define the plane onto which the entities will be copied or moved.

2. Press Continue.

Interaction:

DEFINE PLANE Use one of the DEFINE PLANE options to define a planeonto which the entities will be copied or moved. See Defininga Plane in Chapter 3, of the Fundamentals & GeneralFunctions Manual.

<CR> TO CONTINUE COPY / AS ORIGINAL / NO ATTRIB /




MOVE

PICK ENTITIES

DEFINE PLANE

Figure 1-38: MOVE >> MIRROR

MOVE >> UCS TO UCS

Move or copy entities from one UCS to another.

How To:

1. Pick the UCS from which the entities will be copied or moved.

2. Set the modals.

3. Pick the UCS to which the entities will be copied or moved.

Interaction:

PICK START UCS Pick the UCS from which the entities will be copied ormoved.

<CR> TO CONTINUE COPY / AS ORIGINAL / NO ATTRIB / SCALE =



PICK DESTINATION UCS Pick the UCS to which the entities will be copied or moved.<EXIT> when finished.

MOVE Modal Parameter Definitions


� ANGLE = Rotation angle.

� AS ACTIVE Assign the active level, line font, pen and color to the copies.

� AS ORIGINAL Assign the level, line font, pen and color of the originalentities to the copied entities.

� CARTESIAN Type of coordinate system for the delta translation.

CYLINDRICAL

SPHERICAL

� COPY Create copies of the original entities.

� COUNT = Enter the number of times to perform the move or copy.

� DEFINE PLN Define an active work plane.

� DX Delta distances in CARTESIAN coordinates.

DY

DZ

� MOVE Transform the picked entities.

� MODEL Express the delta distance according to the MODEL UCS .

� NO ATTRIB Do not attach any attribute records to the new entity.

� SAME ATTRIB Attach attribute records to the new entity.

� SCALE = Enter a scaling factor.


MOVE

MOVE Usage Envelope

1. This function has two stages. In the PICK ENTITIES stage, the original entities areselected. In the “transformation” stage, the actions of translation, rotation and scalingare performed. The selected entities may be transformed again without beingreselected, by using another translating option.

2. If MOVE is selected, the resulting entity will always be AS ORIGINAL and with theSAME ATTRIButes.

The parameters, AS ORIGINAL / AS ACTIVE, and SAME ATTRIB / NO ATTRIBappear only if COPY is selected.

3. In NC applications, only closed Toolpaths may be moved.

4. A UCS may not be copied or moved with the MOVE function.

5. Reference assemblies may not be moved.

6. The scaling factor is equal in all directions. To scale with different factors, use thefunction SCALE.

POINT ANGLE

1. The rotation axis is perpendicular to the active work plane.

ROT. AXIS

1. In 3D mode, indicate a point to define the direction of the rotation axis.

2. In 2D mode, press <EXIT> to define the rotation axis which is always perpendicular tothe work plane.

REF. POINTS

1. The active coordinate system is the default.

2. The default X axis will be parallel to the X axis in the active coordinate system.

3. The default Y direction is the same as that indicated by the +Y axis of the activecoordinated system.

4. To accept a default, press <EXIT> instead of indicating a point. �


MOVE

OFFSET Create an offset entity.

Main Options:

SELECT OPTION CURVE

CONTOUR

3D OFFSET

SURFACE

MULTI-SURFACES

SURFACE CONTOUR

CURVE Create an offset curve.

CONTOUR Create an offset contour.

3D OFFSET Create an offset curve by projecting a curve onto a selectedplane, within a specified tolerance.

SURFACE Create an offset surface.

MULTI-SURFACES Create an offset for a multi-surfaces shape in a givendirection.

SURFACE CONTOUR Create an offset for a contour which lies on a surface withina specified tolerance.


OFFSET

OFFSET >> CURVE

Create an offset curve from a 2D curve.

SELECT FIXED OFFSET VARIABLE OFFSET

CURVE >> FIXED OFFSET

Create an offset curve at a fixed distance.

How To:

1. Pick a 2D curve as the entity from which to create an offset.

2. Indicate the side to create the offset.

Interaction:

PICK CURVE OFFSET = TRIM LOOPS / KEEP ORIGINAL / AS ORIGINAL / NO ATTRIB /

KEEP LOOPS DELETE ORIGINAL AS ACTIVE SAME ATTRIB

PICK CURVE Pick a 2D curve as the entity from which you wish to createan offset.

IND. OFFSET SIDE Indicate the side to create the offset.

EXECUTING The offset curve is created.


OFFSET

OFFSET

IND. OFFSET SIDE

PICK CURVE

Figure 1-39: OFFSET >> FIXED CURVE

CURVE >> VARIABLE OFFSET

Create an offset curve at a variable distance.

How To:

1. Pick a 2D curve as the entity from which to create an offset.


3. Indicate the direction of the offset entity.

Interaction:

PICK CURVE TOL = OFFSET1 = OFFSET2 = KEEP ORIGINAL / AS ORIGINAL / NO ATTRIB /

DELETE ORIGINAL AS ACTIVE SAME ATTRIB

PICK CURVE Pick a 2D curve as the entity from which you wish to createan offset.


IND. OFFSET DIR. Indicate the direction of the offset entity. The start point willbe offset with the value OFFSET1 and end point with thevalue OFFSET2.



OFFSET

OFFSET SIDE

OFFSET DIR.OFFSET 1

OFFSET 2

PICK CURVE

Figure 1-40: OFFSET >> VARIABLE OFFSET

OFFSET >> CONTOUR

Create an offset contour.

How To:

1. Pick the first curve of the open or closed contour.



OFFSET

PICK NTH CRV/EXIT IND. OFFSET SIDE

PICK 1ST CRV.

IND. DIRECTION

Figure 1-41: OFFSET >>

OPEN CONTOUR >> SHARP CORNER

PICK NTH CRV.IND. OFFSET SIDE

PICK 1ST CRV.

IND. DIRECTION

Figure 1-42: OFFSET >>

CLOSED CONTOUR >> ROUND CORNER

Interaction:

SELECT CLOSED CONTOUR OPEN CONTOUR

CLOSED CONTOUR The first and the last curves of the contour will be trimmedat their intersection point.

OPEN CONTOUR Trimming will not be applied to the first curve at its firstendpoint or to the last curve at its second endpoint.

PICK 1ST CURVE OFFSET = ROUND CORNER / KEEP ORIGINAL /

SHARP CORNER DELETE ORIGINAL

PICK 1ST CURVE Pick the first curve of the open or closed contour.


EXECUTING The offset is created.

<CR> TO CONTINUE OFFSET = ROUND CORNER / KEEP ORIGINAL / FROM SAME CONTOUR /

SHARP CORNER DELETE ORIGINAL FROM NEW CONTOUR

<CR> TO CONTINUE Press <CR> to continue offset creation.


OFFSET

OFFSET >> 3D OFFSET

Create an offset curve by projecting a curve onto a selected plane, within a specified tolerance.

How To:

1. Define offset plane.

2. Pick a curve from which to create an offset.


Interaction:

PICK CURVE TOL = OFFSET = KEEP ORIGINAL / AS ORIGINAL /

NO ATTRIB / DELETE ORIGINAL AS ACTIVE

SAME ATTRIB

DEFINE OFFSET PLANE Use a work plane option to define a plane. See Defining aPlane in Chapter 3, of the Fundamentals & GeneralFunctions Manual.

PICK CURVE Pick a curve from which you wish to create an offset.




OFFSET

PICK CURVES

IND. OFFSET SIDE

DEFINE OFFSET PLANE( CURVES )

OFFSET 3D OFFSET

OFFSET CONTOUR

X

Y

Figure 1-43: OFFSET >> 3D OFFSET

OFFSET >> SURFACE

Create an offset surface.

SELECT FIXED OFFSET VARIABLE OFFSET

SURFACE >> FIXED OFFSET

Create an offset surface at a fixed distance.

How To:

1. Pick an existing surface.


Interaction:

PICK SURFACE OFFSET = KEEP ORIGINAL / AS ORIGINAL / NO ATTRIB /


PICK SURFACE Pick an existing surface.




OFFSET

OFFSET SIDE

PICK SURFACE

Figure 1-44: OFFSET >> FIXED OFFSET

SURFACE >> VARIABLE OFFSET

Create an offset surface at a variable distance.

How To:

1. Set the offset parameters in the modal table.



4. Indicate the three surface corners to be offset.

Interaction:



IND. 1ST CORNER TOL = OFFSET 1STCORNER =

OFFSET 2NDCORNER =

KEEPORIGINAL AS ORIGINAL NO ATTRIB

OFFSET 3RDCORNER =

OFFSET 4THCORNER =

DELETEORIGINAL AS ACTIVE SAME ATTRIB

IND. 1ST CORNER Indicate the surface corner to be offset by the valueOFFSET1.

IND. 2ND CORNER Indicate the surface corner to be offset by the valueOFFSET2.


OFFSET

TOL. = 0.1

OFFSET 1ST CORNER

OFFSET 2ND CORNER

OFFSET 3RD CORNER

OFFSET 4TH CORNER

IND.3RD CORNER

V UPICK SURFACE

IND. OFFSET SIDE

IND.1ST CORNER

IND. 2ND CORNER

Figure 1-45: OFFSET >> VARIABLE OFFSET

IND. 3RD CORNER/EXIT Indicate the surface corner to be offset by the valueOFFSET3 or press <EXIT>.

CONTINUE ? YES NO YES Accept the defined offset.

NO Define a different offset.

EXECUTING The offset surface is created.

OFFSET >> MULTI-SURFACES

Create offset surfaces for a group of surfaces.

How To:

1. Pick a group of surfaces.

1. Indicate the direction of the offset and set the modals.

Interaction:

PICK SURFACES & EXIT OFFSET =

PICK SURFACES & EXIT Pick a group of surfaces. The multi-pick submenu isavailable.

INDICATE DIRECTION An arrow will appear for each group of connected surfaces.Indicate the direction of the offset.

<CR> TO CONTINUE OFFSET = KEEP ORIGINAL / AS ORIGINAL / NO ATTRIB /


<CR> TO CONTINUE Set modals and press <CR>.

EXECUTING The offset surfaces are created.


OFFSET

IND. DIRECTION

PICK SURFACE

Figure 1-46: OFFSET >> MULTI-SURFACES

OFFSET >> SURFACE CONTOUR

Create an offset either for a contour which lies on a surface or for an implicit surfaceboundary.

How To:


2. Indicate the side to create the offset and define the contour.

Interaction:

PICK SURFACE OFFSET = TOL =



PICK 1ST CRV/EXIT Define the contour.



OFFSET

IND. OFFSET SIDE

PICK SURFACE

PICK 3RD CRV/EXIT

PICK 1ST CRV.

PICK 2ND CRV

IND. DIRECTION

Figure 1-47: OFFSET >> SURFACE CONTOUR

OFFSET Modal Parameter Definitions


� AS ACTIVE Assign the level, line font, pen and color of the active levelto the new entity.

� AS ORIGINAL Assign the level, line font, pen and color of the originalentity to the new entity.

� DELETE ORIGINAL Delete the original entity.

� FROM NEW CONTOUR Define a new contour to be offset.

� FROM SAME CONTOUR This modal option appears only after the first contour hasbeen offset. It allows a new offset contour to be created fromthe same original contour.

� KEEP LOOPS Keep any loops produced by the offset.

� KEEP ORIGINAL Retain the original entity.

� NO ATTRIB Do not attach any attribute records to the new entity.

� OFFSET = Enter an offset distance.

� OFFSET1 = Enter variable offset curve values.

OFFSET2 =

� OFFSET 1ST CORNER Enter variable offset surface values.

OFFSET 2ND CORNER

OFFSET 3RD CORNER

OFFSET 4TH CORNER

� ROUND CORNER If two offset curves do not intersect, they will be connectedby an arc whose center is on the intersection point of thepicked curves and whose radius is the OFFSET VALUE. SeeFigure 1-42, page 1-62.

� SAME ATTRIB Attach the attribute records of the original entity to the newentity.


OFFSET

KEEP LOOPS

TRIM LOOPS

Figure 1-48: OFFSET >> TRIM LOOPS, KEEP LOOPS

� SHARP CORNER If two offset curves do not intersect, they will be extended bylines up to the intersection point. See Figure 1-41, page 1-62.

� TOL = Maximum approximation tolerance.

� TRIM LOOPS Trim any loops produced by the offset. See Figure 1-48.

OFFSET Usage Envelope

CURVE

1. The offset of a line is always a line entity.

2. With the exception of the two entity types below, the FIXED OFFSET of an entityresults in a special entity type: OFFSET entity with reference to the original entity.

The FIXED OFFSET of a circle/arc results in a circle/arc entity.

The FIXED OFFSET of a composite curve results in a composite curveentity.

3. The VARIABLE OFFSET of an entity (with the exception of a line), results in aNURBS Spline.

4. VARIABLE OFFSET is only used for smooth curves.

5. The TRIM LOOPS option is not implemented for VARIABLE OFFSET.

6. If VARIABLE OFFSET is selected and OFFSET1 = OFFSET2, the result is similar tothe FIXED OFFSET option without TRIM LOOPS.

7. If DELETE ORIGINAL is selected, the result is the same as the AS ORIGINAL option.

8. After offsetting a composite curve, the modal TRIM LOOPS / KEEP LOOPS is toggledto modal ROUND CORNER / SHARP CORNER.

9. All offset values must be less than the minimum curvature of the curve.

CONTOUR

1. The options ROUND CORNER / SHARP CORNER are only used if two offset curvesdo not intersect.

2. All curves must lie on one plane.

3. Composite curves will be exploded during the offset operation.

4. Only contour loops will be trimmed automatically.

The options TRIM LOOPS / KEEP LOOPS are applicable for looped curves.

3D OFFSET

1. If DELETE ORIGINAL is selected, the new entity has the same attributes as theoriginal entity.

2. 3D OFFSET is not implemented for unsmooth curves.

3. The result is a NURBS Spline.

4. An offset plane cannot be perpendicular to the curve plane ( if the curve lies on aplane).

SURFACE

1. Unsmooth surfaces are considered illegal input.

2. VARIABLE OFFSET is not implemented yet for trimmed surfaces.

3. All offset values must be less than the minimum curvature of the surface.


OFFSET

4. If offset values are different, the result of a VARIABLE OFFSET is a NURBS surface.

5. If offset values are equal, the result of a VARIABLE OFFSET is a surface of thesame type as the original.

6. With VARIABLE OFFSET:

If the picked surface has 4 edges, 4 parameters are displayed:OFFSET 1ST CORNER =, OFFSET 2ND CORNER =,OFFSET 3RD CORNER =, OFFSET 4TH CORNER =.

The user is required to indicate 3 corners.

If the picked surface has 3 edges, 3 parameters are displayed:OFFSET 1ST CORNER =, OFFSET 2ND CORNER =,OFFSET 3RD CORNER =.

The user is required to indicate 2 corners.

If the picked surface has 2 edges, 2 parameters are displayed:OFFSET 1ST CORNER =, OFFSET 2ND CORNER =.

The user is required to indicate only 1 corner.

7. To offset 2 opposite edges and not each corner, indicate 2 corners as follows:

1st corner - a corner of one of the edges to be offset;2nd corner - a corner of the other edge to be offset.Both corners must share a common edge.The 2 remaining corners will assume the corresponding values.

Press <EXIT> to execute.

8. With VARIABLE OFFSET, U-V start and end arrows are indicated when the surface ispicked.

MULTI-SURFACE

1. Unsmooth surfaces are considered illegal input.

SURFACE CONTOUR

1. Implicit surface boundaries may be used for contour definition.

2. Curves have to be completely within a surface boundary. The TRIM LOOPS option isnot implemented.

3. The result is a NURBS Spline. �


OFFSET

POINT Create a point entity.

Main Options:

SELECT SINGLE POINT

MULTI-POINTS

SINGLE POINT Create one point entity.

MULTI-POINTS Create one or more point entities along a curve or along itsextension.

Notes: • Point entities are represented by a small cross on the screen.


POINT >> SINGLE POINT

Create one point entity.

These options are described in detail in the order they are listed in the menu.

SCREEN

END

MID

INTERS

CENTER

PIERCE

CLOSE

PICK

KEY IN

DELTA

SURF

SURF-B

SURF-C

SURF-X

UCSORG

INSORG

TP NOD

DIGITIZ

FEMNOD


POINT

SINGLE POINT >> SCREEN

Create a point entity on the active work plane by graphically indicating its positionon the screen.

How To:

1. Indicate a point’s position on the screen.

Interaction:

Note: • If the active work plane, is perpendicular to the screen, the pointwill be created where a line perpendicular to the screen intersects aplane which is parallel to the display. The line will pass through thepicked position. The plane which is parallel to the display will passthrough the origin of the Model coordinate system.

SCREEN: IND. POSITION Indicate a point’s position on the screen.

Note: • If GRID is ON, the point entity is created in the position of thenearest grid point.

SINGLE POINT >> END

Create a point entity at the endpoint of a curve closest to the pick position.

How To:

1. Pick the curve in a position close to the desired endpoint.

Interaction:

END: PICK CURVE Pick the curve in a position close to the desired endpoint.


POINT

IND. POSITION ( SCREEN )

Figure 1-49: POINT >> SINGLE POINT >> SCREEN

PICK CURVE ( END )

Figure 1-50: POINT >> SINGLE POINT >> END

SINGLE POINT >> MID

Create a point entity at the midpoint of a curve.

How To:

1. Pick a curve.

Interaction:

MID: PICK CURVE Pick a curve.

SINGLE POINT >> INTERS

Create a point entity at the intersection point of two curves.

How To:

1. Pick two curves close to the intersection point.

Interaction:

INTERS: 1ST CURVE Pick a curve at a position close to the intersection point.

INTERS: 2ND CURVE Pick the second curve at a position close to the intersectionpoint.


POINT

PICK CURVE ( MID )

Figure 1-51: POINT >> SINGLE POINT >> MID

1ST CURVE

2ND CURVEINTERS.

Figure 1-52: POINT >> SINGLE POINT >> INTERS

SINGLE POINT >> CENTER

Create a point entity at the geometric center of an arc, circle or conic section.

How To:

1. Pick the arc, circle or conic section.

Interaction:

CENTR: PICK ARC/CONIC Pick the arc, circle or conic section.


POINT

PICK ARC ( CENTER )

Figure 1-53: POINT >> SINGLE POINT >>

CENTER

SINGLE POINT >> PIERCE

Create a point entity at the intersection of a curve and a surface or a plane.

How To:

1. Pick a curve that intersects a surface or plane or indicate a plane.

2. Pick a surface.

Interaction:

PIERCE: PICK CURVE Pick a curve that intersects a surface or plane.

PIERCE:IND. PLN/SURF Pick a surface.

or: Pick a UCS to use its XY plane.

or: Press <EXIT> to use the active work plane.

or: Pick a curve.

PICK 2ND CURVE Pick another curve to define a work plane.

Note: • When using a PIERCE point as the implicit point in anotherfunction, the interaction will not be displayed.


POINT

PICK CURVE

POINT PIERCE

PICK SURFACE

Figure 1-54: POINT >> SINGLE POINT >> PIERCE

SINGLE POINT >> CLOSE

Create a point entity on a curve close to where the curve was picked.

How To:

1. Pick the curve close to the desired location of the point entity.

Interaction:

CLOSE: PICK CURVE Pick the curve close to the desired location of the pointentity.

SINGLE POINT >> PICK

Create a point entity which coincides with another point entity.

PICK: PICK POINT Pick an existing point entity.


POINT

PICK CLOSE

Figure 1-55: POINT >> SINGLE POINT >> CLOSE

SINGLE POINT >> KEY IN

Create a point entity by keying in its coordinates.

How To:

1. Key in the coordinate system values and press SELECT COORD. SYSTEM to createthe point.

Interaction:

Note: • The default values for the modals will be those entered the last timethis option was used.

See Verify, Change or Increment the Coordinates of Points inChapter 3, of the Fundamentals & General FunctionsManual, for a detailed explanation of the modals below.

SELECT COORD. SYSTEM X = 0.000 Y = Z =

CARTESIAN / MODAL

CYLINDRICAL /

SPHERICAL

SELECT COORD. SYSTEM Press <CR> or <PICK> the prompt area to create thepoint.Continue to create points or <EXIT>.


POINT

SINGLE POINT >> DELTA

Create a point entity by entering increments for the X, Y and Z coordinates of areference point.

How To:

1. Key in the coordinate values and press SELECT COORD. SYSTEM to create thepoint or given delta from another point.

Interaction:

Note: • The default values for the modals will be those entered the last timethis option was used.

SCREEN: IND.POSITION Indicate a reference point. SCREEN is the default. Theprompt will vary depending on the active point indicationoption which is displayed in the status area.

Press <SUBMENU> to use a different option to indicate thereference point.

The coordinates of the reference point will be incremented todetermine the coordinates of the point to be created.

See Verify, Change or Increment the Coordinates of Points inChapter 3, of the Fundamentals & General FunctionsManual, for a detailed explanation of the modals below.

SELECT COORD. SYSTEM X = Y = Z =

CARTESIAN / MODAL

CYLINDRICAL /

SPHERICAL

SELECT COORD. SYSTEM Press <CR> or <PICK> the prompt area to updatechanges.

Continue to create points or <EXIT>.


POINT

IND. POSITION

B. CARTESIAN COORD. SYSTEM

DX = 20.00 DY = 10.00 DZ = 0.00

A

B

20

10

Figure 1-56: POINT >> SINGLE POINT >> DELTA

SINGLE POINT >> SURF

Create a point entity on a surface at the display curve closest to where the surfacewas picked.

How To:

1. Pick the surface at a position close to where the point is to be created.

Interaction:

PICK SURFACE Pick the surface at a position close to where the point is to becreated.

SINGLE POINT >> SURF-B

Create a point entity on a surface’s boundary close to where the surface was picked.

How To:

1. Pick a surface as close as possible to the desired position on the surface’s boundary.

Interaction:

PICK SURFACE Pick a surface in a spot as close as possible to the desiredposition on the surface’s boundary.


POINT

IND. POSITIONS SURF.

PICK SURFACE

Figure 1-57: POINT >> SINGLE POINT >> SURF

IND. POSITIONS SURF.-B

PICK SURFACE

Figure 1-58: POINT >> SINGLE POINT >> SURF-B

SINGLE POINT >> SURF-C

Create a point entity at a surface corner close to where the surface was picked.

How To:

1. Pick a surface as close as possible to the desired corner.

Interaction:

PICK SURFACE Pick a surface in a position as close as possible to thedesired corner.


POINT

IND. POSITIONS SURF - C

PICK SURFACE

Figure 1-59: POINT >> SINGLE POINT >> SURF-C

SINGLE POINT >> SURF-X

Create a point entity at the intersection point of two display curves of a surface.

How To:

1. Pick a surface close to the desired intersection point of two display curves.

Interaction:

PICK SURFACE Pick a surface in a position close to the desired intersectionpoint of two display curves.

SINGLE POINT >> UCSORG

Create a point entry at the origin or a displayed UCS.

How To:

1. Pick the UCS to create a point entity.

Interaction:

PICK UCS Pick the UCS to create a point entity.

SINGLE POINT >> INSORG

If an instance is displayed, create a point entity at the origin of the instance.

PICK INSTANCE Pick the instance to create a point entity.


POINT

IND. POSITIONS SURF.-X

PICK SURFACE

Figure 1-60: POINT >> SINGLE POINT >> SURF-X

SINGLE POINT >> TP NOD

In the NC application, if a tool path is open, use this option to create a point at a picked node in atool path. TP NOD will be displayed in the status area when it is “on”.

SINGLE POINT >> DIGITZ

If a digitizer is open, use this option to create a point entity.

<PICK> FOR DIGTZR Press <PICK> to create a point.

SINGLE POINT >> FEMNOD

In the FEM application, if a FEMSYS is open, use this option to create a point at a picked node ona finite element. FEMNOD will be displayed in the status area when it is “on”.


POINT

POINT >> MULTI-POINTS

Create one or more points along a curve or along its extension.

POINTS ON CURVE: BY DISTANCE NO. OF INTERVALS ANGLES ON ARC

BY DISTANCE Create points at given distances from a reference point andfrom one another along a curve or its extension.

NO. OF INTERVALS Create points along a curve which divide the curve into agiven number of intervals.

ANGLES ON ARC Create points at a given number of degrees from a referencepoint or the X axis, and from one another, along a curve orits extension.

MULTI-POINTS >> BY DISTANCE

Create points at given distances from a reference point and from one another along acurve or its extension.

How To:

1. Pick a reference curve and indicate a reference point from which the first distance willbe measured.


Interaction:

DIST: PICK CURVE DISTANCE = COUNT =

DIST: PICK CURVE Pick a reference curve along which points are to be created.

DIST: IND.POINT Indicate a reference point from which the first distance willbe measured.

DIST: IND. DIRECTION Indicate the direction along the reference curve in which thedistance should be measured.

The points will be created. Create more points or <EXIT>.


POINT

IND. DIRECTION

IND. POINT

COUNT = 4

PICK CURVE

DISTANCE

DIRECTION

Figure 1-61: POINT >> MULTI-POINTS >> BY DISTANCE

MULTI-POINTS >> NO. OF INTERVALS

Create points along a curve which divide the curve into a given number of intervals.

How To:

1. Enter the number of intervals.

2. Pick a reference curve. (If PART is selected, indicate two points).

Interaction:

PICK CURVE WHOLE / NO. OF INTERVALS =

PART

PICK CURVE Pick the reference curve.

If WHOLE is selected, the points will be created. Createmore points or <EXIT>.

If PART is selected, the following appears:

IND. 1ST POINT

IND. 2ND POINT

Indicate two points to define the PART of the referencecurve that will be divided into intervals to determine thepositions of the new points.



POINT

IND. 1ST. POINT IND. 2ND. POINT

NO OF INTERVALS = 5

PICK CURVE

Figure 1-62: POINT >> MULTI-POINTS >> NO. OF INTERVALS

MULTI-POINTS >> ANGLES ON ARC

How To:

1. Pick an arc or circle.

2. Enter the angle and the number of points (where applicable).

Interaction:

PICK ARC FROM START POINT /

FROM GIVEN POINT

PICK ARC Pick an arc/circle entity on which, or on whose extension, thepoints will be created.

If the modal FROM START POINT is selected, enter theangle to be formed by the center point of the arc/circle, thestarting point, and the new point.

<CR> TO CONTINUE ANGLE =

Repeat for each point.

If the modal FROM GIVEN POINT is selected, enter theincrement angle from the indicated point and between newpoints which will be measured to determine the position ofeach new point.

IND.POINT DELTA = COUNT =



POINT

PICK ARC

IND. POINT

DELTA = 30 / COUNT = 3

ANGLE = 30

Figure 1-63: POINT >> MULTI-POINTS >>

ANGLES ON ARC

POINT Modal Parameter Definitions


� ANGLE = Enter the angle.

� FROM GIVEN POINT Create a first point at a given number of degrees from areference point on the arc/circle.

� FROM START POINT Create a point on the arc/circle a given number of degreesfrom the starting point of the arc/circle.

� COUNT = Enter the number of points to be created. If COUNT > 1,create subsequent points at a given number of degrees(DELTA) from one another.

� DELTA = Increment angle.

� DISTANCE = Enter the distance between the reference point and the firstnew point, and between any other new points. The distancewill be measured along the curve.

� NO. OF INTERVALS = Enter the number of intervals into which the curve will bedivided to determine the positions of the new points.

� PART Part of the reference curve will be divided into intervals.

� WHOLE The entire reference curve will be divided into intervals.

POINT Usage Envelope

1. The option SINGLE POINT >> SURF-X is not appropriate for clipped boundaries oftrimmed surfaces. �


POINT

PROJECT Create a new entity by projecting an original entity onto aplane, surface(s) or planar face(s).

Main Options:

SELECT OPTION PROJECT POINTS

PROJECT CURV & PNT

PROJECT CONTOUR

PROJECT POINTS Project points (including implicit points) onto a plane,surface(s) or planar face(s).

PROJECT CURV & PNT Project entities (curves or points) onto a specified plane,surface(s) or planar face(s).

PROJECT CONTOUR Project a contour onto a plane, surface(s) or planar face(s).

PROJECT >> PROJECT POINTS

Project points (including implicit points) onto a plane, surface(s) or planar face(s).

IND. 1ST POINT Indicate the first point, or use <SUBMENU> for selecting thepoints.

IND. NTH POINT Indicate the Nth point.

Press <EXIT> when all the points to be projected have beenpicked.

POINTS O.K.? YES NO YES Accept the points.

NO Repick the points.

SELECT OPTION PLANE PROJ

SURFACE PROJ

PROJECT POINTS >> PLANE PROJECT

Project points onto a plane.

How To:

1. Define the projection plane.

Interaction:

SELECT DIRECTION PROJECT

NORMAL PROJECT

DEFINE PLANE Define a plane for projection, or use <SUBMENU> to selecta plane.


PROJECT

PROJECT POINTS >> PLANE PROJECT >> DIRECTION PROJECT

Project points onto a defined plane in a specified direction.

How To:

1. Indicate a direction.


Interaction:

DIRECTION: PICK CURVE Indicate a direction, or define a direction using <SUBMENU>.

<CR> TO CONTINUE LINE OFF /

LINE ON

<CR> TO CONTINUE Set parameters and press <CR>.

EXECUTING The projection will be created.

PROJECT POINTS >> PLANE PROJECT >> NORMAL PROJECT

Project points normally onto a defined plane.

How To:

1. Set the modal parameters and press <CR>.

Interaction:

<CR> TO CONTINUE LINE OFF /

LINE ON



PROJECT POINTS >> SURFACE PROJECT

Project points onto a surface(s) or planar face(s).

How To:

1. Pick a surface(s) or planar face(s) and confirm the selection.

Interaction:

PICK SURFACES & EXIT Pick a surface(s) or planar face(s) onto which to project thepoints. Use <SUBMENU> to pick many surfaces and planarfaces. Press <EXIT> when finished.


PROJECT

SURFACES O.K.? YES NO

YES Accept the surfaces.

NO Repick the surfaces.


NORMAL PROJECT

PROJECT POINTS >> SURFACE PROJECT >> DIRECTION PROJECT

Project points onto a defined surface(s) or planar face(s) in a specified direction.

How To:



Interaction:

DIRECTION: PICK CURVE Indicate a direction, or define a direction using<SUBMENU>.

<CR> TO CONTINUE LINE OFF / TOL =

LINE ON



PROJECT POINTS >> SURFACE PROJECT >> NORMAL PROJECT

Project points normally onto a defined surface(s) or planar face(s).

How To:


Interaction:

<CR> TO CONTINUE LINE OFF / TOL =

LINE ON




PROJECT

PROJECT >> PROJECT CURVES & PNT

Project entities (points and curves) onto a plane, surface(s) or planar face(s).

How To:

1. Pick the curves and points to be projected and confirm the selection.

Interaction:

PICK ENTITIES & EXIT Pick the curves and the points to be projected, or use<SUBMENU>. Press <EXIT> when finished.

ENTITIES O.K.? YES NO YES Accept the entities.

NO Repick the entities.


SURFACE PROJ

PROJECT CURVES & PNT >> PLANE PROJECT

Project entities (points and curves) onto a plane.

How To:

1. Define a plane for projection.

Interaction:

DEFINE PLANE Define a plane for projection, or use <SUBMENU> to selectto plane.


NORMAL PROJECT


PROJECT

PROJECT CURVES & PNT >> PLANE PROJECT >> DIRECTION PROJECT

Project entities (points and curves) onto a defined plane in a specified direction.

How To:

1. Indicate a direction,


Interaction:


<CR> TO CONTINUE KEEP ORIGINAL / AS ORIGINAL / NO ATTRIB / LINE OFF / ANGLE = TOL =

DELETE ORIGINAL AS ACTIVE SAME ATTRIB LINE ON




PROJECT

DEFINE PLANE

PICK ENTITIES PICK DIR. CURVE

IND. DIRECTION

DIRECTION

LINE OFF

LINE ON

NORMAL

Figure 1-64: PROJECT CURVES & PNT >> PLANE PROJECT >> DIRECTION

PROJECT

PROJECT CURVES & PNT >> PLANE PROJECT >> NORMAL PROJECT

Project entities (points and curves) normally onto a defined plane.

<CR> TO CONTINUE KEEP ORIGINAL / AS ORIGINAL / NO ATTRIB / LINE OFF /




PROJECT CURVES & PNT >> SURFACE PROJECT

Project entities (points and curves) onto a surface(s) or planar face(s).

How To:


Interaction:

PICK SURFACES & EXIT Pick a surface(s) or planar face(s) onto which to project theentities. Use <SUBMENU> to pick many surfaces and planarfaces. Press <EXIT> when finished.





NORMAL PROJECT


PROJECT

PROJECT CURVES & PNT >> SURFACE PROJECT >> DIRECTION

PROJECT

Project entities (points and curves) onto a defined surface(s) or planar face(s) in aspecified direction.

How To:

1. Indicate a direction




PROJECT

PICK SURFACE

IND. DIRECTION

PICK ENTITIES

PICK REF. CURVE

GLOBAL BOTH SIDES

GLOBAL ONE SIDE

LOCAL

Figure 1-65: PROJECT CURVES & PNT >> SURFACE PROJECT >> DIRECTION PROJECT

<CR> TOCONTINUE

GLOBAL BOTHSIDES KEEP ORIGINAL / AS ORIGINAL / NO ATTRIB / LINE OFF / ANGLE = TOL =


GLOBAL BOTH SIDES

GLOBAL ONE SIDE

LOCAL


EXECUTING The projection(s) will be created.

PROJECT CURVES & PNT >> SURFACE PROJECT >> NORMAL PROJECT

Project entities (points and curves) normally onto a defined surface(s) or planarface(s).

How To:


Interaction:

<CR> TO CONTINUE KEEP ORIGINAL AS ORIGINAL NO ATTRIB LINE OFF TOL =





PROJECT

PROJECT >> PROJECT CONTOUR

Project a contour onto a plane, surface(s) or planar face(s).

How To:

1. Pick the first curve of the contour.

2. Indicate the desired direction.

3. Pick the nth curve.

Interaction:


See Defining Contours in Chapter 3, of the Fundamentals & General Functions Manual for adetailed description of Open and Closed Contours.

Define the contour to be projected.

PICK 1ST CURVE Pick the first curve of the contour.


PICK NTH CURVE Pick the nth curve.


SURFACE PROJ

PROJECT CONTOUR >> PLANE PROJECT

Project a contour onto a plane.

How To:

1. Define a plane for projection.

Interaction:

DEFINE PLANE Define a plane for projection, or use <SUBMENU> to selecta plane.


NORMAL PROJECT


PROJECT

PROJECT CONTOUR >> PLANE PROJECT >> DIRECTION PROJECT

Project a contour onto a defined plane in a specified direction.

How To:

1. Indicate a direction and set the modal parameters.

Interaction:




ANGLE = TOL = ROUND CORNER

SHARP CORNER



PROJECT CONTOUR >> PLANE PROJECT >> NORMAL PROJECT

Project a contour normally onto a defined plane.

How To:


Interaction:






PROJECT

PROJECT CONTOUR >> SURFACE PROJECT

Project a contour onto a surface(s) or planar face(s).

How To:


Interaction:

PICK SURFACES & EXIT Pick a surface(s) or planar face(s) onto which to project theentities. Use <SUBMENU> to pick many surfaces and planarfaces. Press <EXIT> when finished.





NORMAL PROJECT

PROJECT CONTOUR >> SURFACE PROJECT >> DIRECTION PROJECT

Project a contour onto a defined surface(s) or planar face(s) in a specified direction.

How To:



Interaction:


<CR> TO CONTINUE KEEP ORIGINAL / AS ORIGINAL / NO ATTRIB / LINE OFF / ANGLE = TOL =





PROJECT

PICK SURFACE

IND. DIRECTION

IND. CONTOUR

PICK DIR. CURVE

Figure 1-66: PROJECT CONTOUR >> SURFACE PROJECT >> DIRECTION

PROJECT

PROJECT CONTOUR >> SURFACE PROJECT >> NORMAL PROJECT

Project a contour normally onto a defined surface(s) or planar face(s).

How To:


Interaction:

<CR> TO CONTINUE KEEP ORIGINAL AS ORIGINAL NO ATTRIB LINE OFF TOL =




PROJECT Modal Parameter Definitions


� ANGLE = Specify the draft angle of the projection.

� AS ACTIVE Assign the active level, line font, pen and color to the newlycreated entities.

� AS ORIGINAL Assign the level, line font, pen and color of the originalentities to the newly created entities.

� DELETE ORIGINAL Delete the original entities after projecting them.

� KEEP ORIGINAL Keep the original entities.

� GLOBAL BOTH SIDES The projection will be performed globally, both in theselected direction and the opposing direction.

� GLOBAL ONE SIDE The projection will be performed globally in the selecteddirection.

� LINE OFF Do not connect the endpoints with lines.

� LINE ON Connect the endpoints of the original entities to the endpointsof the new entities with lines.

� LOCAL The projection will be performed locally in the region nearthe picked point on the surface.

� NO ATTRIB Do not attach any attribute records to the new entities.

� SAME ATTRIB Attach attribute records of the original entities to the newlycreated entities.

� TOL = Enter the maximum tolerance.

� ROUND CORNER If two projected curves do not intersect, they will beconnected by an arc whose center is on the intersection pointof the picked curves and whose radius is the function of theprojection angle and the projection distance.

� SHARP CORNER If two projected curves do not intersect, they will beconnected and their edges trimmed.


PROJECT

PROJECT Usage Envelope

1. In option PROJECT POINTS, the Point Indication submenu may be used.

2. In option PROJECT CURV & PNT, only explicit points may be projected and theSelect Entity <SUBMENU> may be used.

3. The draft angle is used only for DIRECTION PROJECT.

4. If the option DELETE ORIGINAL is set, the parameters AS ACTIVE / AS ORIGINALare not displayed. The result will always be AS ORIGINAL.

5. In the option PROJECT CURV & PNT, the maximum number of entities that may beprojected is 1024.

6. In the option PROJECT CURV & PNT, the GLOBAL options should be used whenprojecting on closed surfaces, or other surfaces for which more than one projectionmay result.

PLANE PROJECT

1. Projecting a line creates a new line entity.

2. Projecting a 2D curve which lies on a plane parallel to the active plane, creates thesame type of curve entity.

3. In most other cases, a PROJECTED entity is created. The new entity has reference tothe original entity. In certain cases, a 2D NURBS spline will be created (to facilitateHatching in the Drafting application).

4. When a 2D curve is projected onto a plane that is perpendicular to it, it is convertedinto a straight line entity.

SURFACE PROJECT

1. Whenever possible the result of the projection will be a line, arc, or 2D NURBSSpline.

In other cases the result will be a 3D NURBS Spline.

2. A closed contour will be closed after the projection.

Loops between curves in a contour will be trimmed.

3. If ANGLE = 0, there is no difference between projecting curves and contours.

If ANGLE ≠ 0, connected curves are projected as separate entities with gaps betweenthem. When a contour is projected, these gaps are automatically closed. The entitiesthat fill the gaps are always created AS ACTIVE.

DIRECTION >> LOCAL

4. This function is sensitive to the picking point. In certain cases not all picking pointsyield a result. �


PROJECT

SPLINE Create a 2D or 3D NURBS (Non-Uniform Rational B Spline)spline curve by defining points.

Main Options:

SELECT 2D SPLINE

3D SPLINE

2D SPLINE Create a 2D spline curve on a given plane.

In 3D mode, the 2D SPLINE option requires definition of anactive work plane which is valid for the current session only.

In 2D mode, the active work plane will be used.

3D SPLINE Create a 3D spline curve.

Notes: • The quality of the displayed spline is determined by the value of theDISPLAY TOLERANCE variable of the spline entity. To displaythe curve more accurately, increase this value using DISPLAY >>REFINE.

• When 2D SPLINE is selected, the DEFINE PLANE options will bedisplayed before the next level of SPLINE options.


The prompts and modals that follow describe the interaction for both 2D and 3D splines.

SELECT THROUGH POINTS

CONTROL POINTS

FAIRING POINTS


SPLINE

SPLINE >> THROUGH POINTS

Create a spline that passes through all of the selected points, with the definedendpoint conditions.

How To:

1. Indicate the first endpoint of the spline.

2. Pick a curve to define the slope at the endpoint of the spline (if the DEFINE SLOPEoption is set).

3. Indicate the desired direction then indicate additional points (if the DEFINE SLOPEoption is set).

4. Indicate the last point (for MULTI POINTS). (Second point for SINGLE POINTS).

5. Pick points between the first and last points and confirm the selection (for MULTIPOINTS ONLY).

Interaction:

IND. 1ST. POINT FREE SLOPE / SINGLE POINTS /

DEFINE SLOPE MULTI POINTS

IND. 1ST POINT Indicate the first endpoint of the spline. The point indicationsubmenu is available.

DEFINE SLOPE modal only:

DIRECTION: PICK CURVE Pick a curve to define the slope at the endpoint of the spline.

The default DEFINE SLOPE sub-option used to define theslope is IND, unless 2PT was the last used sub-option for thisfunction in the current session. (See Define Slope andDirection in Chapter 3, of the Fundamentals & GeneralFunctions Manual).


SPLINE

IND. DIRECTION

IND. NTH POINT

IND. 1ST POINT

IND. DIRECTION

PICK CURVE

Figure 1-67: SPLINE >> THROUGH POINTS (DEFINE SLOPE - SINGLE POINTS)

To change the sub-option, press <SUBMENU> at the firstendpoint, or press <REJECT> if the current option is 2PT.


SINGLE POINTS modal only:

IND. nTH POINT Indicate additional points. Once you have indicated the finalpoint, make sure the modals are correctly set, then press<EXIT> to end the point selection.

MULTI POINTS modal only:

IND. LAST POINT Indicate the last point.

PICK POINTS AND EXIT Pick points between the first and last points using themulti-pick submenu.

DEFINE SLOPE modal selected for final point (for bothSINGLE and MULTI POINTS modals):

Define the slope at the second endpoint of the spline asdescribed for the first.


SPLINE

IND. 1ST POINT

IND. NTH POINT

Figure 1-68: SPLINE >> THROUGH POINTS (FREE SLOPE - SINGLE POINTS)

IND. 1ST POINT IND. LAST POINT

Figure 1-69: SPLINE >> THROUGH POINTS (FREE SLOPE - MULTI POINTS (PICK ALL)

FREE SLOPE modal selected for final point (for theSINGLE POINTS modal only):

POINTS O.K. ? YES NO YES Create the spline

NO Define additional points, or press <REJECT> to redefinepoints.

Notes: • At least two points must be defined.

• Points may be selected individually (SINGLE POINTS modal) or agroup of points may be selected, after specifying the first and lastpoints (MULTI POINTS modal).

When creating a 2D spline with the point indicationmode set at SCREEN, the dynamic display is activatedautomatically after the first 3 points have been selected.

SPLINE >> CONTROL POINTS

Define a spline by defining a sequence of control points which may be weighted.

The control points implicitly define an open polygon. The spline always lies withinthe convex hull that is defined by the control points. The spline always passes throughthe first and last control points and is tangent to the first and last line segments of thepolygon.

Note: • When creating a 2D spline with the point indication mode set atSCREEN, the dynamic display is activated automatically afterDEGREE points have been selected.


SPLINE

DEGREE = 3

WEIGHT = 1

IND. NTH POINT

3

4

WEIGHT = 3

2

1

IND. 1ST. POINT

Figure 1-70: SPLINE >> CONTROL POINTS >> NON-PERIODIC >> WITH

WEIGHTS

How To:

1. Indicate the first point and set the appropriate modal parameters.

2. Indicate nth

point.

3. Confirm the selection.

Interaction:

IND. 1ST POINT NON-PERIODIC / DEGREE = NO WEIGHTS /

PERIODIC WITH WEIGHTS WEIGHT =

IND. 1ST POINT Indicate the first point and set the appropriate modals. Thepoint indication submenu is available.

Indicate at least DEGREE + 1 points and terminate with<EXIT>.

POINTS O.K. ? YES NO YES Create the spline

NO Define additional points, or press <REJECT> toredefine points.

E X E C U T I N G ... The specified spline will be displayed.


SPLINE

IND. 1ST. POINT

IND. NTH POINT

4

5

6

1

2

3

Figure 1-71: SPLINE >> CONTROL POINTS >> PERIODIC >> NO WEIGHTS

SPLINE >> FAIRING POINTS

In this option, a NURBS spline is fit to a sequence of points within the definedtolerance. The result is a least square NURBS spline composed of the minimumnumber of points required to meet the given tolerance.

The spline always passes through the first and last fairing points.

Notes: • At least four points must be defined.

• Points may be selected individually (SINGLE POINTS modal) or agroup of points may be selected, after specifying the first and lastpoints (MULTI POINTS modal).

How To:

1. Set the parameters.

2. Indicate the first endpoint of the spline and additional points.

3. Confirm the selection.

Interaction:

IND. 1ST POINT TOL = FREE SLOPE / SINGLE POINTS /

DEFINE SLOPE MULTI POINTS

IND. 1ST POINT Indicate the first endpoint of the spline. The point indicationsubmenu is available.


DIRECTION:

PICK CURVE

Pick a curve to define the slope at the endpoint of the spline.


SPLINE

IND. LAST POINT

IND. DIRECTION

TOL. = 10

TOL. = 1

IND. DIRECTION

IND. 1ST. POINT

PICK CURVE

PICK CURVE

Figure 1-72: SPLINE >> FAIRING POINTS >> DEFINE SLOPE

The default DEFINE SLOPE sub-option used to define theslope is IND, unless 2PT was the last used sub-option forthis function in the current session. (See Define Slope andDirection in Chapter 3, of the Fundamentals & GeneralFunctions Manual).



SINGLE POINTS modal only:

IND. nTH POINT Indicate additional points. Once you have indicated the finalpoint, make sure the modals are correctly set, then press<EXIT> to end the point selection.

MULTI POINTS modal only:

IND. LAST POINT Indicate the last point.

PICK POINTS

AND EXIT

Pick points between the first and last points using themulti-pick submenu.

DEFINE SLOPE modal selected for final point (for bothSINGLE and MULTI POINTS modals):

Define the slope at the second endpoint of the spline asdescribed for the first.

FREE SLOPE modal selected for final point (for theSINGLE POINTS modal only):

POINTS O.K. ?

YES NO

YES Create the spline

NO Define additional points, or press <REJECT> toredefine points.


SPLINE

SPLINE Modal Parameter Definitions


� DEFINE SLOPE Derive the slope at an endpoint of the spline using areference direction.

� DEGREE = Degree of the spline.

� FREE SLOPE The slope at the endpoint of the spline is freely defined bythe program.

� MULTI POINTS Define the points in the spline by indicating the first and lastpoints and using box pick to select the rest.

� NON-PERIODIC The spline starts at the first point and ends at the last one.This modal cannot be changed after the first point is defined.

� NO WEIGHTS No relative influence will be defined for the control points,i.e., all control points will have the same influence. Thismodal cannot be changed after the first point is defined.

� PERIODIC The spline is a closed, periodic curve, which does notnecessarily pass through the first and/or the last points. Thismodal must be set when defining the first point. After thefirst point is defined it cannot be changed.

Definition: • A PERIODIC NURBS spline is a spline whose start and end pointscoincide and whose derivatives also coincide at these points.

� SINGLE POINTS Define the spline by selecting each point.

� TOL Maximum distance between spline and the fairing points usedto create it (FAIRING POINTS option only).

� WEIGHT = If WITH WEIGHTS is selected, enter the relative influencethis control point will have on the spline.

� WITH WEIGHTS A relative influence is defined for each control point of thespline. This modal cannot be changed after the first point isdefined.

SPLINE Usage Envelope

1. Splines created with this function are always smooth.

2. The minimum degree of the spline is 3. With the exception of the CONTROL POINTSoption, the degree is set automatically.

3. When the Multi-pick modal is used, the routine starts with the first point and selectsthe nearest point as the second point and so forth. �


SPLINE

STRETCH Stretch line entities and planar faces, or move other entitytypes.

Main Options:

SELECT OPTION CURVES

PLANAR FACES

CURVES Stretch line entities or move other entity types.

PLANAR FACES Stretch planar faces.

Notes: • All entities which are not straight lines will be moved. All points inthese entities will be translated the same distance and direction.

• To stretch a line, use only the BOX or POLYGON options in theEntity Selection submenu.

• At least one end of a line must be inside the box/polygon,otherwise, the line will not be stretched.

• If both ends of a line are inside the box/polygon, the line will betranslated (moved).

• If only one end of a line is inside the box/polygon, this end it willbe translated as specified, and the other end will remain in the samelocation.


• The PLANAR FACES option is only available when working in a3D application.

• When stretching a planar face, care must be taken not to perform anillegal operation (e.g., stretching the planar face out of the currentwork plane). If the stretch operation results in an illegal planar face,it will not be performed.


STRETCH

STRETCH >> CURVESSTRETCH >> PLANAR FACES

PICK ENTITIES AND EXIT Pick the entities to be stretched and <EXIT>. A submenu isavailable for multi-pick. Use BOX or POLYGON whenselecting line(s).

SELECT MODE: DELTA

REF. POINT(S)

DELTA Translate the coordinates of the entities as defined in themodals.

REF. POINT(S) Translate the positions of the entities box by a distance anddirection as defined by a specified vector.

CURVES / PLANAR FACES >> DELTA

Translate the coordinates of the entities as defined in the modals.

How To:

1. Enter the parameters for the entities picked earlier.

Interaction:

<CR> OR PICK UCS DX = DY = DZ =

CARTESIAN MODEL

See Defining Points in Chapter 3, of the Fundamentals &General Functions Manual, for a detailed explanation of theabove modals.


STRETCH

PICK ENTITIESDX = 10.00

DY = 10.00

Figure 1-73: STRETCH >> CURVES/PLANAR FACES >> DELTA

<CR> OR PICK UCS Press <CR> or <PICK> the prompt area to update changes.Press <EXIT> to ignore changes.

Continue to define distances to move the points. <EXIT>when finished.

CURVES / PLANAR FACES >> REF. POINT(S)

Translate the entities by a distance and direction as defined by a specified vector.


STRETCH

IND. REF. POINT

PICK ENTITIES

DISTANCE

IND. TARGET POINT

IND. TARGET POINT

HORIZONTAL VERTICAL

IND. TARGET POINT

FREE

30

IND. TARGET POINT

Figure 1-74: STRETCH >> CURVES/PLANAR FACES >> REF.POINTS

How To:

1. Indicate an origin and target point for the stretch vector.

Interaction:

IND.REF. POINT FREE

FREE

HORIZONTAL

VERTICAL

DISTANCE DISTANCE =

IND.REF. POINT Indicate an origin point for the stretch vector.

IND.TARGET POINT Indicate a target point for the vector. The stretch will beexecuted.

IND.REF. POINT Continue to indicate new reference and target points and toadjust the modals. <EXIT> when finished.

STRETCH Modal Parameter Definitions


� DISTANCE Only the direction of the stretch vector is defined by theindicated reference point and the target point. The stretchdistance will be entered in the next modal.

� DISTANCE = The stretch distance may be entered if DISTANCE is selectedin the first modal.

� FREE The stretch vector is from an indicated reference point to thetarget point.

� HORIZONTAL The stretch vector is as for FREE, but projected on the Xaxis of the active work plane.

� VERTICAL The stretch vector is as for FREE, but projected on the Yaxis of the active work plane. �


STRETCH

SWEEP Sweep entities along a vector or about a rotation axis; create awireframe box that encloses selected entities with specifiedoffsets.

This function is used primarily to add a third dimension to atwo dimensional shape.

Main Options:

SELECT LINEAR SWEEP

ANGULAR SWEEP

BOUNDING BOX

LINEAR SWEEP Sweep entities along a vector in space.

ANGULAR SWEEP Rotate entities a given angle about a predefined rotation axis.

BOUNDING BOX Create a wireframe box that encloses selected entities withspecified offsets.


SWEEP >> LINEAR SWEEP

Sweep entities along a vector in space.

The sweep vector can be defined in either of two ways:

SELECT: DELTA REF.POINTS

DELTA Sweep entities a given distance along an axis which isperpendicular to the active work plane.

REF.POINTS Define both the distance from the original entities to the newones and the direction by indicating two reference points.


SWEEP

LINEAR SWEEP >> DELTA

Sweep entities a given distance along an axis which is perpendicular to the active work plane.

The DELTA option of SWEEP requires definition of a work plane which is valid for thecurrent session only.

Use one of the work plane options to define a different active plane temporarily.

See Defining a Plane in Chapter 3, of the Fundamentals & General Functions Manual, on how todefine a Work Plane.

How To:

1. Define the plane.

2. Pick entities to be swept, then press <EXIT>.


Interaction:

PICK ENTITIES & <EXIT> DELTA = SWEEP LINES ON / AS ORIGINAL / NO ATTRIB /

SWEEP LINES OFF AS ACTIVE SAME ATTRIB

PICK ENTITIES & <EXIT> Pick entities to be swept, then press <EXIT>.

IND. SWEEP DIR. Indicate the desired direction.


SWEEP

LINEAR SWEEP >> REF. POINTS

Sweep entities along a vector which is defined by two points.

How To:

1. Indicate the sweep vector’s origin and end point.


Interaction:

IND. REF. POINT SWEEP LINES ON / AS ORIGINAL / NO ATTRIB /


IND. REF. POINT Indicate the sweep vector’s origin point.

IND. TARGET PNT. Indicate the sweep vector’s endpoint.



SWEEP

PICK ENTITIESIND. REF. POINT

IND. TARGET PNT

Figure 1-75: SWEEP >> LINEAR SWEEP >> REF. POINTS

SWEEP >> ANGULAR SWEEP

Sweep entities a given angle about a rotation axis.

IND. AXIS ORIGIN Indicate the origin point of the rotation axis.

IND. AXIS DIRECTION Indicate a point to define the direction of rotation of the axis.

Define the angle of rotation by selecting one of the followingoptions:

SELECT: ANGLE REF. POINTS

ANGLE Enter the size of the angle the entities will be rotated aroundthe given axis.

REF.POINTS The angle is defined by two points. The first point isprojected onto a plane which is perpendicular to the rotationaxis. The second point is the vertex which is at theintersection of the plane with the rotation axis.

ANGULAR SWEEP >> ANGLE

Rotate entities at given angle about a predefined rotation axis.

How To:

1. Pick entities to be swept and the desired direction.

Interaction:

PICK ENTITIES & <EXIT> ANGLE = SWEEP LINES ON / AS ORIGINAL / NO ATTRIB /



IND. SWEEP DIR. Indicate the desired direction.


SWEEP

IND. AXIS ORIGIN

PICK ENTITIES/EXIT( CONTOUR )

IND. SWEEP DIRECTION

IND. AXIS DIRECTION

Figure 1-76: SWEEP >> ANGULAR SWEEP >> ANGLE

ANGULAR SWEEP >> REF. POINTS

The angle is defined by two points. The first point is projected onto a plane which isperpendicular to the rotation axis. The second point is the vertex which is at theintersection of the plane with the rotation axis.

How To:

1. Indicate the axis origin and direction.

2. Indicate a target point on the second side of the angle.

3. Indicate a target point on the second side of the angle.


5. Indicate direction.

Interaction:

IND. REF. POINT SWEEP LINES ON / AS ORIGINAL / NO ATTRIB /


IND. REF. POINT Indicate a point on the first side of the angle.

IND. TARGET PNT. Indicate a point on the second side of the angle.



SWEEP

TARGET POINT

REF. POINT

P2

P1

IND. AXIS ORIGIN

IND. AXIS DIRECTION

IND. SWEEP DIRECTION

PICK ENTITIES/EXIT

Figure 1-77: SWEEP >> ANGULAR SWEEP >> REF. POINTS

SWEEP >> BOUNDING BOX

Create a wireframe box that encloses selected entities. The base of the box will lie onthe XY plane of the selected UCS. Offsets may be specified I.

How To:

1. Pick the UCS or <EXIT> to select the active UCS..

2. Pick the entities to be enclosed in the box.

3. Set the modal parameters and <EXIT>.

Interaction:

PICK UCS/EXIT= ACTIVE POS. X OFFSET = NEG. X OFFSET =

POS. Y OFFSET = NEG. Y OFFSET =

POS. Z OFFSET = NEG. Z OFFSET =

TOLERANCE =

PICK UCS/EXIT = ACTIVE Pick the UCS or <EXIT> to select the active UCS.

PICK ENTITIES /EXIT Pick the entities to be enclosed in the box. Set the modalsand <EXIT>.

EXECUTING The bounding box is created.

Note: • If the selected entities lie entirely on the XY, YZ or XZ plane of theselected UCS, the resulting bounding box will be 2D.


SWEEP

PICK ENTITIES( ALL )

Figure 1-78: SWEEP >> BOUNDING BOX

SWEEP Modal Parameter Definitions


� ANGLE = Enter the angle of rotation in degrees.

Note: • If ANGLE = 180° or ANGLE = 360°, the sweep will be executedwithout a prompt to confirm the direction.

If ANGLE = 360° and SWEEP LINES OFF, the executedsweep is not noticeable.

� AS ACTIVE Assign the active level, line font, pen and color to the newentities created.

� AS ORIGINAL Assign the level, line font, pen and color of the originalentities to the new entities which are created, but not to thesweep lines which will have the ACTIVE characteristics.

� DELTA = Enter the sweep distance.

� NEG. X OFFSET = Bounding box offset in the negative X direction.

� NEG. Y OFFSET = Bounding box offset in the negative Y direction.

� NEG. Z OFFSET = Bounding box offset in the negative Z direction.


� POS. X OFFSET = Bounding box offset in the positive X direction.

� POS. Y OFFSET = Bounding box offset in the positive Y direction.

� POS. Z OFFSET = Bounding box offset in the positive Z direction.

� SAME ATTRIB Attach attribute records of the original entities to the entities.

� SWEEP LINES OFF Do not connect the endpoints.

� SWEEP LINES ON Connect the endpoints of the original entities to the endpointsof the new entities with lines.

� TOLERANCE = The maximum amount by which the bounding box canexceed the specified offset. �


SWEEP

TRIM Trim or extend curves.

Main Options:

SELECT: TRIM BY CURVE

TRIM BY POINT

TRIM BY PLANE

DIVIDE BY CURVES

DIVIDE BY POINT

TRIM BY CURVE Trim curves at their intersection point with the trimmingcurve.

TRIM BY POINT Trim a curve at a point.

TRIM BY PLANE Trim curves by a work plane.

DIVIDE BY CURVES Divide curve(s) into two separate entities, or remove a regionbetween two indicated trimming curves which intersect thefirst curve(s).

DIVIDE BY POINT Divide a curve by a point into two separate entities.

Notes: • The first three options (TRIM, TRIM BY POINT and TRIM BYPLANE) cause the region where a curve is picked to remain. Theextension beyond the intersection point is removed. If the curve doesnot reach the chosen intersection point it will be extended until itdoes.

• In VIEW/MACSYS, a 2D curve in a plane that is perpendicular tothe VIEW/MACSYS plane initially appears as a line. After somefunctions, such as TRIM, the curve actually becomes a line.


TRIM

TRIM >> TRIM BY CURVE

Trim curves at their intersection point with the trimming curve. The following modalappears only if work is being done in 3D.

How To:

1. Pick a curve which intersects the curve to be trimmed or stretched.

2. Pick the curves to be trimmed and <EXIT>.

Interaction:

PICK TRIMMING CURVE TOL =

PICK TRIMMING CURVE Pick a curve which intersects the curve to be trimmed orstretched.

PICK CURVES TO TRIM Pick the curves to be trimmed and terminate with <EXIT>.Remember to pick the curves on segments which are to beretained. Press <SUBMENU> to access entity pickingoptions.

EXECUTING


TRIM

PICK TRIMMING CURVE

PICK CURVES TO TRIM

Figure 1-79: TRIM >> TRIM BY CURVE

TRIM >> TRIM BY POINT

Trim a curve at a point.

How To:

1. Pick the curve to be trimmed on the segment which is to be retained.

2. Indicate the point past which the curve will be trimmed or extended.

Interaction:

Notes: • When the point is not on the curve, the trimming point will be theclosest point on the display plane.

CURVE TO BE TRIMMED Pick the curve to be trimmed on the segment which is to beretained.

INDICATE TRIM.POINT Indicate the point past which the curve will be trimmed. Thepoint indication <SUBMENU> is available.

IND. 2ND TRIM.POINT If the curve is closed, a second point indication is needed.

CURVE TO BE TRIMMED Pick another curve to be trimmed or <EXIT> to leave thefunction.


TRIM

IND. TRIM POINT

CURVE TO BE TRIMMED

Figure 1-80: TRIM >> TRIM BY POINT

TRIM >> TRIM BY PLANE

Trim curves by a work plane.

The TRIM BY PLANE option of the TRIM function requires definition of an activework plane which is valid only for the current session. Use one of the work planeoptions to define a different active plane temporarily. See Defining a Plane inChapter 3 of the Fundamentals & General Functions Manual.

How To:

1. Pick the side to be retained.

2. Pick the geometric entities to be trimmed and <EXIT>.

Interaction:

IND. REMAINING SIDE Pick the side to be retained. All the curve segments whichextend beyond the trimming plane, except those on the planeitself, will be deleted.

PICK ENTITIES & EXIT TRIM

TRIM AND EXTEND

PICK ENTITIES & EXIT Pick the geometric entities to be trimmed and terminate with<EXIT>. Press <SUBMENU> to access entity picking options.


TRIM

DEFINE PLANE

IND. REMAINING SIDE

PICK ENTITIES( NTH CURVES )

Figure 1-81: TRIM >> TRIM BY PLANE

TRIM >> DIVIDE BY CURVES

Divide curve(s) into two separate entities or remove the region between two indicatedtrimming curves which intersect the curve(s) to be divided.

How To:

1. Pick a trimming curve which intersects the curve(s) to be divided.

2. Pick a second trimming curve which intersects the curve(s) to be divided, or <EXIT>.

3. Pick the curve(s) to be divided and <EXIT>.

Interaction:

Note: • In 3D applications, all the curves must lie on the same plane.

PICK 1ST DIVID.CRV Pick a trimming curve which intersects the curve(s) tobe divided.

PICK 2ND DIVID.CRV / EXIT Pick a second trimming curve which intersects thecurve(s) to be divided, or <EXIT>.

PICK ENTITIES & EXIT Pick the curve(s) to be divided. Terminate with<EXIT>.

Note: • When two trimming curves are selected, the region that lies betweenthem will always be removed. The point at which a curve to bedivided is indicated is irrelevant.


TRIM

PICK 1ST DIVID. CRV. PICK 2ND DIVID. CRV/EXIT

PICK ENTITIES/EXIT

Figure 1-82: TRIM >> DIVIDE BY CURVES

TRIM >> DIVIDE BY POINT

Divide a curve by a point into two separate entities.

How To:

1. Pick the curve to be divided and indicate a point on the curve.

Interaction:

CURVE TO BE DIVIDED Pick the curve to be divided.

DIVIDING POINT Indicate a point on the curve.

2ND DIV POINT Only if the curve is closed.

CURVE TO BE DIVIDED Pick a new curve to be divided or <EXIT> to leave thefunction.

TRIM Modal Parameter Definitions


� TOL = Enter the maximum deviation that will be tolerated at theindicated intersection point.

Note: • The tolerance should be ≤ the tolerance permitted when the curveswere created.

� TRIM Delete the parts of the curves that extend beyond thetrimming plane. If they do not reach the trimming plane, donot extend them.

� TRIM AND EXTEND Delete the part of the curves that extend beyond the trimmingplane. If they do not reach the trimming plane, extend themto the trimming plane. �


TRIM

IND. DIVIDING POINT

CURVE TO BE DIVIDED

IND. 2ND DIV. POINT

IND. DIVIDING POINTCURVE TO BE DIVIDED

Figure 1-83: TRIM >> DIVIDE BY POINT

WIRE_EDM Run the Cimatron WireEDM program.

How To:

1. Select 2D or 3D wireframe entities created with the Cimatronit

environment and press<EXIT>.

Or

Press <EXIT>.

Note: • Cimatron WireEDM can also be run from the Main Menu bydefining the appropriate files:

File: <root_cad>\var\fikus\fikusw.exe

Icon: <root_cad>\dat\bitmaps\fikus31.ico

See the Utilities Manual for additional information on the MainMenu.


WIRE_EDM

Figure 1-84: Defining Cimatron WireEDM in the

Main Menu

Interaction:

PICK ENTITIES & EXIT Either:

Select 2D or 3D wireframe entities created with theCimatronit environment and press <EXIT>. Thegeometry will be exported to the Cimatron WireEDMenvironment under the file <partfile_name>.c2f.

Or:

Press <EXIT>.

If you selected entities at the PICK ENTITIES & EXIT prompt, the following table isdisplayed:

EXPORT FILE: <partfile_name>.c2f SAVE ONLY

SAVE AND RUN

<Partfile_name>.c2f The default file name. Change this name by selecting it andentering a new name.

SAVE ONLY Save the file. You can use this file when you run CimatronWireEDM later.

SAVE AND RUN Save and run Cimatron WireEDM now.

Note: • There is no association between the geometry you created inCimatronit and the geometry imported into Cimatron WireEDM.

If you pressed <EXIT> at the PICK ENTITIES & EXIT prompt, the following promptis displayed:

RUN WIRE EDM? YES NO

YES Run the Cimatron WireEDM program.

NO Exit the function.

�


WIRE_EDM

S Chapter 2

Assembly Design and Management

Four of the functions in the second overlay of the modeling functions handle assembly, design andmanagement. These functions are GROUP, PLACE, EXPLODE and EXTRACT.

Terms used in this chapter:

INSTANCE A representation of the real entities. An Instance is actually apointer to the real entities.

MASTER A library part.

MEMBER An entity to which an Instance is associated. This may be afile (sub-assembly), library part (master) or view (sub-view).

Overlay II

GROUP

PLACE

EXPLODE

EXTRACT

EXPLODE Explode an instance (of either a master, sub-assembly orsub-view) into its component parts by deleting the instanceentity and creating copies of its members into the current file.

EXTRACT Extract entities from the current file and, if required, create asub-assembly or create a master in an external file (catalog).

GROUP Create and manage a standard library part (master) that maybe used in the current file or other files.Manipulate a group of picked entities as one entity.

PLACE Create an instance, i.e. an address of a master, sub-assemblyor sub-view.

Cimatron Modeling 13 Assembly Design & Management 2-1

EXPLODE Explode an instance of a master, sub-assembly or sub-view toits component parts by deleting the instance entity and creatingcopies of the members.

Main Options:

<CR> TO CONTINUEALL MEMBERS TO SOURCE LEVEL

SOURCE = INSTANCE ALL NEST LEVELS

SOURCE = GEOMETRY ONE NEST LEVEL

PICKED MEMBERS TO ACTIVE LEVEL

Notes: • SOURCE/ACTIVE LEVEL controls where the exploded entities willbe located.

• The NEST LEVEL determines how extensive the EXPLODEoperation will be (for all the nesting levels or for single levels).

• An instance may contain itself, i.e. part A may be a sub-assembly inpart B at the same time that part B is a sub-assembly in part A. Thesystem will automatically detect this situation and prevent display orexplosion of the instance more than once. Any time a part in whichthis occurs is displayed or exploded, the following message willappear:

RECURSIVE INSTANCE NESTING

• When an instance is exploded, no copies will be made of any UCSentities.

2-2 Assembly Design & Management Cimatron Modeling 13

EXPLODE

EXPLODE: Modal Parameter Definitions


� ALL MEMBERS Delete instances and create all of their members asindependent entities.

� ALL NESTING LEVELS EXPLODE will be applied to all nesting levels.

� ONE NESTING LEVEL EXPLODE will be applied to one nesting level only.

� PICKED MEMBERS Create entities from the picked members of instances, anddelete the corresponding instances. All nesting levels ofpicked entities will be exploded.

� SOURCE = GEOMETRY For an internal or catalog master, the master will be explodedto the original levels used to create the geometry.

� SOURCE = INSTANCE For an internal or catalog master, the master will be explodedto the level in which the master has been placed in thecurrent file.

� TO ACTIVE LEVEL Create copies of all the members in the current active level.

� TO SOURCE LEVEL Create copies of the members to the levels in which theywere created.

EXPLODE: Usage Envelope

1. When exploding an internal or catalog master, with SOURCE = GEOMETRY, if thesource level (in which the geometry was originally created) does not exist in thecurrent file, or is not currently displayed, nothing will appear on the screen when theinstance is exploded. If the source level(s) does not exist in the current file, it must becreated in order to see the entity.

2. The modal SOURCE = INSTANCE is relevant only for internal or catalog masters.

3. Subassemblies are always exploded to the original levels used to create the geometry.�


EXPLODE

EXTRACT Extract entities from the current file and create a sub-assemblyor master in an external file (catalog).

Add to an existing sub-assembly and perform additionalmanagement operations.

Main Options:

SELECT OPTION EXTRACT SUB-ASSM

EXTRACT CATALOG

EXPORT CATALOG

APPEND SUB-ASSM

IMPORT CATALOG

IMPORT LEVELS

EXPORT LEVELS

EXTRACT SUB-ASSM Extract picked entities in the current file to a new part fileand save the new file. If required, place it using its currentorientation in the current part, as an instance of asub-assembly.

EXTRACT CATALOG Extract entities from the current file and create a master frompicked entities in an external part file (catalog). If required,create an instance of that master in the current part file.

EXPORT CATALOG Export a master (catalog) from the current part file to anexternal part file.

APPEND SUB-ASSM Add entities to an existing sub-assembly.

IMPORT CATALOG Import a master into the current part file from another partfile (catalog).

IMPORT LEVELS Import levels into the current part file from another part file.

EXPORT LEVELS Export levels from the current part file to another part file.

Notes: • In the EXTRACT SUB-ASSM and EXTRACT CATALOG options,if the REPLACE ON modal is selected, the picked entities in thecurrent file will be deleted and replaced by an instance of thesub-assembly or a master in a catalog.

• The EXTRACT SUB-ASSM option always creates a new part file.The EXTRACT CATALOG and EXPORT CATALOG options canbe used to either create a new part file, or update an existing partfile. The APPEND SUB-ASSM option is for existing part filesonly.


EXTRACT

EXTRACT >> EXTRACT SUB-ASSM

Extract picked entities in the current file to a new part file and save the new file. Place it, usingits current orientation in the current part, as an instance of a sub-assembly.

How To:

1. Pick the entities to be included in the sub-assembly.

2. Type the name of a part file which will contain the picked entities.

3. Indicate the origin point for the subassembly’s coordinate system.

4. Indicate a point on the +X and +Y axes of the sub-assembly and confirm.

5. Create another sub-assembly or exit the function.

Interaction:

Notes: • A default coordinate system, X axis and/or Y direction, may beaccepted for the coordinate system of the sub-assembly. The modelcoordinate system is the default. Instead of indicating a point, press<EXIT> to accept the default coordinate system.

• UNDO may not be used with this function. To reverse operationsperformed by this function, EXPLODE the sub-assembly in thecurrent part file. Then use the EXIT function, CLOSE PART FILEoption, to select the new part file and select ABANDON FILING.

• If local changes have been made to the part in a differentapplication, e.g., Views, MACSYS, FEMSYS, and a sub-assembly isextracted to another part file, any local changes made will becanceled, and the view, MACSYS, etc., returns to its original state.If such a case is about to occur, the system warns you with thefollowing message:

CONTINUING THIS OPERATION MAY AFFECT EXISTINGVIEWS

PICK ENTITIES & EXIT Pick the entities to be included in the sub-assembly.

or: Press <EXIT> to leave the function.

Note: • These entities will be copied into a new file. If the REPLACE ONoption is selected, the entities will be deleted and replaced by aninstance of the sub-assembly (the file into which the entities werecopied).

Press <SUBMENU> to access picking options.

ENTER PART FILE NAME Type the name of a part file which will contain the pickedentities.

If the part file already exists, the following will appear:

OVERWRITE ? YES NO YES Replace the existing part file.

NO Enter a different part file name.

IND. ORIGIN POINT SCALE =


EXTRACT

IND. ORIGIN POINT Indicate the origin point for the subassembly’s coordinatesystem.

or: Press <EXIT> to use the model coordinate system of thecurrent part.

IND. PNT. ON +X AXIS Indicate a point on the +X axis of the sub-assembly.

or: Press <EXIT> to accept the default X and Y axes. See notesabove.

IND. PNT. FOR +Y AXIS Indicate a point in the direction of the +Y axis of thesub-assembly.

or: Press <EXIT> to accept the default Y axis. See notes above.

<CR> TO CONTINUE Press <CR> to confirm the points which define the modelcoordinate system of the new sub-assembly file.

Notes: • When creating a sub-assembly, this option behaves according to thetype of entities picked:

– If no instances are picked.Result: The sub-assembly is created from the pickedentities in their original form.

– If an instance of an internal master is picked.Result: The sub-assembly is created from the pickedentities after all the picked instances are exploded intotheir simple components.

– If an instance is picked, but no instances of internalmasters are picked.Result: The sub-assembly can be created from thepicked entities in their original form, or after they areexploded into their simple components (as in the case ofan instance originated from a sub-assembly).

<CR> TO CONTINUE REPLACE ON REF ASSEM. OFF OPEN FILE OFF

SAVE FILE ON EXPLODE OFF SOURCE LEVEL

CREATING SUB-ASSM <sub-assembly part_file_name>

The new sub-assembly part file will be created and saved, andthe picked entities will be deleted from the current part fileand will be replaced as a sub-assembly.

PICK ENTITIES & EXIT Pick entities to create another sub-assembly.


Notes: • Use the PLACE function, REF-ASSY option, to display thereference assembly in the part file of the sub-assembly at a laterdate.

• The part file of the sub-assembly is created in a different work filefrom that of the current part. To display changes to either part file inthe other work file before SAVE ON FILE has been performed:


EXTRACT

– Select the EXIT function

– Select the OPEN PART FILE option

– Open the file where you want to see the changes

– Answer YES to REBUILD THE DISPLAY ?

See additional notes on Reference Assemblies and Subassemblies in PLACE >> REF-ASSY onpage 2-21.

EXTRACT >> EXTRACT CATALOG

Extract entities from the current file and create a master from picked entities in an external part file(catalog). Create an instance of that master in the current part file.

How To:

1. Pick the entities to be included in the master.

2. Enter the name of an external part file which will contain the master.

3. Enter the name of the master to be created in the external file.

4. Indicate the origin point for the master’s coordinate system.

5. Indicate a point on the +X and +Y axes of the master and confirm.

6. Create a new master or exit the function.

Interaction:

Note: • The entities that are included in the master are deleted from thecurrent part file and replaced by an instance of the master.

PICK ENTITIES & EXIT Pick the entities to be included in the master.


Press <SUBMENU> to access picking options.

Notes: • When creating a catalog, this option behaves according to the typeof entities picked:

– If no instances are picked.Result: The catalog is created from the picked entities intheir original form.

– If an instance of an internal master is picked.Result: The catalog is created from the picked entitiesafter all the picked instances are exploded into theirsimple components.

– If an instance is picked, but no instances of internalmasters are picked.Result: The catalog can be created from the pickedentities in their original form, or after they are explodedinto their simple components.

ENTER PART FILE NAME Type the name of an external part file which will contain themaster.


EXTRACT

If this option has previously been used, the last entered partfile name is displayed. Press <REJECT> to enter a differentpart file name.

ENTER MASTER NAME Enter the name of the master to be created in the externalfile. If the name of an existing file is entered, and a master ofthis name already exists, an error message is displayed.

IND. ORIGIN POINT Indicate the origin point for the master’s coordinate system.

or: Press <EXIT> to use the model coordinate system of thecurrent part (the default coordinate system).

IND. PNT ON +X AXIS Indicate a point on the +X axis of the master.

or: Press <EXIT> to accept the default X and Y axes. See notesabove.

IND. PNT ON +Y AXIS Indicate a point in the direction of the +Y axis of the master.

or: Press <EXIT> to accept the default Y axis. See notes above.

POINTS O.K.? YES NO Press <CR> to confirm the points which define the modelcoordinate system for the master.

<CR> TO CONTINUE REPLACE ON OPEN FILE ON

SAVE FILE ON EXPLODE ON

UPDATING CATALOG mastername(partfile_name)

The new master is added to the catalog.

PICK ENTITIES & EXIT Pick more entities to create a new master or press <EXIT> toexit the function.


EXTRACT

EXTRACT >> EXPORT CATALOG

Export a master from the current part file to an external part file.

How To:

1. Enter the name of the master to be copied.

2. Enter the name of the part file to which the master will be copied.

3. Enter a name for the new master.

4. Copy another master or exit the function.

Interaction:

ENTER MASTER NAME Enter the name of the master to be copied, or press <CR>and select a master from the list.

ENTER PART FILE NAME Enter the name of the part file to which the master will becopied.

NEW MASTER NAME (<CR> = <oldname>)

Enter a name for the new master or press <CR> to accept itscurrent name.

Notes: • When exporting a master, this option behaves according to the typeof master picked:

– If the selected master does not contain any instances.Result: The exported master is copied into the externalfile and exploded into its simple components.

– If the selected master contains instances of internalmasters.Result: The exported master is copied into the externalfile and exploded into its simple components.

– If the selected master contains instances, but does notcontain instances of internal masters.Result: The exported master can be copied into theexternal file in its original form, or exploded into itssimple components.

<CR> TO CONTINUE REPLACE OFF OPEN FILE ON

SAVE FILE OFF EXPLODE ON

UPDATING CATALOG mastername(partfile_name)

ENTER MASTER NAME Copy another master or press <EXIT> to exit the function.

The master will appear in the destination part file with thesame orientation as defined in the current part file.


EXTRACT

EXTRACT >> APPEND SUB-ASSM

Add entities to an existing sub-assembly.

How To:

1. Pick entities to be added to the sub-assembly.

2. Pick the instance of the sub-assembly to which the entities will be added.

Interaction:

PICK ENTITIES & EXIT Pick entities to be added to the sub-assembly. Press <EXIT>when finished.

PICK SUB-ASSEMBLY Pick the instance of the sub-assembly to which the entitieswill be added. The selection of the instance determines therelative placement and scale of the picked entities in thesub-assembly.

<CR> TO CONTINUE PART FILE NAME = <partfile_name>

INSTANCE SCALE =

<CR> TO CONTINUE Press <CR> to continue.

Notes: • When appending entities to a sub-assembly, this option behavesaccording to the type of master picked:

– If no instances are picked.Result: The picked entities are appended to thesub-assembly in their original form.

– If an instance of an internal master is picked.Result: The picked entities are appended to thesub-assembly after exploding all the picked instancesinto their simple components.

– If an instance is picked, but no instances of internalmasters are picked.Result: The picked entities are appended to thesub-assembly in their original form, or after explodingall the picked instances into their simple components.

<CR> TO CONTINUE REPLACE ON OPEN FILE OFF

SAVE FILE ON EXPLODE ON SOURCE LEVEL

UPDATING SUB-ASSEMBLY <sub-assembly name>

The sub-assembly definition is updated.


EXTRACT

EXTRACT >> IMPORT CATALOG

Import a master into the current part file from another part file.

How To:

1. Enter the name of the part file containing the master to be imported.

2. Enter the name of the master to be imported.

3. Enter a name for the new master.

4. Create a new master or exit the function.

Interaction:

Note: • The master is copied into the current part file as a master and not asan instance.

ENTER PART FILE NAME Enter the name of the part file containing the master to beimported.

ENTER MASTER NAME Enter the name of the master to be imported, or press <CR>and select a master from the list.

NEW MASTER NAME (partfile_name/mastername>)

Enter a name for the new master, or press <CR> to accept thedisplayed name.

<CR> TO CONTINUE REPLACE OFF

EXPLODE OFF

IMPORTING MASTER old_master_name (new_master_name)

ENTER MASTER NAME Enter the name of another master to be imported, or press<EXIT> to finish.


EXTRACT

EXTRACT >> IMPORT LEVELS

Import levels into the current part file from another part file.

How To:

1. Enter the name of the part file containing the levels to be imported.

2. If required, enter the name of another part file containing levels to be imported.

Interaction:

ENTER PART FILE NAME Enter the name of the part file containing the levels to beimported.

IMPORTING LEVELS FROM PART FILE <partfile_name>

CONTINUE? YES NO YES Import the levels.

NO Reenter the part file name.

LEVELS WERE IMPORTED FROM PART FILE <partfile_name>

ENTER PART FILE NAME Enter the name of another part file containing levels to beimported.


EXTRACT

EXTRACT >> EXPORT LEVELS

Export levels to another part file. This includes the COMP LIST option which enables the export ofthe entire Level Map to the complete list of subassemblies, together with the reference assembly, ifit has been placed.

<CR> TO CONTINUE BY NAME COMP LIST

EXPORT LEVELS >> BY NAME

ENTER PART FILE NAME Enter the name of the part file to which the levels are to beexported.

EXPORTING LEVELS TO PART FILE <partfile_name>

CONTINUE? YES NO

YES Export the levels.

NO Reenter the part file name.


EXECUTING

EXPORT LEVELS >> COMP LIST

SELECT NESTING LEVEL ONE NESTING LEVEL ALL NESTING LEVELS

COMP LIST >> ONE NESTING LEVEL and ALL NESTING LEVELS



EXTRACT

EXTRACT Modal Parameter Definitions


� ACTIVE LEVEL Create copies of all the entities in the currently active level.

� EXPLODE OFF The master remains in its original form.

� EXPLODE ON The master is exploded into its basic components.

� OPEN FILE OFF Create the external file but do not open it.

� OPEN FILE ON Create the external file and open it immediately.

� REF. ASSEM. OFF Do not place an instance from the assembly file.

� REF. ASSEM. ON An instance from the assembly file is placed in thesub-assembly file.

� REPLACE OFF Do not replace the picked entities with the new sub-assemblyor master.

� REPLACE ON For EXTRACT SUB-ASSM:Replace the original entities with an instance of the extractedsub-assembly.

For EXTRACT CATALOG:Replace the original entities with an instance of the extractedmaster.

� SAVE FILE ON Create the file and save it.

� SAVE FILE OFF Create the file and place the extracted entities in that file.Keep the file in memory - do not save it.

� SCALE=1.000 Enter the scale factor for the sub-assembly.

� SOURCE LEVEL Create copies of the members to the levels in which theywere created, as follows:

For an internal or catalog master, the level of the source isthe level in which the master has been placed in the currentfile.

For an instance of a sub-assembly or sub-view, each copiedmember receives the level of its original entity. �


EXTRACT

GROUP Create and manage a standard library part (master) that may beused in the current file or other files.

Manipulate a group of picked entities as one entity.

Main Options:

SELECT CREATE

DELETE

RENAME

GROUP

CREATE Create a named master group of entities.

DELETE Delete a named master.

RENAME Change the name of a master.

GROUP Manipulate a group of picked entities as one entity.

Notes: • If a group contains more than one nesting level (i.e., it is made upof another group(s)), it may be exploded one nesting level back(ONE NESTING LEVEL), or into all its basic entities (ALLNESTING LEVELS). See the EXPLODE function in this chapterfor details on exploding a group.

• A group has full associativity, i.e., if a group contains dimensions,and it is copied, moved, changed etc., the dimensions are updatedaccordingly when using DIM_UPDT.


GROUP

GROUP >> CREATE

Create a named master group of entities.

Notes: • A master is a configuration of entities which can be located as aninstance through the PLACE function.

• In the process of creating a master, picked entities are copied. Aconfiguration of those copies is stored in the database under a mastername. The relation between the original entities and the members ofthe master is terminated.

• A reference coordinate system is defined for each master. The originof the master will coincide with a position point which is indicatedwhen the instance is PLACEd.

• Master names are considered by the system as upper case, regardlessof the way they are entered.

How To:

1. Pick the current master entities and enter the full path name.

2. Indicate the origin point for the master’s reference coordinate system or press <EXIT>to accept the default model coordinate system.

3. Indicate a point on the X and Y axes or press <EXIT> to use the default.

4. Confirm the axes selection.

Interaction:

PICK ENTITIES & <EXIT> Pick the current master entities, then <EXIT>.

ENTER MASTER NAME Type a master name (max. 128 characters including the pathname), then press <CR>. If the master’s name already exists:

REPLACE MASTER?

YES NO

YES Replace the members of an existing master with therecently picked entities, and update all the instancesaccordingly.

NO Reenter the master name.

IND. ORIGIN POINT Indicate the origin point for the master’s reference coordinatesystem.

Note: • A default coordinate system, X axis and/or Y direction, may beaccepted for the coordinate system of the sub-assembly. The modelcoordinate system is the default. Press <EXIT> instead of indicatingthe origin, to accept the default coordinate system.

If this is a new master, the default reference coordinatesystem is that of the model.

If this is a “replaced“ master, the default reference coordinatesystem is that of the existing master.

IND. PNT. ON +X AXIS Indicate a point on the + X axis of the master’s system.

or: Press <EXIT> to use the default X and Y axes. See noteabove.


GROUP

IND. PNT. ON +Y AXIS Indicate a point on the active work plane showing the + Yaxis direction of the master’s system.

or: Press <EXIT> to use the default Y axis direction. See noteabove.

POINTS O.K.? YES NO YES Confirm the axes.

NO Don’t accept the axes.

EXECUTING


GROUP

GROUP >> DELETE

Delete a named master.

How To:

1. Enter the name of the master and confirm the selection.

Interaction:

ENTER MASTER NAME Enter the name of a master.

Alternatively, press <CR> to display the names of theexisting masters, and select the name to be deleted.

Note: • The system checks to see if the master contains instances whichhave been placed in another master. If so, the following message isdisplayed:

MASTER USED AS MEMBER IN ANOTHER MASTER

(The implication is: in the same file. No check is made for instancesin other files.)

You will then be prompted to Reenter the master name.

In this case, GROUP >> DELETE will not be permitted. The .cmpfile should be created using the FILE function, if necessary, and itscontents viewed from the operating system. This .cmp“composition” file lists the structure of the model, its views,drawings and instances. It will be possible to determine in whichother models, drawing or views in this file the master was placed. Ifthis master was placed in masters in other files, it will not bedetected.

The instance may be deleted from the other master using theDELETE function. Then this master and its instances may be deletedusing GROUP >> DELETE.

If this master does not contain instances that have been placed inother masters, the system will check to see if the master has anyinstances in the current file. If it does, the following message isdisplayed:

MASTER HAS BEEN PLACED

(In this file only. The number of times it was placed will not beindicated.)

In addition, the following prompt will appear:

CONFIRM ? YES NO

YES Delete the master and all its instances.

NO Reenter the master name.

Warning: • The deletion of a master results in the automatic deletion of all itsinstances. It is the user’s responsibility to explode all instancesbefore deleting their master!

Caution: • Do not delete masters which have instances in other part files!


GROUP

GROUP >> RENAME

Change the name of a master.

How To:

1. Enter the name of the master to be renamed or press <CR> to display a list ofmasters.

Interaction:

ENTER MASTER NAME Enter the name of the master to be renamed or press <CR> todisplay a list of masters.

If the name does not exist, the following message will bedisplayed:

MASTER <mastername> NOT FOUND

and the ENTER MASTER NAME prompt will beredisplayed.

ENTER NEW NAME: (old_mastername)

Enter the new name for the master.

If the new name is a different length from that of the oldname, the following message will be displayed while theinternal table is rebuilt:

EXECUTING . . .

Note: • An instance is associated to a master by its name. If the mastername is changed, the instance loses the association and is, therefore,not created.

GROUP >> GROUP

Manipulate a group of picked entities as one entity.

Notes: • This option is similar to the CREATE option. However, no master iscreated, the grouped entity is not given a name, and has noorientation.

• This option can be used to handle several entities as one entity on atemporary basis (for example when moving entities).

How To:

1. Pick the entities for the group, then press <EXIT> and confirm.

Interaction:

PICK ENTITIES & <EXIT> Pick the entities for the group, then press <EXIT>.

ENTITIES O.K.? YES NO YES Accept the picked entities.

NO Repick the entities. �


GROUP

PLACE Create an instance, i.e., an address of a master, sub-assemblyor sub-view.

Masters, of either the current part (INTERNAL master) or anexternal (CATALOG) part are PLACEd in the active level.Entities from subassemblies and internal and external VIEWSare PLACEd in the corresponding levels in the current part file(the program manipulates the levels by internal sequentialnumbers).

Main Options:

Modeling

<CR> TO CONTINUE INTERNAL ENTER MASTER NAME

CATALOG

SUB-ASSY

REF-ASSY

CATALOG+

Drafting


CATALOG

INT-VIEW

EXT-VIEW

CATALOG+

Notes: • Entities on levels which exist only in a sub-assembly, or in aninternal or external view and do not exist in the current part, are notshown in the current part until comparable levels are created!

• The axes that were defined when a master was created with theGROUP function, will not be displayed when an instance of thatmaster is placed.

• Each time an instance of a master, sub-assembly or sub-view isPLACEd, its nesting depth is increased by 1. If the instance containsother instances, their nesting depths will also be increased by 1. Upto 10 nesting depths are permitted by the system.

• An instance may contain itself, i.e., part A may be a sub-assembly inpart B at the same time that part B is a sub-assembly in part A. Thesystem will automatically detect this situation and prevent display orexplosion of the instance more than once.


INTERNAL Place a master that was created within the current part file(using the GROUP function).


PLACE

CATALOG Place a master from another part file. Any part file can becalled CATALOG for this purpose, but it is recommended touse one CATALOG file with many masters.

SUB-ASSY The model of another part file which is PLACEd as a wholein the current part file.

REF-ASSY The modal of another part file in which the current part fileis an instance.

INT-VIEW A view from the current part file.

EXT-VIEW A view from another part file

CATALOG+ Place an external catalog which is first converted to aninternal master together with its corresponding NGD.

Note: • In the Drafting Application, the REF-ASSM and SUB-ASSMoptions are replaced by the INT-VIEW and EXT-VIEW options.

PLACE >> INTERNAL

Place a master that was created within the current part file (using the GROUPfunction).

How To:

1. Enter the name of the master to be placed.

2. Set the modal(s), then indicate a positioning point.

Interaction:


ENTER MASTER NAME Type the name of the master to be placed.

Press <CR>, without typing a name, to display the names ofmasters in the current directory, and select a name. Use<SUBMENU> or <REJECT> to scroll through the names ifnecessary.

INDICATE POSITION POINT-ANGLE SCALE = AXES ON AXES SCALE =

ANGLE = NO-MIRROR DEFINE PLN

INDICATE POSITION Set the modal(s), then indicate a point.The origin of the master’s local coordinate system willcoincide with this point.In the POINT-ANGLE option, the coordinate system of theinstance is positioned relative to that of the active workplane.The location may be modified until it is satisfactory. Repeat thepoint indication procedure and fix the position by pressing<EXIT>.

IND. NEW POSITION Change the positioning point by indicating another oneinstead.

Press <EXIT> to go to INDICATE POSITION to place thesame instance in an additional location using the same option.<EXIT> when finished.


PLACE

PLACE >> CATALOG

Place a master from another part file.

How To:

1. Enter the part file name.

2. The list of masters in the catalog is then displayed.

This list can be of two forms; a windows dialog showing the bitmap image of eachmaster together with its name or a table listing the names of all the masters.

Select the master to be placed.

3. Indicate position.

Interaction:

<CR> TO CONTINUE CATALOG ENTER CATALOG NAME

If a default part file does not exist, select ENTERCATALOG NAME.

ENTER PART FILE NAME Enter the part file name or press <SUBMENU> to select apart file.

The list of masters in the catalog is then displayed. This listcan be of two forms; a windows dialog showing the bitmapimage of each master together with its name or a table listingthe names of all the masters. In both cases the procedure isthe same; select a master and indicate the position where youwant to place it.

Windows dialog

If the catalog contains bitmap icons of the masters(with the icons created using the ICONDRFT utility),the windows dialog is shown. The ICONDRFT utilitycreates an icon that is a 2D visual representation of a2D or 3D master. See the Utilities Manual, Chapter1 General Utilities for additional information onICONDRFT.

The windows dialog may contain either 12 or 35 iconsto a dialog. See ICONDRFT >> VIEW forinformation on how to define the dialog display.

Navigate through the icons using the Back and Nextbuttons. Select the appropriate icon and press OK.

List

If the catalog does not contain bitmap icons of themasters, a list of masters is shown.

Select the appropriate master from the list.


PLACE

If a default part file name already exists, the current name isdisplayed at the bottom of the screen and an additional modalis displayed:

<CR> TO CONTINUE CATALOG ENTER CATALOG NAME ENTER MASTER NAME

To select the default part file, select the prompt:ENTER MASTER NAME.

If you wish to select a part file other than the default, selectENTER CATALOG NAME.

ENTER PART FILE NAME Enter the part file name or press <SUBMENU> to select apart file.

ENTER MASTER NAME Type the name of the master to be placed or press<SUBMENU> to select a master.

INDICATE POSITION Indicate a point for the origin of the external view. The originof the view coordinate system will coincide with this point.

The interaction and modals for this option are as describedfor the INTERNAL option.

Notes: • The full path of the part file name may contain up to 128 characters.

• Up to 100 names may be displayed at one time. Use <REJECT> or<SUBMENU> to scroll through menu pages if there are more than100.

• If the name entered is both the name of a directory and of a part,the menu of names of the part files in the directory will bedisplayed.


PLACE

PLACE >> INT-VIEW

Place an internal view.

How To:

1. Select a view to be placed and point for the origin of the internal view.


Interaction:

<CR> TO CONTINUE INT-VIEW

SELECT VIEW: <view1> <view2> . . . . <viewn>

Select a view to be placed.

INDICATE POSITION Indicate a point for the origin of the internal view. The originof the view coordinate system will coincide with this point.


Note: • Internal views that have previously been included, are shownhighlighted, but may be selected.


PLACE

PLACE >> EXT-VIEW

Place an external view.

How To:

1. Type the name of a part file in the current directory and press <CR>.

Interaction:

<CR> TO CONTINUE EXT-VIEW

ENTER PART FILE NAME If a default part file name exists, it will be displayed in theinteraction area and this prompt will not appear.

Press <SUBMENU> to display this prompt and change thepart file name.

or: Type the name of a part file in the current directory and press<CR>. Use <SUBMENU> or <REJECT> to scroll through thenames if necessary.

Select a part file name from one of the display menus.

or: Press <CR> without typing a name to display the menu ofpart file names in the current directory.

or: Enter the name of a directory to display the menu of part filenames in that directory. Include the path if it is different fromthe path of the current directory.

SELECT VIEW: <view1> <view2> . . . . <viewn>

Select a view to be placed.



PLACE >> SUB-ASSY

Place the model of another part file which is PLACEd as a whole in the current part file.

<CR> TO CONTINUE SUB-ASSY



PLACE

PLACE >> REF-ASSY

Display an instance of a geometric model which contains the current part file as a sub-assembly.

How To:

1. Type the name of a part file in which the current part is an instance.

Interaction:

Notes: • A reference assembly cannot be exploded.

• Reference assemblies do not appear in the composition list.

• A reference assembly cannot be moved. Its orientation with respectto each sub-assembly is fixed.

• Even though the reference assembly is displayed in the part file ofthe sub-assembly, the reference assembly will not appear when itssub-assembly is PLACEd.

<CR> TO CONTINUE REF-ASSY

ENTER PART FILE Type the name of a part file in which the current part is aninstance.

or: Press <CR> to display the menu of part file names.

EXECUTING The reference assembly will be displayed.

If the sub-assembly was placed in the part file of thereference assembly more than once, one reference assemblywill be displayed for the sub-assembly and the followingappears:

TO CONFIRM NEXT PREVIOUS (n of m)

Only one orientation of the sub-assembly with respect to thesame reference assembly may be displayed at one time.

Press <EXIT> to accept the displayed reference assembly andcontinue.

ENTER PART FILE Type the name of another part file in which the current partis an instance.



PLACE

PLACE >> CATALOG+

Place an external catalog, first converted to an internal master, together with itscorresponding NGD, in a defined position.

How To:

1. Enter the part file name.

2. The list of masters in the catalog is then displayed.

This list can be of two forms; a window showing the bitmap image of each mastertogether with its name or a table listing the names of all the masters.

Select the master to be placed.


Interaction:

<CR> TO CONTINUE CATALOG+ ENTER CATALOG NAME

ENTER CATALOG NAME Enter the part file name or press <SUBMENU> to select apart file.

The list of masters in the catalog is then displayed. This listcan be of two forms; a window showing the bitmap image ofeach master together with its name or a table listing thenames of all the masters. In both cases the procedure is thesame; select a master and indicate the position where youwant to place it. See PLACE >> CATALOG for aexplanation.

Save the external catalog by selecting <CR> TO CONTINUEto save the external catalog as an internal master with thesame name or a different name.

Indicate the position (like when placing a regular catalog) and<EXIT>.

The external master is then exploded and recreated as aninternal master with the previously defined name.



Note: • Nesting levels are exploded to the new internal master (like whenusing the IMPORT CATALOG function).


PLACE

PLACE Modal Parameter Definitions


� ANGLE = 0.000 Rotation angle about Z axis of the active system. Positiveangle is in counterclockwise direction.

� AXES OFF Do not display the axes.

� AXES ON Display the axes of the coordinate system of the group beingplaced.

� AXES SCALE = 1.000 If AXES ON is selected, enter the scale: enlarge or reducethe size of the axes by the indicated factor.

� DEFINE PLANE Define a temporary active work plane. See Defining a Planein Chapter 3, of the Fundamentals & General FunctionsManual for details.

� (n of m) Only one orientation of the sub-assembly with respect to thesame reference assembly may be displayed at one time.

m indicates the total number of placements.n is the one currently displayed.

� NEXT Display the next orientation of the sub-assembly with respectto the same reference assembly. See the REF-ASSY option.

� NO-MIRROR No mirror transformation is to be applied to the master.

� POINT-ANGLE Place the master, by indicating a point and defining a rotationangle.

� PREVIOUS Display the previous orientation of the sub-assembly withrespect to the same reference assembly. See the REF-ASSYoption.

� REF. POINTS Place the master by indicating the reference points.

� SCALE = 1.000 Scaling factor.

� X-MIRROR The X axis is the mirror line.

� XY-MIRROR The XY plane is the mirror if the 3D mirror is in the X andY axes.

� Y-MIRROR The Y axis is the mirror line. �


PLACE

S Chapter 3

Parametric Shape Functions

Three of the functions in the second overlay are used to create and work with parametric shapes orpatterns. These functions are PATTDIM, PATTERN and PATTUSE.

Overlay II

PATTDIM

PATTERN

PATTUSE

PATTDIM Assign dimensions to the significant features of the model,from which a pattern (parametric shape) will be created.

PATTERN Create a single pattern entity from many picked circle andline and dimension entities, or delete or rename an existingpattern.

PATTUSE Create new entities from a pattern and position them freely.

Cimatron Modeling 13 Parametric Shape Functions 3-1

PATTDIM Assign dimensions to the significant features of the model,from which a pattern (parametric shape, 2D only) will becreated.

Main Options:

SELECT DIMENSION LINEAR

ANGULAR

RADIAL

DIAMETER

DIM_PAR

DIM_EDIT

LINEAR Dimension a linear distance.

ANGULAR Dimension an angle.

RADIAL Dimension the radius of an arc or circle.

DIAMETER Dimension the diameter of an arc or circle.

DIM_PAR Set dimension default parameters for patterns (parametricshapes).

DIM_EDIT Change pattern dimensions.

How To:

1. Use the DIM_PAR option to set global dimensioning defaults, if necessary.

2. Select the appropriate dimensioning option and create the dimension.

3. Use DIM_EDIT to change already existing dimensions, if necessary.

4. Define the datum face and point.

5. Select the bending allowance option for the bending axes.

6. Confirm the creation of the defined bent object.

Notes: • See Handling Complex Projects in Chapter 3 of the Fundamentals& General Functions Manual, for an overview of ParametricShapes – Patterns.

• Define only those dimensions required to reproduce the parametricshape. If essential dimensions are missing, or if the shape isover-dimensioned, the pattern will not be created.

3-2 Parametric Shape Functions Cimatron Modeling 13

PATTDIM

• CONSTANT, IMPLIED CONSTRAINTS

In some cases the relationships between straight line or arc/circleentities, or their construction lines (explained below), are impliedautomatically from the model from which the parametric shape isgenerated.

There is no need to create dimensions to define them. Definingdimensions for these relationships will cause the shape to beover-dimensioned.

In addition to being implied from the original model, theserelationships will remain constant when the parametric shape isused. They may not be redefined at that time.

To determine which dimensions are not required to define a shape,the construction lines of the straight lines and arcs in it must beconsidered. Construction lines are the logical extensions, in bothdirections of a straight line or arc. The following relationships in theoriginal model produce an implied and constant constraint in theparametric shape:

– PERPENDICULAR or PARALLEL LINES – Lineswhich are perpendicular or parallel in the originalmodel, will always be perpendicular or parallel. Do notdimension angles between such lines or between theirconstruction lines, i.e. 90° or 180° angles.

– TANGENCY – If arcs or lines are tangent to oneanother, or to their construction lines, this relationshipwill be protected. They will be tangent to one anothereven if other dimensions are changed. Do not createdimensions which describe this relationship.

– SHARED CONSTRUCTION LINE – If a line or pointis on the construction line of a second line or arc, i.e.they share a construction line, this relationship will notchange. It will not be affected when new dimensionvalues are assigned when the pattern is used.

This constraint applies to implicit points, as well as explicit pointsand includes the implied intersection points of geometric entities orof their construction lines.

• If any of the relationships described above exist in the originalmodel, and it will be necessary to change them when the parametricshape is used, create the original model so that it does not meet theconditions described, i.e., 95° angle in place of perpendicular. Then,assign values for the dimensions as required.


PATTDIM

Hint: • If a part is over-dimensioned, consider all the construction lines ofthe geometric entities in it. Then check for any of the relationshipsdescribed above for which no dimensions are required.

Naming Dimensions

Before a dimension is created with one of the dimensioning options, (at the KEY IN NAMEprompt), it must be named.

The name of a dimension may be entered in one of three ways:

1. NAME

Up to 60 alphanumeric characters may be entered as the name of the dimension. Thefirst character must be alphabetic. When the dimension is created, the value will beprovided by the system from the model. This value will be used as a default in theparametric shape.

Example:

Prompt and Response: KEY IN NAME L1

Appearance in dimension: L1 = 15

2. EXPRESSION

An arithmetic expression may be entered as the name of a dimension. The standardarithmetic operators (+, –, *, /) may be included in the expression. However, the firstcharacter must be alphabetic. In this case, the value will be the result of theexpression and does not necessarily reflect the actual measurements of the model.This expression cannot be reused because it has no name.

Example:

Prompt and Response: KEY IN NAME L1/30

Appearance in dimension: L1/30


PATTDIM

NAMED EXPRESSION

H2 = V1 * 1.3

V1

H1

OVER DIMENSIONED CORRECTLY DIMENSION

H1V

1

V1 * 1.3

EXPRESSION

Figure 3-1: PATTDIM

Warning:

(L1/30), 30/L1 are not legal expressions.To use such expressions, key in a NAMED EXPRESSION which must start with analphabetic character.

3. NAMED EXPRESSION

An assignment statement may be keyed in as the name of the dimension. The firstcharacter typed must be alphabetic. The value assigned may be variable or constantand does not necessarily reflect the actual model. The name of the dimension (on theleft of the = sign) may be used again in other EXPRESSION or NAMEDEXPRESSION dimensions.

Example 1:

Prompt and Response: KEY IN NAME L2 = (30/L1)

Appearance in dimension: L2 = (30/L1)

Example 2:

Prompt and Response: KEY IN NAME L1 = 15

Appearance in dimension: L1 = 15

Warning 1: • Example 2, in which a constant was assigned to the dimensioncalled L1, appears the same as the first type of dimension, NAMEabove, which takes its value from the actual model.

Use distinctive names for each type so that they will not beconfused with one another.

Warning 2: • A dimension name may not be used on the left of the equal signand also as a NAME alone.

Example:

L2 = (30/L1) for one dimension and L2 for another.

Write the entire expression L2 = (30/L1) again.

or:

Enter the expression once. When it is to be reused, assign the first anew name. L2 = (30/L1) for one dimension. S2 = L2 for another.

Warning 3: • When values which do not reflect the actual part are assigned todimensions, a distorted shape may result when a parametric shape isgenerated or used. This will not be noticeable in the PATTDIMfunction. It is the user’s responsibility to define dimensionscorrectly.


PATTDIM

PATTDIM >> LINEAR

Dimension a linear distance.

SELECT LINE

HORIZONTAL

VERTICAL

REFERENCE

PERPEND.

LINE Dimension the length of a line.

HORIZONTAL Dimension a horizontal distance between two points.

VERTICAL Dimension a vertical distance between two points.

REFERENCE Dimension a distance, parallel to a picked line, between twopoints on the screen.

PERPEND. Dimension a distance between two points, perpendicular to agiven line, or between two curves perpendicular to the firstcurve.

LINEAR >> LINE

Dimension the length of a line.

How To:

1. Enter a dimension name.

2. Pick a direction line.

3. Indicate a point to define the distance the dimension line will be from the direction line.

4. Indicate a new position for the dimension by picking or dragging.

5. Type in a name for more dimensions or <EXIT>.

Interaction:

KEY IN NAME Type in a dimension name. See notes on Naming Dimensionsat the beginning of this function.

PICK DIRECTION LINE | < — — <name> DIM.# — — > |

PARAM SINGLE IND TEXT —> <—

SINGLE IND TEXT

BASELINE CENTERED

CHAIN LABEL

PICK DIRECTION LINE Pick a direction line. The dimension line will be parallel tothis line.


PATTDIM

IND DIMENSION POS Indicate a point to define the distance the dimension line willbe from the direction line.

IND NEW POS/EXIT Indicate a new position for the dimension by picking ordragging. Press <EXIT> when finished.

or: Press <EXIT> to accept the current position.

KEY IN NAME Type in a name for more dimensions or <EXIT>.

LINEAR >> LINE >> BASELINE

Create a number of parallel dimensions sharing a common baseline.

How To:


2. Indicate a position for the dimension.


4. Indicate the next point.

5. Press <CR> to continue for a centered dimension or continue as defined for CHAIN.


Interaction:

All the dimensions will be parallel to the original picked line and the distancebetween each dimension is fixed.

When BASELINE is picked in the modal, the following appears:

<CR> TO CONTINUE DIST =

<CR> TO CONTINUE Press <CR> to return to the dimensioning modals.

PICK DIRECTION LINE Pick a direction line. The dimension lines will be parallel tothis line.

IND DIMENSION POS Indicate a position for the dimension.



After the first dimension has been placed, the system will askyou to indicate the next point.

IND NEXT POINT Indicate the next point. The next dimension will be measuredfrom the reference point to this point.

<CR> TO CONTINUE Press <CR> to continue for a centered dimension.

or:

IND. DIMENSION POS Continue as defined for CHAIN.


PATTDIM

The new dimension will be measured from the originalreference point to the picked point.

The dimension will appear parallel to the direction line and adistance of DIST from the previous dimension.

Continue to create parallel dimensions or press <EXIT> tofinish.

Note: • A witness line for the common reference point is added when thedefinition of the group of parallel dimensions is completed.


LINEAR >> LINE >> CHAIN

Create a series of continuous dimensions. The new dimension will be created from theend of the previous dimension to an indicated point.

How To:




4. Indicate the next point.

5. Press <CR> to continue for a centered dimension or indicate a position for the nextdimension.

6. Indicate the next point for the next dimension or press <EXIT> to finish.


Interaction:

PICK DIRECTION LINE Pick a direction line. The dimension lines will be parallel tothis line.

IND DIMENSION POS Indicate a position for the dimension.

IND NEW POS/EXIT Indicate a new position for the dimension text by picking ordragging. Press <EXIT> when finished.

IND NEXT POINT Indicate the next point. The next dimension will be measuredfrom the end of the previous dimension to this point.

<CR> TO CONTINUE Press <CR> to continue for a centered dimension.

or:

IND DIMENSION POS Indicate a position for the next dimension.

IND NEXT POINT Indicate the next point for the next dimension or press<EXIT> to finish.



PATTDIM

LINEAR >> HORIZONTAL

Dimension a horizontal distance between two points.

How To:


2. Indicate a the first and second points.

3. Indicate the dimension line position.

4. If required, indicate a new dimension position.

5. Create additional dimensions or exit.

Interaction:


IND 1ST POINT | < — — <name> DIM.# — — > |

PARAM CHAIN CENTERED —> <—

IND 1ST POINT Indicate the first point.

IND. 2ND POINT Indicate the second point.

IND DIMENSION POS Indicate the dimension line position. If IND.TEXT isselected, this also indicates the text position.

IND NEW POS/EXIT Indicate a new dimension position, if necessary, or <EXIT>to set the position.



PATTDIM

LINEAR >> VERTICAL

Dimension a vertical distance between two points.

How To:




Interaction:

KEY IN NAME Type in a dimension name. See notes on Naming Dimensions atthe beginning of this function.

IND 1ST POINT | < — — <name> DIM.# — — > |



IND 2ND POINT Indicate the second point.

IND DIMENSION POS Indicate the position of the dimension line. If IND. TEXT isselected, this will also indicate the position of the text.




PATTDIM

LINEAR >> REFERENCE

Dimension a distance, parallel to a picked line, between two points on the screen.

How To:


2. Indicate the first and second points

3. Indicate a point to define the distance the dimension line will be from the directionline.


Interaction:


PICK DIRECTION LINE | < — — <name> DIM.# — — > |


PICK DIRECTION LINE Pick a direction line. The dimension line will be parallel tothis line.


IND 2ND POINT Indicate the second point.

IND DIMENSION POS Indicate a point to define the distance the dimension line willbe from the direction line.





PATTDIM

LINEAR >> PERPEND

Dimension a distance between two point entities or between two curves. Measurementis either perpendicular to a reference line or normal to a curve at the indicated point.

PERPENDICULAR TO: LINE CURVE

LINEAR >> PERPEND >> LINE

LINE dimensions the distance between two points. The points will be projected onto aline which is perpendicular to the reference line. The distance will be measuredbetween the projected points.

How To:


2. Pick the reference line.

3. Indicate the first and second measurement points.

4. Indicate the position of the dimension line.

Interaction:


PICK REFERENCE LINE | < — — <name> DIM.# — — > |

PARAM CENTERED —> <—

PICK REFERENCE LINE Pick the reference line. The dimension will be perpendicularto this line.

IND FIRST POINT Indicate the first measurement point.

IND SECOND POINT Indicate the second measurement point.

IND DIMENSION POS Indicate the position of the dimension line. If IND. TEXT isselected, this will also indicate the position of the text.




PATTDIM

LINEAR >> PERPEND >> CURVE

CURVE dimensions a distance between two curves. The first dimension point is atthe intersection of the first curve and a normal to the curve which passes through anindicated point. The second dimension point is at the intersection of this normal andthe second curve. The dimension line will be parallel to the normal.

How To:

1. Pick the first curve.

2. Indicate a point.

3. Pick the second curve.

4. Indicate the position of the dimension line.

Interaction:


PICK FIRST CURVE | < — — <name> DIM.# — — > |

PARAM CENTERED —> <—

PICK FIRST CURVE Pick the first curve.

IND POINT Indicate a point. The point determines where the normal tothe first curve, along which the distance is measured, ispositioned.

PICK SECOND CURVE Pick the second curve.

IND DIMENSION POS Indicate the position of the dimension line. If IND. TEXT isselected, this also indicates the position of the text.




PATTDIM

PATTDIM >> ANGULAR

Dimension angles.

Note: • Measurement of angular dimensions is counterclockwise. The anglebegins at the first witness line and ends at the second.

SELECT ANGULAR: TWO LINES VERTEX+TWO POINTS LINE+AXIS

ANGULAR >> TWO LINES

Dimension an angle between two intersecting lines.

How To:

1. Type in a dimension name

2. Pick the first and second line.

3. Indicate the angle sector.

4. Indicate the dimension position.

Interaction:


PICK 1ST LINE | < — — <name> DIM.# — — > |

PARAM HORIZON CENTERED SECTOR —> <—

PICK 1ST LINE <PICK> the first line.

PICK 2ND LINE <PICK> the second line.

IND SECTOR Indicate the angle sector.

IND DIMENSION POS. Indicate the dimension position.




PATTDIM

ANGULAR >> VERTEX + TWO POINTS

Dimension an angle defined by its vertex and two points.

How To:

1. Type in a dimension name

2. Indicate the vertex.


4. Indicate the dimension arc position.

Interaction:


IND VERTEX | < — — <name> DIM.# — — > |


IND VERTEX Indicate the vertex.

IND 1ST POINT Indicate a point on the first line of the angle.

IND 2ND POINT Indicate a point on the second line of the angle.


IND DIMENSION POS. Indicate the dimension arc position.




PATTDIM

ANGULAR >> LINE + AXIS

Dimension an angle defined by a line and a selected axis.

How To:

1. Enter a dimension name

2. Pick a line close to an endpoint.

3. Pick either the X or the Y axis.


5. Indicate the dimension arc position.

Interaction:


PICK LINE NEAR END | < — — <name> DIM.# — — > |


PICK LINE NEAR END Pick a line close to an endpoint. The vertex of the angle willbe at the closest endpoint. An axis symbol appears when youpick the line.

PICK AXIS Pick either the X or the Y axis.


IND DIMENSION POS. Indicate the dimension arc position.




PATTDIM

PATTDIM >> RADIAL

Dimension the radius of an arc or circle.

Note: • According to the settings in the Drafting Standard Definition, (seethe External Utilities Section of the Utilities Manual), a radialdimension may appear with an R in front of it.

How To:


2. Pick the circle or arc whose radius you want dimensioned.

3. Indicate the dimension text position.

Interaction:


PICK CIRCLE/ARC <name> DIM.# — — >

PARAM TO CENT —> <—

PICK CIRCLE/ARC Pick the circle or arc whose radius you want dimensioned.

IND DIMENSION POS. Indicate the dimension text position.

IND NEW POS/EXIT Indicate a new dimension text position, if necessary, or<EXIT> to set the position.


PATTDIM >> DIAMETER

Dimension the diameter of an arc or circle.

How To:


2. Pick the circle or arc to be dimensioned.

3. Indicate the dimension text position.

Interaction:


PICK CIRCLE/ARC | < — — <name> DIM.# — — > |

PARAM REGULAR CENTERED —> <—

PICK CIRCLE/ARC Pick the circle or arc to be dimensioned.

IND DIMENSION POS. Indicate the dimension text position.

IND NEW POS/EXIT Indicate a new dimension text position, if necessary, or<EXIT> to set the position.



PATTDIM

PATTDIM >> DIM_PAR

Set dimension default parameters for patterns (parametric shapes).

How To:

1. Set the parameters.

Interaction:

Notes: • Select the PARAM modal parameter in each specific dimensioningoption to change the DIM_PAR defaults locally. Local changes tomodal parameters stay in effect until you return to the mainPATTDIM menu. At that time, DIM_PAR settings are reinstated.

• More detailed explanations of these parameters are provided in theDRAF_PAR function in the Drafting Manual.

• See the DIMENS function in the Drafting Manual, for a moredetailed description of the dimensioning options.

<CR> TO CONTINUE LENGTH PARAMETERS CHAR. SIZE =

DIM.##

ARROW WIT. GAP = WIT. OVERS =

<CR> TO CONTINUE Set the parameters. Press <CR> continue.

PATTDIM >> DIM_EDIT

Change pattern dimensions.

How To:

1. Pick the dimension you want to change.

2. Pick the modal you want to change from the table.

3. To change the name of the dimension, pick the name modal and enter a new name.

Interaction:

PICK DIMENSION Pick the dimension you want to change. The appropriatedimension table is displayed.

<PICK> the modal that you want to change.

To change the name of the dimension, <PICK> the namemodal and type in a new name.

Warning: • A parametric dimension cannot be changed to an expression.

IND DIM POS/EXIT Indicate a new dimension position, if necessary, or <EXIT>to execute the changes.


PATTDIM

PATTDIM Modal Parameter Definitions


� – – – – No symbol will be displayed at the end of the dimension.

� < – – – The symbol defined in the DIM_PAR option or thePARAMS modal will be displayed at the end of thedimension.

– – – >

� | – – – A witness line will be displayed at the end of the dimension.

– – – |

� | < – – A witness line followed by the symbol defined in theDIM_PAR option or the PARAMS modal will be displayedat the end of the dimension.

– – > |

� –><– Arrows will be towards the inside/outside of the distancebeing dimensioned.

<––>

� <name> The name entered for the dimension is displayed here.<PICK> this modal to enter a new name.

� ANGLE PARAMETERS Set parameters for angle dimensions.

� ARROW See Terminators in this list.

� BASELINE Create a number of parallel dimensions that share a commonbaseline.

All the dimensions are parallel to the original picked line andthe distance between each dimension is fixed.

See LINE >> BASELINE option for the full interaction.

� CENTERED The dimension text is centered between the dimensionendpoints

� CHAIN Create a new dimension from the end of the previousdimension to an indicated point.

See LINE >> CHAIN option for the full interaction.

Note: • The BASELINE and CHAIN options are available in all LINEARdimensions except for perpendicular.

� CHAR. SIZE = Enter character height in part file units.

� CIRCLE See Terminators in this list.

� COMPLEMENT The dimensioned angle will be 360° minus the angle in theindicated sector.


PATTDIM

� DIM

DIM.#

DIM.##

DIM.###

DIM.####

No decimal places.One decimal place.Two decimal placesThree decimal places.Four decimal places.

� DIM.#/1

DIM.#/2

DIM.#/4

DIM.#/8

DIM.#/16

DIM.#/128

Whole units1/2 of a unit1/4 of a unit1/8 of a unit1/16, 1/32, 1/64, 1/128 of a unit.

Note: • A value that is too small for the selected precision, and would normallybe displayed as zero, is displayed on the screen as E. This is a warningthat the selected precision does not specify enough decimal places.

Example: • If DIM.# is selected:

0.06 will be rounded to 0.1.0.04 will be rounded and represented as E.

� DIST = Enter the distance to be left between each dimension.

� FILLED ARROW See Terminators in this list.

� FILLED CIRCLE See Terminators in this list.

� HORIZONTAL Text will be horizontal.

� INCLINED Text will be parallel to a tangent to the dimension arc. Thedimension position point which is projected onto thedimension arc to determine the point of tangency will beindicated after the dimension is named.

� IND TEXT The dimension text will be displayed at the picked point.

� LENGTH PARAMETERS Set parameters for length dimensions.

� PARAM Change the DIM_PAR option defaults temporarily.

LENGTH CHAR. SIZE = 5.000

DIM.##

ARROW ARROW WIT. GAP = 4.000 WIT. OVERS = 4.000

Note: • The parameters displayed here depend on the current draftingstandard.

• See the DRAF_PAR function in the Drafting Manual for a detaileddescription of each of the parameters.

� SECTOR The dimensioned angle will be in the indicated sector.

� SINGLE Create a single dimension.

� SLASH See Terminators in this list.

� STD TERM The standard symbol will be displayed.


PATTDIM

� Terminators The following modal defines the symbol which will beattached to the end of the line from the number to theindicated target.

� TO CENT The dimension line will be from the center of the arc/circleto its circumference.

� TO TEXT The dimension line will be from the beginning/end of thedimension text to the circumference of the arc/circle.

Note: • There is no difference between TO CENT and TO TEXT if thedimension position is not between the <PICK>ed position on thearc/circle and its center point.

� WIT. GAP = The witness gap is the distance between the ends of thewitness lines and the dimensioning points. Enter the size ofthe gap in part file units.

� WIT. OVERS = Witness overshoot is the distance the witness lines willextend beyond (“overshoot”) the dimension line. Enter theovershoot distance. �


PATTDIM

NONE THERE WILL BE NO SYMBOL AT THE TARGET END OF THE LINE

ARROW

SLASH

CIRCLE

OPEN ARROW

FILLED ARROW

FILLED CIRCLE

PATTERN Create a single pattern entity from many picked circle and linedimension entities, or delete or rename an existing pattern.

Main Options:

SELECT OPTION CREATE

DELETE

RENAME

CREATE Create a single pattern entity from many picked circle andline dimension entities.

DELETE Delete an existing pattern.

RENAME Rename an existing pattern.

Notes: • This function operates in 2D only.

• Before creating a pattern from line and circle entities, dimension itusing PATTDIM.

• Patterns do not retain any connection with the entities that are createdfrom them. Patterns may be deleted without affecting the entitiescreated using them and vice versa.

• New entities that were created using a pattern do not retain anyconnection to any other.

• See Handling Complex Projects in Chapter 3 of the Fundamentals& General Functions Manual, for an overview of ParametricShapes – Patterns.

PATTERN >> CREATE

Create a single pattern entity from many picked geometric and dimension entities.

How To:

1. Pick all the geometric and dimension entities to be included in the pattern.

2. Enter a name for the pattern.

3. Indicate an origin for the pattern’s coordinate system..

Interaction:

PICK ENTITIES & EXIT Pick all the geometric and dimension entities to be includedin the pattern.

ENTER PATTERN NAME Type a name for the pattern.

If the pattern already exists, the following will appear:

REPLACE PATTERN? YES NO

YES The existing pattern will be replaced.


PATTERN

NO Enter a new pattern name.

Hint: • Use the RENAME option and press <CR> to display the names ofexisting patterns. Press <REJECT> when finished.

IND. ORIG. (END) Indicate an origin for the pattern’s coordinate system.

To indicate an origin that is the same as a pattern beingreplaced, press <EXIT>.

The X axis of the pattern will be parallel to the X axis of theactive coordinate system.

The Y axis of the pattern will be parallel to the Y axis of theactive coordinate system.

EXECUTING The pattern will be created.

Notes: • If one of the following messages is displayed, the pattern is notcreated. The part may be over or under defined:

UNRESOLVED CONSTRUCTION GEOMETRIES!!

THE PATTERN IS OVER DEFINED

OVER DEFINED DIMENSION <dimension number>

Read the explanation of CONSTANT and IMPLIEDCONSTRAINTS in the PATTDIM function and try again.

PATTERN >> DELETE

Delete an existing pattern.

How To:

1. Enter the name of the pattern to be deleted.

Interaction:

ENTER PATTERN NAME Type the name of the pattern to be deleted.

or: Press <CR> to display the names of existing patterns andselect one.

SELECT PATTERN <pattern 1> <pattern 2> . . . <pattern n>

DELETE PATTERN? YES NO <pattern n>

YES Delete the pattern.

NO Do not delete the pattern.


PATTERN

PATTERN >> RENAME

Rename an existing pattern.

How To:

1. Enter the name of the pattern to be renamed.

2. Enter a new name for the pattern and press <CR>.

Interaction:

ENTER PATTERN NAME Type the name of the pattern to be renamed.

or: Press <CR> to display the names of existing patterns andselect one.

ENTER NEW NAME (<old name>) <type a name here>

Type a new name for the pattern and press <CR>.

The pattern will be renamed. �


PATTERN

PATTUSE Create new entities from a pattern and position them freely.

Main Options:

<CR> TO CONTINUE INTERNAL ENTER PATTERN NAME

CATALOG ENTER CATALOG NAME

INTERNAL Create new entities from an internal pattern and place themon the screen.

CATALOG Create new entities from a pattern in another part file andplace them on the screen.

How To:

1. Select a pattern and indicate a position for it.

2. Indicate a location where the new entities will be created with the same shape as theselected pattern.

3. After <EXIT> is pressed to leave the function, the pattern will disappear. The newentities which were just created, will remain.

Notes: • Before you can use a pattern, it must be dimensioned usingPATTDIM and created using PATTERN.

• It is the user’s responsibility to know which dimensions weredefined as constants, and how new values will affect a shape. Adistorted shape may result if these factors were not properlycalculated. The system will not detect impossible combinations ofdimensions.

• The values for the new entities may be entered manually or readfrom an external text file.

• See Handling Complex Projects in Chapter 3 of the Fundamentals& General Functions Manual, for an overview of ParametricShapes – Patterns.


PATTUSE

Importing Data From an External Text File

New entities may be created from a pattern by entering new values for the dimensions directly intothe modal parameters, or reading values from an external text file.

When reading values from an external file, the file must be set up in a table according the followingrules:

First row: contains the names of the parameters as they were defined inthe pattern. Each parameter name must be surrounded byquote symbols, e.g. ‘LENGTH’. Note that these names mustbe identical to the parameter names defined in the pattern.

Second and

subsequent rows:

contain the entry name and the parameter values. Each rowmust contain an entry name (in single quotes, e.g., ‘BOX1’)followed by a number of values. The number of values mustcorrespond to the number of parameter names in the first row.

All the parameters and parameter names must be separated by at least one space character orcomma.

To enter a comment line, start the line with a * symbol. Everything after the * to the end of the linewill be ignored. Blank lines are also ignored.

The following is an example of a file that contains three entries for the dimensions of a box:

BOXVAL - External File Containing Different Dimensions For a Box

‘LENGTH’ ‘WIDTH1 ‘WIDTH2’

‘BOX1’ 100.000 50.000 100.000

‘BOX2’ 23.50 45.50 65.50

‘BOX3’ 62.000 84.500 92.500


PATTUSE

PATTUSE >> INTERNAL

Create new entities from an internal pattern and place them on the screen.

How To:

1. Enter the name of an internal pattern.

2. Enter the positioning parameters.

3. Indicate a point to position the pattern

Interaction:

ENTER PATTERN NAME Type in the name of an internal pattern and press <CR>.

or:

Press <CR> to display a list of internal patterns:

SELECT PATTERN <pattern-1> <pattern-3> . . . <pattern-n>

As soon as a pattern is selected, the following will appear to allow positioning of it on the display:

LOCATE PATTERN SCALE = ANGLE = NO MIRROR AXES ON

AXES SCALE =

LOCATE PATTERN Indicate a point to position the pattern.

EXECUTING . . .

IND. NEW POSITION Continue to indicate a new position point for the pattern.<EXIT> when finished.

Note: • The pattern is displayed temporarily. It is removed from the display atthe end of the function.

<CR> TO CONT/SUBMENU <dimension1> = . . . <dimension2> = . . . <dimension3> = . . .

Enter new values in the modal parameters which were createdwith the PATTDIM function to specify the dimensions of thenew entities.

<CR> TO CONT/SUBMENU When you have finished entering new values, press<CR>.

or: Press <SUBMENU> to read values for the dimensions froman external text file. (The file must be in the format specifiedin the Notes at the beginning of this function)

ENTER FILE NAME Type in the name of the file containing the values to be read.

ENTER ENTRY NAME Type in the name of entry (line) to be read (as specified inthe file).

<CR> TO CONT/SUBMENU <dimension1> = . . . <dimension2> = . . . <dimension3> = . . .


PATTUSE

<CR> TO CONT/SUBMENU The new values are displayed in the modal parameters.

Press <CR> to continue or <SUBMENU> to return to theENTER ENTRY NAME prompt.

LOCATE NEW ENTITIES SCALE = ANGLE = NO MIRROR AXES ON

AXES SCALE =

LOCATE NEW ENTITIES Define the location of the new entities:

Change the modals as required.

or: <PICK> a location on the screen for the pattern with the newentities.

or: <REJECT> to obtain the following submenu:

SELECT: REF.POINTS POINT ANGLE

Select the method to be used to define a location for the newentities.

REF.POINTS Position the new entities with respect to a local coordinatesystem.

LOCATE NEW ENTITIES SCALE = AXES ON AXES SCALE =

LOCATE NEW ENTITIES Define the location of the new entities:

Change the modals as required.

or <PICK> a location on the screen for the pattern with the newentities.

IND. POINT ON + X AXIS

IND. POINT ON + Y AXIS

Indicate a point on the X and Y axes.

POINT-ANGLE Position the new entities so that their origin is at an indicatedpoint and their X axis forms a given angle with the X axis ofthe active work plane.

The interaction for these options is described in detail in thePLACE function. Substitute the prompt INDICATEPOSITION with LOCATE NEW ENTITIES.


PATTUSE

PATTUSE >> CATALOG

Create new entities from a pattern in another part file and place them on the screen.

<CR> TO CONTINUE CATALOG ENTER CATALOG NAME ENTER PATTERN NAME

The current name is displayed on the screen.

If ENTER CATALOG NAME is selected:

ENTER PART FILE NAME If a default part file name exists, it will be displayed in theinteraction area and this prompt will not appear.Press <SUBMENU> to display this prompt and change thepart file name.

or: Type the name of a part file in the current directory andpress <CR>. Use <SUBMENU> or <REJECT> to scrollthrough the names if necessary.

Select a part file name from one of the display menus.

or: Press <CR> without typing a name to display the menu ofpart file names in the current directory.

or: Enter the name of a directory to display the menu of part filenames in that directory. Include the path if it is differentfrom the path of the current directory.

If ENTER PATTERN NAME is selected:

ENTER PATTERN NAME Enter the name of the required pattern or press <CR> toobtain a list of patterns and <PICK> from the list.

Continue as defined for INTERNAL.

PATTUSE Modal Parameter Definitions

� ANGLE = The angle between the X axis of the pattern and the X axisof the active work plane.


� AXES ON Display the axes of the coordinate system of the group beingplaced.

AXES OFF Do not display the axes.

� AXES SCALE = If AXES ON is selected, enter the scale for the axes.

� SCALE = Scaling factor.

� NO-MIRROR No mirror transformation is to be applied to the pattern.

� X-MIRROR The X axis is the mirror line.

� XY-MIRROR The XY plane is the mirror if the 3D mirror is in the X andY axes.

� Y-MIRROR The Y axis is the mirror line. �


PATTUSE

S SECTION II

Surface Functions

Introduction

As described in Section I, the Modeling Application Functions are organized in four overlays,shown below. (To switch from one overlay to the next, press <SUBMENU>. To access theprevious overlay press <REJECT>.)

The Surface functions are organized in overlays III and IV, as shown below. The basic surfacefunctions (RULED and REVOL) are described in Chapter 4. The advanced surface functions aredescribed in Chapter 5.

Overlay I Overlay II Overlay III Overlay IV

POINT GROUP DRIVE PLFACE

LINE PLACE RULED SWEEPF

CIRCLE EXPLODE REVOL TRMPLF

CORNER EXTRACT MESH EDIT_SET

TRIM PATTDIM PNTSRF

OFFSET PATTERN FILLET SURF_CUT

PATTUSE BLEND SCALE

SWEEP COMSRF PARTLN

SPLINE SRFLAT

CONIC COMCRV SRFCRV MODIFY

PROJECT HELIX SRFSEC SURF_EXT

MOVE STRETCH TRMSRF SURFSORT

Cimatron Modeling 13 Surface Functions II-1

Definition

A surface is a three-dimensional entity which indicates a boundary area. Each point on the surfaceis represented by different X, Y and Z values.

All surfaces are defined internally using patches. There are a number of different criteria whichdetermine the number of patches that comprise the surface.

Some of these criteria are:

Contours The number of contour curves defining the surface (e.g.,DRIVE >> PARALLEL >> CONTOUR, RULED >> TWOCONTOURS).

Tolerance The tolerance value according to which the surface is defined.Reducing the tolerance increases the number of patches (e.g.,FILLET, DRIVE >> SPINE).

Surface Types

Within Cimatron, there are two distinct groups of surface types - basic and advanced surfaces.

Basic surfaces have a direct relationship to the geometry and have a constant shape. The advantageof such a surface is its ability to exactly fit a smooth surface. However, changing the shape of abasic surface requires a change in the surface boundaries. Surface types included in this group are:

RULED SURFACE A surface created by connecting, with straight lines,corresponding points between two entities.

SURFACE OF

REVOLUTION

A surface created by rotating curves, or a contour, by a givenangle about an axis of revolution.

An additional surface belongs to this type:

DRIVE

SURFACE (PARLL)

A surface created by moving a 2D/3D section curve/contouralong a drive/spine curve/contour. The section curves createdon the surface are parallel to each other.

The advanced group of surfaces do not have a direct relationship to the geometry and, therefore, donot have a constant shape. The advantage of such surfaces is the use of control points to shape thesurface. These surfaces, therefore, may be changed without redefining surface boundaries. Thesurface types in this group that are created by Cimatron functions, are NURBS and to a limitedextent, Bezier.

NURBS A NURBS (Non-Uniform Rational B-Spline) surface is amulti-patch surface with each patch defined by control points.

NURBS surfaces provide two major advantages: NURBSsurfaces are always smooth, and a change in the location (orweight) of a control point affects only a local region, leavingthe rest of the surface unchanged

II-2 Surface Functions Cimatron Modeling 13

For this type of surface, you may define a “weight” (relativeinfluence) for each control point. The larger the weight value,the greater the influence of the control point on the shape ofthe surface; that is, the control point will “pull” the surfacetowards it.

All of the advanced surface functions create NURBSsurfaces.

BEZIER MESH

SURFACE

A Bezier surface is a multi-patch surface. Each patch isdefined by 16 control points.

The shape a Bezier surface may be changed by manipulatingthe control points. When a control point is moved, however,the entire surface shape is affected.

The disadvantage of a Bezier surface is that it is notnecessarily smooth.

Trimmed SurfacesA trimmed surface is created by performing a TRMSRF operation on an existing surface.

The creation of trimmed surfaces based on existing surfaces is a frequent operation essential whendesigning a part.

A TRMSRF operation can be performed on any type of surface. A TRMSRF operation changesthe surface to a trimmed surface, except when using TRMSRF >> PARAMETER.

The trimmed surface is based on the initial data of the original surface. Therefore, the originalsurface may be restored at any point. This may be done usingVERIFY >> SURFACES >> SURFACE DATA or TRMSRF >> ORIGINAL.

The U and V directions (section and cross-section curves) are determined according to the originalsurface.


ONE PATCH

16 CONTROL POINT

Figure II-1: BEZIER MESH SURFACE

Trimming by Parameter

For a NURBS surface, trimming by parameter results in an untrimmed surface with newparametrization, and the original surface cannot be restored.

For other types of surfaces, the result is also an untrimmed surface, however the original surfacemay be restored, as described above.

Differences Between a Trimmed Surface and Other Surfaces

The trimmed surface may include “islands” according to the user’s definition.

The trimmed surface may contain more than four surface boundaries and four corners (the SURF-Coption, in the point indication submenu, may be used to pick a surface corner). Every sharp corneron the external surface boundary or within an island may be picked using SURF-C.

The surface boundary is divided internally into curves. This division can be modified using thefunction TRMSRF >> MODIFY BOUNDARIES.

The contours (external boundaries and internal islands) of the TRMSRF can be removedindividually, and the complement of the TRMSRF (the part of the original surface which trimmedaway) can be created, using TRMSRF >> EDIT CONTOURS.

A SRFCRV operation on a trimmed surface is different from that on a regular surface. As the Uand V directions and values are defined by the original surface, parametric values cannot bespecified for a trimmed surface. Therefore, curve entities can only be created from the externalboundaries or internal curves of a trimmed surface.


Summary of Surface Types Available in Cimatron

Below is a table showing the surface types available in Cimatron, together with the functions thatcreate them.

MathematicalSurface TypeCreated

SectionName

Cross-SectionName

Cimatron Function/Option

Ruled Surface Curves Lines RULED

Surface of Revolution Curves Arcs

REVOL

FILLET >> 3 SURFACES (corner

surface only)

Drive Parallel Surface

(PARLL)Sections Drives DRIVE >> PARALLEL SEC

NURBS Surface Sections Cross-Sections

DRIVE all options (except PARALLEL

SEC)

BLEND

MESH

FILLET

PNTSRF

RULED (for special cases only)

COMSRF

MODIFY >> FAIR

OFFSET >> SURFACE >> VARIABLE

SCALE

MODIFY >> ADJOIN SURFACES

MODIFY >> TRMSRF TO SURFACE

USER >> GEOMETRY >> READCMM

Trimmed SurfaceAs per the original surface.

TRMSRF

Original Surface Type TRMSRF >> BY PARAMETER

Notes: • The function MODIFY >> MODIFY SLOPES converts anysurface type into a NURBS surface.

• A surface can be converted to Bezier using the USER function/GEOMETRY/APPBEZ.


Display of the Surface on the Screen

The number of display curves is based on the number of existing surface patches.

In addition to the number of display curves representing the surface, it is possible to control thenumber of points which define each display curve using DISPLAY >> REFINE >> DISPLAYTOLERANCE. Decreasing the value of the display tolerance serves to refine the surface andincreases the display quality in the SHADE function.

Surface curves in the U direction are referred to as SECTIONs, and those in the V direction arereferred to as CROSS-SECTIONs. The direction of these U or V parameters is determined by theuser and the function definition.

The number of display curves (section and cross-section) used to display the surface is controlledby the user during surface creation and/or using the function DISPLAY.

The number and quality of the surface’s display curves are for display purposes only. Therefore allmathematical calculations (sectioning, offsetting, coordinates, etc.) are based on the surface data inthe database, irrelevant of the quality of the displayed surface.

Note: • In order to be able to refer to points on the surface, use thefollowing options in the Point Indication submenu: SURF, SURF-B,SURF-C, SURF-X and PIERCE. See Chapter 3, of theFundamentals & General Functions Manual, for a more detailedexplanation.

The values specified for displaying a surface have the following meaning. See Figure II-2.

Value of 0 Displays the surface boundaries. (Using the value 0 forsection or cross-section curves displays the boundaries of thesurface only.)

Value of 1 Displays the surface boundaries and a curve in the center ofthe parametric value of the surface; a total of 3 display curvesin the desired direction (section or cross-section direction).

Value of 2 Displays the patch boundaries only. Specifying this value forthe sections and cross-sections displays the boundaries of allcomponent patches.

Value 3 and higher Displays the number of curves per patch, e.g., if 4 is thespecified value, 4 curves are displayed for each patch in thedesired direction (U or V).



DISPLAY SURFACEBOUNDARY ONLY

DISPLAY BOUNDARYSURFACE ANDMIDDLE PARAMETER

DISPLAY BOUNDARYOF EACH IN BOTHDIRECTIONS

DISPLAY 3 CURVESPER PATCH IN BOTHDIRECTIONS

NUMBER OF PATCHES = 3NUMBER OF PATCHES = 1NUMBERDISPLAY

U = 0V = 0

U = 1V = 1

U = 2V = 2

* - U - SECTIONS , CURVESV - CROSS SECTIONS , LINES , ARCS , DRIVES

U = 3V = 3

S Chapter 4

Basic Surface Functions

Three functions are used to create basic surface entities: RULED, REVOL and SURF_CUT.

Additional surface functions are described in Chapter 5, Advanced Surface Modeling Functions.These functions may be purchased separately.

Overlay III Overlay IV

RULED

REVOL

SURF_CUT

REVOL Create a surface of revolution.

RULED Create a ruled surface.

SURF_CUT Trim surfaces by four planes (box like).

Cimatron Modeling 13 Basic Surface Functions 4-1

REVOL Create a surface of revolution.

A surface of revolution is created by rotating curves or acontour by a given angle about an axis of rotation.

Main Options:

SELECT OPTION: CURVES

CONTOUR

CURVES Create a surface of revolution by rotating curves about anaxis of rotation.

CONTOUR Create a surface of revolution by rotating a contour about anaxis of rotation.

Notes: • The curve/contour cannot cross the axis.

• If the curve has a break point (for example, a spline with a breakpoint), a surface will not be produced.

• If the contour/composite curve has break points, the surface will bedivided at the break points.

4-2 Basic Surface Functions Cimatron Modeling 13

REVOL

IND. AXIS START PNT

IND. AXIS DIREC. PNT.

PICK CURVES/EXIT

Figure 4-1: REVOL >> CURVES, CONTOUR

REVOL >> CURVES / CONTOUR

How To:

1. Indicate an origin for the axis of rotation.

2. Indicate the direction point for the axis of rotation.

2. Pick the curve or contour as required.

Interaction:

IND. AXIS START PNT. DISP. ARCS = DISP. CURVES = ANGLE = SINGLE SURFACE

MULTI SURFACE

IND. AXIS START PNT. Indicate an origin for the axis of rotation.

IND. AXIS DIREC. PNT. Indicate the direction point for the axis of rotation.

PICK CURVES / EXIT If CURVES is selected, pick one or more curves to berotated about the axis of rotation to create the REVOLsurface.

To create more than one surface, pick several curves to berotated about the same axis. Terminate the selection of curveswith <EXIT>.

PICK 1ST CRV/EXIT If CONTOUR is selected, pick the first curve of the contourto be rotated around the defined axis.

INDICATE DIRECTION Continue to define the contour as described in DefiningContours in Chapter 3, of the Fundamentals & GeneralFunctions Manual.

EXECUTING The surface, or surfaces, will be created.

Note: • SINGLE SURFACE / MULTI SURFACE appears if the optionCONTOUR is selected.

REVOL Modal Parameter Definitions


� ANGLE = The rotation angle is measured on a plane perpendicular tothe rotation axis. A positive angle is in a counterclockwisedirection.

� DISP. ARCS = Enter the number of displayed arcs which will represent thesurface(s).

� DISP. CURVES = Enter the number of displayed curves which will represent thesurface(s).

� MULTI SURFACE One surface is created for each curve in the contour.

� SINGLE SURFACE One surface is created. �


REVOL

RULED Create a ruled surface.

If not smooth, the surface is approximated to a NURBSsurface.

Main Options:

SELECT OPTION TWO CURVES

TWO CONTOURS

CURVE SURFACE

CURVE PLANE

CURVE POINT

TWO CURVES Create a ruled surface by connecting corresponding points ontwo curves.

TWO CONTOURS Create a ruled surface by connecting the correspondingendpoints of the curves in two contours.

CURVE SURFACE Create a ruled surface by projecting a contour onto a givensurface.

CURVE PLANE Create a ruled surface by projecting a contour onto a definedplane.

CURVE POINT Create a ruled surface(s) by connecting end points on acurve(s) with a defined point.

Notes: • If the curve has a break point (spline with a break point), the surfacewill not be produced.

• If the contour/composite curve has break points, the surface will bedivided at the break points.


RULED

RULED >> TWO CURVES

Create a ruled surface by connecting corresponding points on two curves.

Note: • If composite curves are used, they must contain an equal number ofsegments.

How To:

1. Pick the first curve close to one of its endpoints.

2. Pick the second curve close to the endpoint which will be connected to the indicatedendpoint of the first curve.

Interaction:

PICK 1ST CURVE DISP. LINES = DISP. CURVES =

PICK 1ST CURVE Pick the first curve close to one of its endpoints.

PICK 2ND CURVE Pick the second curve close to the endpoint which will beconnected to the indicated endpoint of the first curve.

CURVES O.K.? YES NO

YES Create the surface entity which is represented by thedisplayed lines and curves.

NO Reject the second curve and accept a new selection.


RULED

PICK 1ST CURVE

PICK 2ND CURVE

Figure 4-2: RULED >> TWO CURVES

RULED >> TWO CONTOURS

Create single or multiple ruled surface(s) by connecting the corresponding endpointsof the curves in two contours.

Note: • The number of curves in the first contour determines the number ofcurves that the system will automatically pick in the second contour.Therefore the second contour must contain the same number ofcurves as the first contour.

How To:

1. Pick the first curve in the first contour which defines the RULED surface.

2. Indicate the direction in which the contour will be projected.

3. Pick the first curve in the second contour which defines the RULED surface andcontinue as for the 1st contour.

Interaction:

DEFINE 1ST CONTOUR DISP. LINES = DISP. SECTIONS =SINGLE SURFACEMULTI SURFACE

DEFINE 1ST CONTOUR Pick the first curve in the first contour which defines theRULED surface.

INDICATE DIRECTION Indicate the direction in which the contour will be projected.

Continue to define the contour as described in DefiningContours in Chapter 3, of the Fundamentals & GeneralFunctions Manual.

DEFINE 2ND CONTOUR Pick the first curve in the second contour which defines theRULED surface and continue as for the 1st contour.


RULED

IND. DIRECTION

DEFINE 1ST CONTOUR ( PICK 1ST CRV., 2ND CRV., 3RD CRV. )

DEFINE 2ND CONTOUR ( PICK 1ST CRV., 2ND CRV., 3RD CRV. )

Figure 4-3: RULED >> TWO CONTOURS

END CONTOUR O.K.? YES NO

YES Confirm the contours which are displayed in attention.

NO Reject and redefine contours.

EXECUTING When the contours are confirmed, the ruled surface will becreated.

Note: • If the resulting surface is not smooth, the following message isdisplayed:SURFACE WILL BE SMOOTHED ACCORDING TOTOLERANCE!

The following prompt appears:

<CR> TO CONTINUE TOL =

<CR> TO CONTINUE Set modal and press <CR> to continue.

E X E C U T I N G The resulting NURBS surface is created.


RULED

RULED >> CURVE SURFACE

Create single or multiple ruled surface(s) by projecting a contour at a given angle onto a pickedsurface or trimmed surfaces.

How To:

1. Pick the first curve in the contour.

2. Pick the surface or trimmed surface.

3. Indicate projection direction.

Interaction:


Select whether an open or closed contour will be defined.

PICK 1ST CURVE DISP. LINES = DISP. CURVES = TOL = ANGLE = TRIM ON /

ROUND CORNER / SINGLE SURFACE / TRIM OFF

SHARP CORNER MULTI SURFACE

PICK 1ST CURVE Pick the first curve in the contour. Define the contour asdescribed in Defining Contours in Chapter 3, of theFundamentals & General Functions Manual.

PICK SURFACE Pick the surface or trimmed surface.

DIRECTION: PICK CURVE Define the projection direction. Indicate a point on a curve, oruse another <SUBMENU> option.


RULED

PICK CURVE

IND. DIRECTION

IND. SIDE

IND. DIRECTION

PICK SURFACE

TRIMM OFFANGLE = 5

Figure 4-4: RULED >> CURVE SURFACE

INDICATE DIRECTION An arrow appears. Indicate the direction in which the contourwill be projected.

INDICATE SIDE If ANGLE ≠ 0, indicate the direction of the angle. Thesurface(s) will be created.

If ANGLE = 0, the following prompt will appear:

CONTINUE? YES NO

YES The surface will be created.


EXECUTING The surface is created.

Note: • The projection surface is not created on any part of a projection thatexceeds the boundaries of the picked surface.


RULED

RULED >> CURVE PLANE

Create single or multiple ruled surface(s) by projecting a contour at a given angleonto a defined plane.

How To:

1. Pick the first curve in the contour.

2. Define a plane.

3. Indicate the projection direction.

Interaction:


Select whether an open or closed contour will be defined.

PICK PLANE DISP. LINES = DISP. CURVES = TOL = ANGLE = TRIM ON

ROUND CORNER SINGLE SURFACE TRIM OFF

SHARP CORNER MULTI SURFACE

PICK 1ST CURVE Pick the first curve in the contour. Define the contour asdescribed in Defining Contours in Chapter 3, of theFundamentals & General Functions Manual.

DEFINE PLANE Use a work plane option to define a plane. See Defining aPlane in Chapter 3, of the Fundamentals & GeneralFunctions Manual.

DIRECTION: PICK CURVE Define the projection direction. Indicate a point on a curve, oruse another <SUBMENU> option.

INDICATE DIRECTION An arrow appears. Indicate the direction in which the contourwill be projected.

INDICATE SIDE If ANGLE = 0, indicate the direction of the angle. Thesurface(s) will be created.


RULED

SURFACE

IND. DIR

IND. DIR

IND. SIDE

ANGLE = 5

DEFINE PLANE ( CURVES )

PICK NTH CURVE

DEFINE DIRECTION( PICK CURVE )

Figure 4-5: RULED >> CURVE PLANE

If ANGLE = 0, the following prompt will appear:

CONTINUE? YES NO YES The surface will be created.



RULED >> CURVE POINT

Create a ruled surface(s), which is defined by connecting end points on a curve(s) with a definedpoint.

How To:

1. Pick a curve(s) for each ruled surface to be created.

2. Indicate a point which will be connected to the endpoints of each curve to create theruled surface(s) and confirm the selection.

Interaction:

PICK CURVES / EXIT DISP. LINES = DISP. CURVES =

PICK CURVES/EXIT Pick a curve(s) for each ruled surface to be created. <EXIT>when finished.

IND. POINT Indicate a point which will be connected to the endpoints ofeach curve to create the ruled surface(s).

POINT O.K.? YES NO YES Confirm the point.

NO Cancel the point.

EXECUTING A surface(s) will be created between each curve and thepoint.


RULED

PICK CURVES/EXIT

IND. POINT

Figure 4-6: RULED >> CURVE POINT

RULED Modal Parameter Definitions


� ANGLE = Enter the draft angle used to project the contour onto thesurface. Used with the options CURVE SURFACE andCURVE PLANE.

Note: • When using an internal ANGLE on contours with break points, theintersecting surfaces are trimmed.

� DISP. LINES = Enter the number of displayed line segments which willrepresent the surface.

� DISP. CONT. = Enter the number of displayed contours which will representthe surface.

� DISP. CURVES = Enter the number of displayed curves which will represent thesurface.

� MULTI SURFACE One surface is created for each curve in the contour.

� ROUND CORNER Used with the options CURVE SURFACE and CURVEPLANE. When creating multiple surfaces on contours withbreak points, an additional ruled surface (corner surface) iscreated between the sharp point on the contour and the pickedsurface. The surface created is similar to the result ofCURVE POINT.

� SHARP CORNER Used with the options CURVE SURFACE and CURVEPLANE. When creating multiple surfaces on contours withbreak points, using an external ANGLE, the surfaces will beextended.

� SINGLE SURFACE One surface is created. If a single smooth surface cannot becreated, the surface will be divided at its break points intomultiple surfaces.

� TOL = Enter the maximum tolerance allowed.

� TRIM OFF The base surface is not trimmed.

� TRIM ON The base surface is trimmed by the projected ruled surface.�


RULED

SURF_CUT Trim surfaces by four planes (box like).

This function is very suitable for models with part surfaces (not to be trimmed) andlarge Parting Surfaces that should be trimmed by the box of the plate or insert.

How To:

1. Pick the surfaces which will not be trimmed.

2. Pick a reference UCS according to which the box planes will be displayed.

3. Adjust the parameters of the box planes, if required.

4. Pick the surfaces to be trimmed.

5. The surfaces that are entirely within the box will not be trimmed. The surfaces that areentirely outside the box will be deleted.

Interaction:

PICK BOX SURF. & EXIT Pick the surfaces that will not be trimmed, i.e. Faces that willbe inside the box.

Press <EXIT> when finished.

The number of surfaces selected is displayed at the bottom ofthe screen.

SURFACES OK?

YES / NO

Confirm the selection of the surfaces.

YES The surfaces are accepted, continue with the interaction.

NO Reselect the surfaces.


SURF_CUT

PICK BOX SURFACE&EXIT

PICK UCS/EXIT = ACTIVEPICK SURF. TO TRIM&EXIT( ALL )

Figure 4-7: SURF_CUT

PICK UCS/EXIT=ACTIVE Pick a reference UCS. If you press <EXIT> the active UCS isselected. The direction of the box planes will be set accordingto this UCS.

<CR> TO CONTINUE X_SIZE = 66.000 Y_SIZE = 53.000 CHANGE CENTER POINT

A preview of the box planes is displayed in bold cyan lines.

The center point of the box is displayed as a purplesquare.

You may change center point of the box and also the X andY dimensions (the height is not important as we are nottrimming in the Z direction).

Press <ENTER> when finished.

PICK SURF TO TRIM&EX TOLERANCE = 0.010

Pick the surfaces to be trimmed.

Press <EXIT> when finished.

SURFACES OK?

YES / NO

Confirm the selection of the surfaces.

YES The surfaces are trimmed. The surfaces that are entirelywithin the box will not be trimmed. The surfaces thatare entirely outside the box will be deleted.

NO Reselect the surfaces.

Important: • To remove the display of the box of planes from your screen, pressCTRL+R (Rebuild Display).

Note: • The center point of the box of planes ( or ) is converted to apoint ( + ) upon completion of the trimming operation.

SURF_CUT Modal Parameter Definitions


� CHANGE CENTER

POINT

Pick a new center point of the box planes.

SELECT CENTER POINT:

Pick a new point - any Cimatron point may be picked.

The new center point is displayed with a green square.

� X_SIZE = 66.000 Define the X size of the box planes.

� Y_SIZE = 66.000 Define the Y size of the box planes. �


SURF_CUT

S Chapter 5

Advanced Surface Functions

Introduction

The advanced surface functions are used to create different types of surfaces entities withinCimatron. Basic surfaces, i.e., ruled surfaces and surfaces of revolution, are created using the basicsurface functions (RULED and REVOL) described in Chapter 4, Basic Surface Functions.

The advanced surface functions are located in overlays III and IV.

Overlay III Overlay IV

DRIVE PLFACE

SWEEPF

TRMPLF

MESH EDIT_SET

PNTSRF

FILLET SURF_CUT

BLEND SCALE

COMSRF PARTLN

SRFLAT

SRFCRV MODIFY

SRFSEC SURF_EXT

TRMSRF SURFSORT

Cimatron Modeling 13 Advanced Surface Functions 5-1

BLEND Create a blend surface between several section curves,surfaces, or trimmed surfaces.

COMSRF Create a single NURBS surface from a chain of surfaces thathave common boundaries.

DRIVE Create a Drive/Parallel or NURBS surface by movingsection(s) along a drive curve(s)/contour(s) with a specifiedorientation.

EDIT_SET Modify geometry sets. Available geometry sets are planarfaces and composite curves.

FILLET Define a fillet surface between two or three surfaces, betweena surface and a curve, between one surface and multiplesurfaces or a group of multiple surfaces.

MESH Create a surface defined by its section and cross-sectioncurves.

MODIFY Modify curves and surfaces; check smoothness of curves andsurfaces.

PARTLN Create parting line(s) and surface to indicate where a moldshould be cut in order to remove a part.

PLFACE Create a planar face defined by a 2D closed contour andoptional island contours.

PNTSRF Create a NURBS surface by defining through points (pointswhich lie on the surface) or control points of its section andcross-section curves.

SCALE Create new entities from originals by specifying X and/or Yand/or Z scale factors, according to the coordinate system.

SRFCRV Create curve entities from the boundary or display curves ofsurfaces, trimmed surfaces, or planar faces.

SRFLAT Flatten a 3D surface or trimmed surface and create curveentities from its boundaries.

SRFSEC Create curve entities where one surface is intersected by othersurface(s) or a plane(s).

SURF_EXT Extend a sequence of surfaces.

SURFSORT Process surfaces into 4 groups according to their visibilityfrom the ± Z direction of the ACTIVE UCS and define theirdisplay parameters.

SWEEPF Sweep planar faces along a vector to create new planar faces.

TRMPLF Create a new planar face by trimming an existing planar faceby a 2D contour which lies on the planar face.

TRMSRF Create a trimmed surface based on an existing surface, ormodify a trimmed surface.

5-2 Advanced Surface Functions Cimatron Modeling 13

BLEND Create a blend surface (NURBS) between several sectioncurves, points, surfaces or trimmed surfaces; create surface(s)to fill a gaps between surfaces or to fill in a 3D contour.

This function enables the creation of surfaces defined only bysections. Optional side boundaries may also be defined.

Main Options:

SELECT SECTIONS

CORNER

SOAP

REGION

SECTIONS Create a blend surface between several section curves, points,surfaces or trimmed surfaces. Slopes may be defined at thefirst and last sections, and side boundaries may be selected.

CORNER Create a surface or system of surfaces to smoothly fill a gapbetween 3 or more adjacent surfaces.

SOAP Create a blend surface between two orthogonal 2D sectionsand a closed 2D/3D base curve.

REGION Create a surface to fill in a closed 2D/3D contour.


BLEND

BLEND >> SECTIONS

Create a blend surface between several section curves, points, surfaces or trimmedsurfaces. Slopes may be defined at the first and last sections, and side boundaries maybe selected.

PICK 1ST SECTION TOL = 0.100 DISP.SECTIONS. = 3 DISP.CROSS-SECTION = 3

FREE SLOPES

FREE SLOPES

CONSTANT

LINEAR

SURF-TANGENT

SURF-NRM

PLANE

KEEP CURVATURE

How To:

1. Set the tolerance value and the number of curves that will be used for displaypurposes.

2. Select the slope option to be used to define the first edge of the blend surface.

3. Pick the first section curve(s)/surface and optionally define the slope at this edge.

4. Pick additional section curves.

5. Select the option to be used to define the last edge of the blend surface.

6. Pick the last section curve(s)/surface and optionally define the slope at this edge.

7. Optionally define one or two side boundaries.

The following slope options are available when defining the first and last edges

FREE SLOPES The slope is defined automatically.

CONSTANT The slope is a constant value defined by the user.

LINEAR The slope is linearly incremented between the two valuesdefined by the user at the two end points of the section curve.

SURFACE-TANGENT The slope at the edge of the blend surface is continuous withthe slope of the selected surface (surface normals andparametric directions are tangent). The section curve must bea surface curve or an implicit curve.

SURF-NRM The slope at the edge of the blend surface is tangent planecontinuous with the slope of the selected surface (surfacenormals are tangent, parameteric directions are not). Thesection curve must be a surface curve or an implicit curve.

PLANE The slope at the edge of the blend surface is continuous withthe slope of a selected plane (surface normal and normal tothe plane are tangent). The section must lie on the plane.

KEEP CURVATURE The curvature continuity condition is defined at the first andlast sections of a blend surface if the sections are boundariesof other surfaces.


BLEND

Notes: • Pick section curves close to the endpoints that will be joined by thesame cross-section curve.

• A maximum of 1024 section curves can be selected.

• For a detailed description of defining slopes, see Defining Slopes inChapter 3, Fundamentals & General Functions Manual.

• One or two side boundary curves may be defined.

• Curves with break points are not applicable as sections orboundaries.

• The slopes of the side boundary curves must be consistent with theslopes defined for the sections.

• In the following descriptions, it is assumed that the same slopecondition is applied to the first and last sections. In actual use, theslope conditions do not have to be the same.


BLEND

SECTIONS >> FREE SLOPES

The slope is defined automatically.

How To:

1. Pick the first section curve.

2. Pick the Nth section.

3. Pick the first and second boundaries and confirm the selection.

Interaction:

PICK 1ST SECTION Pick the first section curve.

PICK NTH SECTION Pick the Nth section.Press <EXIT> when finished.

PICK 1ST BOUNDARY Pick the first boundary curve or <EXIT> to continue.

PICK 2ND BOUNDARY If one boundary was selected, pick the second boundary or<EXIT> to continue.

CURVES O.K. ? YES NO

YES Accept the selected sections.

NO Reselect the sections.

EXECUTING The blend surface is created.


BLEND

PICK 1ST SECTION

PICK 2ND SECTION

Figure 5-1: Blend Section on Free Slope

SECTIONS >> CONSTANT

The slope is a constant value defined by the user.

How To:


2. Pick a curve to define the slope at the first boundary of the blend surface, or selectanother option from the <SUBMENU>.


4. Pick a curve to define the slope at the last boundary of the blend surface.

5. Pick the first and second boundaries curve or <EXIT> to continue.

Interaction:


DIRECTION: PICK CURVE Pick a curve to define the slope at the first boundary of theblend surface, or select another option from the<SUBMENU>.

PICK NTH SECTION Pick the Nth section.Press <EXIT> when finished.

DIRECTION: PICK CURVE Pick a curve to define the slope at the last boundary of theblend surface.





BLEND

PICK 1ST SECTION

IND. DIRECTION

PICK CURVE

PICK 2ND SECTION

IND. DIRECTION

Figure 5-2: BLEND >> SECTIONS >> CONSTANT

SECTIONS >> LINEAR

The slope is linearly incremented between the two values defined by the user at thetwo end points of the section curve.

How To:


2. Pick a curve to define the slope of the blend surface for both ends of the first

section.


4. Pick a curve to define the slope of the blend surface for both ends of the last section.

5. Pick the required boundary curves.

Interaction:


DIRECTION: PICK CURVE Pick a curve to define the slope of the blend surface for oneend of the first section.

DIRECTION: PICK CURVE Pick a curve to define the slope of the blend surface for theother end of the first section.

PICK NTH SECTION Pick the Nth section. Press <EXIT> when finished.

DIRECTION: PICK CURVE Pick a curve to define the slope of the blend surface for oneend of the last section.

DIRECTION: PICK CURVE Pick a curve to define the slope of the blend surface for theother end of the last section.





BLEND

1ST POINT

2ND POINT

RESULTING SURFACE

IND. DIRECTION

1ST POINT

2ND POINT

PICK 1ST SECTION

FREE SLOPE

LINEAR SLOPE

IND. DIRECTION

PICK 2ND SECTION

Figure 5-3: BLEND >> SECTIONS >> LINEAR

SECTIONS >> SURFACE-TANGENT / SRF-NRM

The section you pick may be a surface boundary (implicit curve) or a surfacecurve. Both options have the same interaction. See the figures on the next page foran illustration of both options.


BLEND

PICK 1ST SECTION

PICK 2ND SECTION

Figure 5-4: BLEND >> SECTIONS >> SURFACE-TANGENT

PICK 1ST SECTION

PICK 2ND SECTION

Figure 5-5: BLEND >> SECTIONS >> SRF-NRM

How To:


2. Pick the surface to which the curve belongs.

3. Indicate the slope direction.

4. Pick the nth section and indicate the slope direction.

5. Pick the first and second boundary curves.

Interaction:

PICK 1ST SECTION Pick the first section curve.If the first section is a surface curve:

PICK SURFACE Pick the surface to which the curve belongs.

IND. SLOPE DIR. Indicate the slope direction at the entry to the blend surface.

PICK NTH SECTION Pick the Nth section. Press <EXIT> when finished.If the last section is a surface curve:

PICK SURFACE Pick the surface to which the curve belongs.

IND. SLOPE DIR. Indicate the slope direction at the exit from the blend surface.



If the last section is a surface boundary:

CURVES O.K.?YES NO YES Accept the selected sections.



Note: • If a picked section is a boundary of a trimmed surface:

if there is smooth continuation to another boundary:

PICK NEXT/EXIT Pick the next boundary section.

INDICATE DIRECTION Define the direction of the section

IND. SLOPE DIR. Indicate the slope direction.


BLEND

SECTIONS >> PLANE

The section you pick must be a line or a 2D curve and it must lie on the plane.

How To:


2. Define the plane, if required, and pick the Nth section.


Interaction:


DEFINE PLANE If the curve is a line, use the plane definition options todefine a plane. If the curve is 2D, this prompt does notappear.


DEFINE PLANE If the curve is a line, use the plane definition options todefine a plane. If the curve is 2D, this prompt does notappear.





BLEND

DEFINE PLANE( 3 POINTS )

PICK 1ST SECTION

PICK SIDE

SURFACE

PICK 2ND SECTION

PICK SIDE

Figure 5-6: BLEND >> SECTIONS >> PLANE

SECTIONS >> KEEP CURVATURE

The curvature continuity condition is defined at the first and last sections of a blendsurface if the sections are boundaries of other surfaces.

How To:




Interaction:





CURVES O.K.?YES NO YES Accept the selected sections.




BLEND

PICK 1ST SECTION

PICK 2ND SECTION

KEEP CURVATURE FREE SLOPES SURF_TANGENT

Figure 5-7: BLEND >> SECTIONS >> KEEP CURVATURE

BLEND >> CORNER

Create a surface or system of surfaces to fill in an “empty space” surrounded by 3 ormore adjacent surfaces.

How To:

1. Pick the first boundary curve.

2. Pick the Nth boundary curve.

3. If required, modify the shape of the surface and confirm.

Interaction:

PICK 1ST BOUND./EXIT TOL = 0.100 DISP.CROSS-SECT. = 3 DISP.SECTIONS. = 3

PICK 1ST BOUND./EXIT Pick the first boundary curve.

PICK NTH BOUND./EXIT Pick the Nth boundary curve.Press <EXIT> when finished.

EXECUTING The surface, or system of surfaces, is created.

If the result contains more than one surface, the followingprompt appears.


BLEND

PICK NTH BOUND./EXIT

SURFACE ( CENTER POINT )SURFACE

IND. CENTER POINT

Figure 5-8: BLEND >> CORNER



NO Modify the shape of the surface by defining the locationof the center point and/or the direction of the normal atthe center point.

DEFINE: CENTER POINT DRAW NORMAL = 20

NORMAL DIRECTION

CENTER + NORMAL

Select an option, define the length of the line used torepresent the normal and <CR>. The current normal will bedisplayed with the specified length.

If CENTER POINT or CENTER + NORMAL is selected,the following prompt appears:

IND. CENTER POINT Indicate a new location for the center point (the point wherethe individual corner surfaces will meet).

If NORMAL DIRECTION or CENTER + NORMAL isselected, the following prompt appears:

DIRECTION:

1ST POINT

Indicate a point to define the direction of the normal or useanother option from the <SUBMENU>.

CENTER + NORMAL O.K. YES NO

YES Create new surfaces.

NO Indicate a different center point.



NO Modify the shape of the surface by defining the locationof the center point and/or the direction of the normal atthe center point.


BLEND

BLEND >> SOAP

Create a blend surface between two orthogonal 2D sections and a closed 2D/3D base curve.(This function can be used to create a surface whose shape resembles a bar of soap.)

How To:

1. Pick a smooth closed curve.

2. Pick two 2D section curves and confirm.

Interaction:

PICK BASE CURVE DIST. TOL = 0.100 DISP.CROSS-SECT. = 3 DISP.SECTIONS. = 3

PICK BASE CURVE Pick a smooth closed curve.

PICK 1ST CURVE Pick a 2D section curve.

PICK 2ND CURVE Pick another 2D curve.

CURVES O.K. ? YES NO

YES Accept the selected curves. The surface will be created.

NO Reselect the curves.


BLEND

PICK 2ND CURVE

PICK 1ST CURVE

PICK BASE CURVE

SURFACE

Figure 5-9: BLEND >> SOAP

BLEND >> REGION

Create a surface to fill in a closed 2D or 3D contour. The contour must be close toplanar.

How To:

1. Enter the contour tolerance to be used when selecting the closed contour.

2. Toggle to FREE SLOPE or SURFACE SLOPE and indicate a closed contour.

3. Confirm the contour or define the last curve.

Interaction:

<CR> TO CONTINUE CONT. TOL = 0.001

Enter the contour tolerance to be used when selecting theclosed contour.

PICK CLOSED CONTOUR FREE SLOPE

Toggle to the option FREE SLOPE to smoothly join thesurrounding surfaces or SURFACE SLOPE to obtain asurface which is bound by a given contour and joins smoothlyto the surrounding surfaces.

Indicate a closed contour. Curves and implicit surfaceboundaries may be selected.

END CONTOUR O.K.? YES NO

YES Accept the contour and continue.

NO Indicate the last curve in the contour.

<CR> TO CONTINUE TOL = 0.01 DISP. U CURVES = 3 DISP. V CURVES = 3

REF. PLANE REF. ENTITIES

If REF. PLANE is selected:

DEFINE PLANE Define a reference plane to help the program fit a surface tothe contour. See Defining a Plane in Chapter 3, of theFundamentals & General Functions Manual.

If REF. ENTITIES is selected:

PICK ENTITIES& EXIT Pick reference curve(s) and point(s) which the resultingsurface will pass through and <EXIT>.


BLEND

BLEND Modal Parameter Definitions


� CENTER POINT Indicate a new location for the point at which the cornersurfaces will meet.

NORMAL DIRECTION Indicate the direction of the normal at the current centerpoint.

CENTER + NORMAL Indicate the point at which the corner surfaces will meet andthe direction of the normal at this point.

CONT. TOL = 0.001 Maximum distance permitted between selected entities in theclosed contour.

� DISP.

CROSS-SECTIONS = 3

Set the number of cross-section curves used to display thesurface(s).

� DISP. SECTIONS = 3 Set the number of section curves used to display thesurface(s).

� REF. PLANE Define a reference plane to help the program fit a surface tothe contour.

� REF.ENTITIES Pick reference curve(s) and point(s) which the resultingsurface will pass through.

� TOL = 0.100 Maximum distance permitted between the section or boundarycurves and the created surface.

BLEND Usage Envelope

SECTIONS

1. When using the SURFACE_TANGENT or SRF-NRM options, with reference surface(s)with large slope variations, the resulting blend surface may not meet the angulartolerance of 0.45 degrees. If this occurs, a warning message will be generated.

2. If the section boundary of a trimmed surface is picked, the optionSURFACE_TANGENT is automatically replaced by the SURF_NUM option.

CORNER

1. The orientation of the surrounding surfaces should be consistent. Cases such as thatshown in Figure 5-10 will not be treated.

2. The “corner” region should be mainly convex, that is, it should be possible to connectany two points by a straight line which lies within the region. For example, the“corner” region in Figure 5-10 is not convex.

3. The number of resulting surfaces is usually equal to the number of surface boundariessurrounding the “corner” region. When the number of surrounding boundaries is 3 or4, however, only one surface is created.

4. The set of surrounding surfaces may have a missing boundary (Figure 5-12), or oneof the boundaries may consist of a curve (Figure 5-).

5. A selected boundary cannot include breakpoints.

6. When a selected boundary belongs to a trimmed surface, it may need to be modified(use TRMSRF >> MODIFY BOUNDARY).


BLEND

7. When a corner region has complex geometry, you may get better results by splittingthe region into two and performing a blend operation for each area separately.

SOAP

1. The sections must intersect (within tolerance), and their endpoints must lie on the basecurve (within tolerance).

2. The sections must be 2D curves lying on orthogonal planes.

3. The base curve must have a common end point with one of the section curves.

4. The base curve must be smoothly closed.

5. The draft angle between the sections and the base curve will be preserved in theresulting surface. If the draft angles of the two sections are not the same, thesurface’s draft angle will be smoothly interpolated between the two values.

6. The resulting surface will have an exact singular point at the intersection of the sectioncurves.

7. The isoparametric curve U = 0 corresponds to the base curve.

REGION

1. The 3D contour must be roughly planar with respect to a reference plane, which iseither calculated automatically, or given by the user. The angle between the tangent tothe contour, at any point, and the reference plane, cannot be greater than 45 degrees.

2. The closed 3D contour can include partial implicit surface boundaries. During theinteraction, the program automatically finds the intersection and marks it with an X.See Figure 5-.

3. The contour’s projection on the reference plane cannot be self-intersecting.

4. The result of this function is a trimmed surface.

5. If the input contour is 2D, the result is a planar trimmed surface.

6. When using the SURFACE SLOPES option, if the resulting region surface does notadhere to an angular tolerance of of 0.5°, an arrow will appear indicating where thetolerance deviation occured and a corresponding message will be displayed.


BLEND

Figure 5-10: Inconsistent

Surface Orientation

Figure 5-11: Boundary

Consists of CurveFigure 5-12 : Open Boundary

COMSRF Create a single NURBS surface from a chain of surfaces whichhave common boundaries.

How To:

1. Pick the first surface to be used to form the new composite surface

2. Pick the remaining surfaces and confirm.

Interaction:

PICK 1ST SURFACE TOL. = 0.1 DISPL. U-CURVES = 3 DISP. V-CURVES = 3 DELETE ORIGINAL /

KEEP ORIGINAL

PICK 1ST SURFACE Pick the first surface to be used to form the new compositesurface. Use <SUBMENU> to multipick surfaces.

PICK 2ND SURFACE

PICK NTH SURFACE

Pick all surfaces and <EXIT>.


YES Accept the picked surfaces.

NO Redefine the last surface.

EXECUTING The composite surface is created.


COMSRF

PICK NTH SURFACE

COMPOSITE SURFACE

Figure 5-13: COMSRF

COMSRF Modal Parameter Definitions

This section explains each of the modal parameters used in the function.

� DELETE ORIGINAL The original surfaces will be deleted.

� DISP. U-CURVES = 3 Number of display curves in the U direction.

� DISP. V-CURVES = 3 Number of display curves in the V direction.

� KEEP ORIGINAL The original surfaces will be retained.

� TOL. = 0.1 Set the maximum approximation tolerance.

COMSRF Usage Envelope

1. To create a composite surface, the angle between normals of boundary end points of2 neighboring surfaces must be less than 10°.

2. The resulting composite surface is always created in the active level and has theactive line attributes.

3. A surface that contains a singular point may be selected. However, any surface that isadjacent to the singular point must also have a singular point at the same location.

4. A trimmed surface may be selected if it has 4 boundary curves and no islands. �


COMSRF

DRIVE Create a Drive/Parallel or NURBS surface by moving 2D/3Dsection(s) or 2D/3D drive curve(s)/contour(s) along a drivecurve(s)/contour(s) with a specified orientation.

Main Options:

SELECT OPTION: PARALLEL SEC

PIPE

SPINE

SPINE & PLANE

SPINE & EDGES

TWO SPINES

PARALLEL SEC Create a Drive/Parallel surface by moving a 2D/3D sectioncurve(s) or contour(s) along a 2D/3D drive contour so that itis always parallel to itself.

PIPE Create a Rational NURBS surface by moving along a spine(drive) curve and entering a start and end radius for thesurface.

SPINE Create a NURBS surface by moving a 2D/3D sectioncurve(s) along a spine curve or contour so that the orientationof the section curve(s) to the tangent of the 2D/3D spinecurve(s) at any point is constant.

SPINE & PLANE Create a NURBS surface by moving a 2D/3D sectioncurve(s) along a spine curve or contour under the followingconditions:

– The orientation of the section curve(s) to the tangent ofthe 2D/3D spine (drive) curve(s) at any point isconstant.

– The orientation of the section curve(s) to the definedplane is constant.

SPINE & EDGES Create a NURBS surface by moving a 2D section curvealong a 2D/3D spine (drive) curve under the followingconditions:

– The section curve will be driven from the first point onthe spine curve where the plane perpendicular to thespine intersects both edge curves, to the last such point.

– The section curve will be scaled and positioned so thatthe reference points of the section curve coincide withthe points where the plane perpendicular to the driveintersects the edge curves.The first reference point follows the first edge curvepicked, and the second reference point follows thesecond edge curve. (See Figure 5-22, page 5-35).

TWO SPINES Create a NURBS surface by moving one or more sections(2D/3D curve) along two or more spines or a spine andpoint.


DRIVE

All Options

How To:

1. Use modals to determine the number of curves, both in the direction of the spine(drive) curves or contour, and in the direction of the section curves or contour,that will be used to display the surface.

2. Pick a spine (drive) curve or contour and choose a direction. Pick a section curve(s)or contour.

SPINE + EDGES only: Pick section curve, reference points, spine (drive) curveand edge curves.

3. Create the surface(s).

Notes: • In this function, whenever the system asks for a curve, asurface/trimmed surface boundary may also be picked.

• The direction of the drive is indicated by an arrow on the drivecurve or contour and may be changed.

• The boundaries of the surface will be:

– the first section curve or contour indicated at theposition where it begins the drive operation,

– the last section curve or contour resulting from the driveoperation, and

– if the sections are not closed, the other boundaries willjoin the corresponding endpoints of the first and lastsections.

• Curves (splines) with break points are not applicable.


DRIVE

DRIVE >> PARALLEL SEC

Create a Drive/Parallel surface(s) by moving a 2D/3D section curve(s) or contour(s) so that it isalways parallel to itself and so that its path follows the exact path of the 2D/3D drive contour.

How To:

1. Select the required drive option.

2. Set the modals and define the drive contour or curve.

3. Define the section curve or contour.

Interaction:

Note: • If the contour/composite curve has break points, the surface will bedivided at these points.

SELECT DRIVE OPTION: CURVE CONTOUR TWO POINTS

Select the option to use when defining the drive contour.

PICK DRIVE CURVE DISP. DRIVES = 3 DISP. SECTIONS = 3

Set the modals and define the drive contour.

If CURVE was selected:

PICK DRIVE CURVE Pick the drive curve of the drive contour.

If CONTOUR was selected:

DEFINE DRIVE

CONTOUR

Pick the first curve of the drive contour.

INDICATE DIRECTION Continue to define the contour as described in DefiningContours in Chapter 3, of the Fundamentals & GeneralFunctions Manual.

If TWO POINTS was selected:

INDICATE 1ST POINT

INDICATE 2ND POINT

Indicate two points to define a line as the drive contour.


DRIVE

PICK DRIVE CURVE ( CONTOUR )

INDICATE DIRECTION

PICK SECTION/EXIT

Figure 5-14: DRIVE >> PARALLEL SEC

SELECT SECT OPTION: CURVES CONTOUR

Select CURVE or CONTOUR to define the section contour,set modals and respond to the prompts.

PICK SECTIONS/EXIT DISP. DRIVES = 3 DISP. SECTIONS = 3

PICK SECTIONS/EXIT Pick section curves to be moved following the path of thedrive contour.

A surface will be created for each section curve picked.

or

DEFINE SECT. CONTOUR Pick the first curve of the section contour

INDICATE DIRECTION Continue to define the contour as described in DefiningContours Chapter 3, of the Fundamentals & GeneralFunctions Manual.

EXECUTING A Drive (parallel) surface or surfaces is created.


DRIVE

DRIVE >> PIPE

Create a Rational NURBS surface by moving along a spine (drive) curve and enteringa start and end radius for the surface.

How To:

1. Pick the curve around which the surface will be created.

2. Set the start and end radii.

3. Indicate the direction in which the surface will be created.

Interaction:

Note: • The spine curve must be smooth and not broken.

PICK SPINE CURVE TOL=0.100 START RADIUS=20.000 END RADIUS=20.00 DISP.CROSS-SEC.=2

DISP.SECTIONS=2

PICK SPINE CURVE <PICK> the curve around which the surface will be created.

INDICATE DIRECTION Indicate the direction in which the surface will be created. Ifthe START RADIUS ≠ END RADIUS, the directionindicated determines from which end the start radius willbegin.



DRIVE

PICK SPINE CURVE

IND. DIRECTION

START RADIUS = 2.000END RADIUS = 4.000

START RADIUS = 3.000END RADIUS = 3.000

Figure 5-15: DRIVE >> PIPE

DRIVE >> SPINE

Create a NURBS surface by moving a 2D/3D section curve(s) along a spine curve orcontour so that the orientation of the section curve(s) to the tangent to the 2D/3Dspine curve(s) at any point is constant.

How To:

1. Select the required number of sections.

Interaction:

SELECT OPTION: ONE SECTION TWO SECTIONS MULTI SECTIONS

Note: • The spine curve(s) and section curve(s) must be smooth.

SPINE >> ONE SECTION

All section curves will have the same shape.

How To:

1. Pick a spine curve to determine the orientation of the section curve as it is driven.


3. Pick a curve which will be driven along the section spine and confirm the selection.

Interaction:

PICK SPINE CURVE TOL = 0.100 DISP.CROSS-SEC. = 2 DISP.SECTIONS. = 2

PICK SPINE CURVE Pick a curve which will control the orientation of the sectioncurve as it is driven.


DRIVE

PICK SECTION CURVE

PICK SPINE CURVE

IND. DIRECTION

Figure 5-16: DRIVE >> SPINE >> ONE SECTION

INDICATE DIRECTION Indicate the direction in which the surface will be created.

PICK SECTION CURVE Pick a curve which will be driven along the spine.

SECTION O.K. ? YES NO

YES The surface is created.

NO Select another section.

EXECUTING

SPINE >> TWO SECTIONS

The shape of the first section curve will blend into the shape of the second sectioncurve. This is done using linear interpolation.

The orientation between the tangent to the spine curve and the section curve at anypoint on the spine curve will be determined by a weighted average between:

• The orientation of the normal to the spine curve at the starting end to the first

section curve.

• The orientation of the normal to the spine curve at its other end to the second

section curve.

Notes: • A surface will be created for each two section curves picked.

• Pick the curves at ends which will be joined by boundarycross-section curves.


DRIVE

PICK 2ND SECTION

IND. DIRECTION

PICK SPINE CURVE

PICK 1ST SECTION

Figure 5-17: DRIVE >> SPINE >> TWO SECTIONS

How To:



3. Pick the first section of the starting curve and the second section of the ending curveand confirm.

Interaction:

PICK SPINE CURVE TOL = 0.100 DISP.CROSS-SEC. = 2 DISP.SECTIONS = 2



PICK 1ST SECTION

PICK 2ND SECTION

Pick the first starting section curve.Pick the first ending section curve.

SECTIONS O.K. ? YES NO

YES The surface is created.

NO Reselect the second section.

EXECUTING


DRIVE

SPINE >> MULTI SECTIONS

Build a drive surface along selected spine contour by interpolating several sectioncurves.

How To:


2. Pick additional spine curves and Exit.

3. Pick section curves and confirm.

Interaction:

IND. 1ST SPINE CURVE TOL = 0.100 DISP.CROSS-SEC. = 2 DISP.SECTIONS. = 2

IND. 1ST CURVE IN SPINE Pick a curve which will control the orientation of thesection curve as it is driven.

IND. 2ND CURVE IN SPINE Pick a second curve.

IND. NTH CRV/EXIT Pick at least three curves, <EXIT> when finished.

IND. 1ST SECTION Pick the first section curve.

IND. NTH SECTION Pick additional section curves. The number of sectioncurves must be one greater than the number of spinecurves.

SECTIONS O.K.? YES NO YES The surface is created.

NO Reselect the last section.

EXECUTING


DRIVE

IND. NTH CURVES IN SPINE

IND. LAST SECTION

IND. 1ST CRV IN SPINE

IND. 1ST SECTION

IND. SECTIONS

Figure 5-18: DRIVE >> SPINE >> MULTI SECTIONS

DRIVE >> SPINE & PLANE

Create a NURBS surface by moving a 2D/3D section curve(s) along a spine curve orcontour under the following conditions:

• The orientation of the section curve(s) to the tangent to the 2D/3D spine curve

at any point is constant.

• The orientation of the section curve(s) to the defined plane is constant.

Note: • The spine curve and section curves must be smooth and not broken.

SELECT OPTION: ONE SECTION TWO SECTIONS MULTI SECTIONS


DRIVE

IND. DIRECTION

PICK SPINE CURVE

PICK SECTION

DEFINE PLN: CURVE

Figure 5-19: DRIVE >> SPINE & PLANE

SPINE & PLANE >> ONE SECTION

How To:

1. Define the plane which will determine the section orientation.

2. Pick a curve to determine the orientation of the section curve as it is driven.


4. Pick a curve which will be driven along the section spline and confirm.

Interaction:





PICK SECTION Pick a curve which will be driven along the spline.

SECTION O.K. ? YES NO YES The surface is created.

NO Select another section.

EXECUTING


DRIVE

DEFINE PLN.: ACTIVE

PICK SECTION

PICK SPINE SECTION

IND. DIRECTION

Figure 5-20: DRIVE >> SPINE & PLANE >> ONE SECTION

SPINE & PLANE >> TWO SECTIONS

How To:

1. Define a plane.



4. Pick the first curves of the starting and ending sections and confirm.

Interaction:

DEFINE PLANE Define plane as described above for SPINE & PLANE >>ONE SECTION.




PICK 1ST SECTION

PICK 2ND SECTION

Pick the first starting section curve.Pick the first ending section curve.

SECTIONS O.K. ? YES NO YES The surface is created.

NO Reselect the second section.

EXECUTING


DRIVE

PICK 2ND SECTION

IND. DIRECTION

PICK SPINE CURVE

PICK 1ST SECTION

Figure 5-21: DRIVE >> SPINE & PLANE >> TWO SECTIONS

SPINE & PLANE >> MULTI SECTIONS

How To:

1. Define a plane.

2. Pick a curve to determine the orientation of the spine section curve as it is driven.

3. Pick additional curves.

4. Pick the required section curves and confirm.

Interaction:


IND. 1ST SPINE CURVE TOL = 0.100 DISP.CROSS-SEC. = 2 DISP.SECTIONS. = 2

IND. 1ST CURVE IN SPINE Pick a curve which will control the orientation of thesection curve as it is driven.

IND. 2ND CURVE IN SPINE Pick a second curve.

IND. NTH CRV/EXIT Pick at least three curves, <EXIT> when finished.

PICK 1ST SECTION

PICK NTH SECTION

Pick the first section curve.

Pick additional section curves. The number of sectioncurves must be one greater than the number of spinecurves.

SECTIONS O.K.? YES NO YES The surface is created.

NO Reselect the last section.

EXECUTING


DRIVE

DRIVE >> SPINE & EDGES

Create a NURBS surface by moving a 2D section curve along a 2D/3D spine curve under thefollowing conditions:

• The section curve will be driven from the first point on the spine curve where

the plane perpendicular to the spine intersects both edge curves, to the last such

point.

• The section curve will be scaled and positioned so that the reference points of

the section curve coincide with the points where the planes perpendicular to the

spine intersect the edge curves.

The first reference point follows the first edge curve picked, and the second

reference point follows the second edge curve. (See Figure 5-22, page 5-35.)

The resulting surface is a NURBS surface which approximates the required surface within the giventolerance.

Notes: • At least one plane perpendicular to a tangent to the spine mustintersect both edge curves.

• The spine curve edges and section curves must be smooth and notbroken.

SELECT OPTION ONE SECTION TWO SECTIONS


DRIVE

SPINE & EDGES >> ONE SECTION

All section curves will have the same shape.

How To:


2. Pick two edge curves along which the reference points will move.

3. Pick a 2D curve which will be driven along a spine.

4. Indicate two reference points on the section and confirm.

5. Pick section curves.

Interaction:

PICK SPINE CURVE TOL = 0.100 VARIABLE HEIGHT / DISP.CROSS SEC=2 DISP. SECTIONS = 2

CONSTANT HEIGHT


PICK 1ST EDGE CURVE

PICK 2ND EDGE CURVE

Pick two edge curves along which the reference points willmove.

PICK 2D SECTION CURVE Pick a 2D curve which will be driven along a spine.

IND. 1ST REF.POINT

IND. 2ND REF.POINT

Indicate two points on the section which will control thescale of the section curve.

Note: • If the start and end points of the section curve are placed on thestart points of two edge curves, reference points are not necessaryand the surface is immediately created.

SECTION O.K.? YES NO YES Accept the orientation of the section curve. The surfacewill be created.

NO Change the orientation of the section curve.

EXECUTING


DRIVE

PICK SPINE CURVE

PICK 2ND EDGE CURVE

IND. 2ND REF. POINT

PICK 2D SECTION CRV.

IND. 1ST REF. POINT

PICK 1ST EDGE CURVE

Figure 5-22: DRIVE >> SPINE & EDGES >> ONE SECTION

SPINE & EDGES >> TWO SECTIONS

The shape of the first section curve will blend into the shape of the second section curve. This isdone using linear interpolation.

How To:



3. Pick two edge curves along which the reference points will move.

4. Pick the first 2D section.

5. Indicate two points on the section which will control the scale of the section curve.

6. Create the second section as in Steps 4 and 5 then confirm.

Interaction:


CONSTANT HEIGHT



PICK 1ST EDGE CURVE

PICK 2ND EDGE CURVE

Pick two edge curves along which the reference points willmove.

PICK 1ST 2D SECTION Pick the first 2D section.

IND. 1ST REF.POINT

IND. 2ND REF.POINT

Indicate two points on the section which will control the scaleof the section curve.

Note: • If the start and end points of the section curve are placed on thestart points of two edge curves, reference points are not necessaryand the second section may be picked.


DRIVE

PICK 2ND 2D SECTION

PICK SPINE CURVE

IND. DIRECTION

PICK 2ND EDGE CURVE

PICK 1ST 2D SECTION

PICK 1ST EDGE CURVE

Figure 5-23: DRIVE >> SPINE & EDGES >> TWO SECTIONS

SECTION O.K.? YES NO Choose the orientation of the section curve.

PICK 2ND 2D SECTION Pick the second 2D section.

IND. 1ST REF.POINT

IND. 2ND REF.POINT

Indicate two points which will control the scale of the sectioncurve.

Note: • If the start and end points of the section curve are placed on the endpoints of the edge curves, reference points are not necessary and thesurface is immediately created.

SECTION O.K.? YES NO YES Accept the orientation of the section curve. The surfacewill be created.

NO Change the orientation of the section curve.

EXECUTING


DRIVE

DRIVE >> TWO SPINES

Create a NURBS surface by moving a one/two section (2D/3D curve) along 2 spines or a spineand point.

Note: • The spine curves and section curves must be smooth and not broken.

SELECT OPTION: ONE SECTION TWO SECTIONS

TWO SPINES >> ONE SECTION

SELECT OPTION: SPINE & POINT TWO SPINES

TWO SPINES >> ONE SECTION >> SPINE & POINT

Create a surface by moving one section along a spine and point.

How To:

1. Pick a curve to control the orientation of the section curve as it is driven.


3. Pick a point on the spine.

4. Pick a curve which will be driven along a spine and confirm.

Interaction:

PICK SPINE CURVE TOL = 0.100 CONSTANT HEIGHT DISP.CROSS SEC=2 DISP. SECTIONS = 2




DRIVE

IND. DIRECTION

PICK SPINE CURVE

PICK SPINE POINT( END )

PICK SECTION CURVE

Figure 5-24: DRIVE >> TWO SPINES >> ONE SECTION >> SPINE & POINT

PICK SPINE POINT Pick a point on the spine.

PICK SECTION CURVE Pick a curve which will be driven along a spine.

CURVES O.K.? YES NO YES Confirm the selection. The surface is created.

NO Pick a different section curve.

EXECUTING

TWO SPINES >> ONE SECTION >> TWO SPINES

How To:

1. Pick a curve and indicate the direction in which the surface will be created.

2. Pick a second curve and indicate the direction in which the surface will be created.

3. Pick a spine point.

4. Pick a curve which will be driven along a spine and confirm.

Interaction:

PICK 1ST SPINE CURVE TOL = 0.100 VARIABLE HEIGHT / DISP.CROSS SEC=2 DISP. SECTIONS = 2

CONSTANT HEIGHT

PICK 1ST SPINE CURVE Pick a curve.


PICK 2ND SPINE CURVE Pick a second curve.


PICK SECTION CURVE Pick a curve which will be driven along a spine.

CURVES O.K.? YES NO YES Confirm the selection. The surface will be created.

NO Pick a different section curve.

EXECUTING


DRIVE

TWO SPINES >> TWO SECTIONS

SELECT OPTION: SPINE & POINT TWO SPINES

TWO SPINES >> TWO SECTIONS >> SPINE & POINT

How To:

1. Pick a curve to control the orientation of the section curve as it is driven.


3. Pick the required sections and confirm.

Interaction:


CONSTANT HEIGHT



PICK SPINE POINT Pick a point on the spine.

PICK 1ST SECTION Pick the first section.

PICK 2ND SECTION Pick the second section.


NO Repick the second section curve.

EXECUTING


DRIVE

TWO SPINES >> TWO SECTIONS >> TWO SPINES

How To:

1. Pick a curve and indicate the direction in which the surface will be created.

2. Pick a second curve and indicate the direction in which the surface will be created.

3. Pick the required sections and confirm.

Interaction:

PICK 1ST SPINE CURVE TOL = 0.100 VARIABLE HEIGHT / DISP.CROSS SEC=2 DISP. SECTIONS = 2

CONSTANT HEIGHT

PICK 1ST SPINE CURVE Pick a curve.


PICK 2ND SPINE CURVE Pick a second curve.


PICK 1ST SECTION Pick the first section.

PICK 2ND SECTION Pick the second section.


NO Repick the second section curve.

EXECUTING


DRIVE

PICK 1ST SECTIONIND. DIRECTION

PICK 2ND SECTION

PICK 1ST SPINE CURVE

PICK 2ND SPINE CURVE

CONSTANT HEIGHT VARIABLE HEIGHT

Figure 5-25: DRIVE >> TWO SPINES >> TWO SECTIONS >>TWO SPINES

DRIVE Modal Parameter Definitions


� CONSTANT HEIGHT The sections are scaled along vector X (Vx) only.

� DISP.CROSS SEC = 2 Number of cross sections.

� DISP. DRIVES = 2 Number of curves per patch parallel to the drive contour fordisplay purposes.

� DISP. SECTIONS = 2 Number of curves per patch parallel to the section contour fordisplay purposes

� END RADIUS = 20.000 Enter the ending radius for a surface created using the PIPEoption.

� START RADIUS = 20.000 Enter the starting radius for a surface created using the PIPEoption.

� TOL = 0.100 Enter the maximum tolerance allowed.

� VARIABLE HEIGHT The sections are scaled along all the axes (Vx, Vy, Vz).

DRIVE Usage Envelope

GENERAL

1. Avoid curvature traps such as selecting a section curve whose radius of curvature isgreater than that of the spine curve.

SPINE >> MULTI SECTIONSSPINE & PLANE >> MULTI SECTIONS

1. The spine contour must have at least 3 curves.

2. The spine contour must be smooth, and smoothly connected, with no gaps.

The sections must be smooth curves.

3. The section curves may be open or closed.

4. The section curves may be 2D or 3D.

5. A point may be used as a section curve only at the beginning or end of the spinecontour.

6. The maximum number of sections is 32.

7. Implicit surface boundaries may be used as spine curves or sections.

TWO SPINES

1. The start/end of the section curve must be located at the start/end of the spine.

2. Tangency conditions along the spines will be retained in only two cases:

When both sections are on planes that are perpendicular to the plane ofboth spines.

When spines are on parallel planes and both sections are on planesthat are perpendicular to the spines’ planes.

On surface edges coinciding with the section, slopes are not always kept.

The variable height is not implemented in such cases. �


DRIVE

EDIT_SET Modify geometry sets. Available geometry sets are planarfaces and composite curves.

This function is used in the NC application. See Chapter 3 of the NC Manual.


EDIT_SET

FILLET Define a fillet surface(s) between two or three surfaces with afixed or variable radius, define fillet surfaces between multiplesurfaces with a fixed radius, define a fillet surface between acurve and a surface with a fixed or variable radius, or betweentwo surfaces, such that the sections are perpendicular to a spinecurve, with a fixed or variable radius.

A curve of center points is calculated where the offsets of the picked surfaces intersect. The filletradius determines the offset values.

The arcs of the fillet surface will be on planes which are perpendicular to the curve of center pointsand to the picked surfaces. Each plane is defined by the endpoints of a fillet arc and a point on thecurve of center points.

All fillet surfaces are rational NURBS surfaces, with the exception of the corner surfaces createdwhen filleting between three surfaces in the options 3 SURFACES (Trimmed Surface ofRevolution) and 3 DIF. RADII (non-rational NURBS).

Main Options:

SELECT 2 SURFACES

3 SURFACES

3 DIF. RADII

BASE-MULTI

MULTI-MULTI

CURVE SURFACE

SPINE + 2 SRF

SPINE + 3 SRF

2 SURFACES Define a fillet surface between two surfaces with a fixed orvariable radius. The variable radius can have an arc or conicsection.

3 SURFACES Define fillet surfaces between three surfaces with a fixedradius.

3 DIF. RADII Define fillet surfaces between three surfaces with variableradii.

BASE-MULTI Define fillet surfaces between multiple surfaces with a fixedradius.

MULTI-MULTI Define a fillet surface between 2 groups of multiple surfaceswith a fixed radius.

CURVE SURFACE Define a fillet surface between a surface and a curve with afixed or variable radius.

SPINE + 2 SRF Define a fillet surface with sections perpendicular to a spinecurve, between two surfaces. The fillet radius may be fixed orvariable.

SPINE + 3 SRF Create a fillet surface between two side surfaces and a basesurface, while keeping the fillet arcs normal to a specifiedcontour.


FILLET

How To:

1. Enter the number of display curves and arcs to be used, the radius or radii ofthe fillet surface and tolerance.

2. Pick the surfaces between which a fillet surface will be created.

3. For each surface, confirm the side on which the fillet is to be created.

FILLET >> 2 SURFACES

Define a fillet surface between two surfaces with a fixed or variable radius.

How To:

Interaction:

SELECT FIXED RADIUS

VARIABLE RADIUS


FILLET

2 SURFACES >> FIXED RADIUS

Define a fillet surface between two given surfaces, by specifying the radius of the arcs of thefillet surface.

How To:

1. Pick the first surface at a position close to the expected location of the fillet.

2. Indicate on which side of the surface the fillet will be created.

3. Pick the second surface close to the expected location of the fillet.



FILLET

PICK 1ST SURFACE

IND. DIRECTION

IND. DIRECTION

PICK 2ND SURFACE

TRIMOFF

TRIMON

EXTEND OFF EXTEND ON

Figure 5-26: FILLET >> 2 SURFACES >> FIXED RADIUS

Interaction:

PICK 1ST SURFACE RADIUS = 10.000 TRIM OFF / CENTER CURVE OFF / TOL. = 0.100 DISP. CURVES = 3

DISP. ARCS = 3 EXTEND OFF /

EXTEND ON

TRIM OFF CENTER CURVE OFF

TRIM FIRST CENTER CURVE ON

TRIM SEC CENTER CURVE ONLY

TRIM BOTH

PICK 1ST SURFACE Pick the first surface at a position which is close to theexpected location of the fillet.

INDICATE DIRECTION Indicate on which side of the surface the fillet will becreated.

PICK 2ND SURFACE Pick the second surface close to the expected location of thefillet.


EXECUTING The fillet surface will be created.


FILLET

2 SURFACES >> VARIABLE RADIUS

Define a fillet surface between two given surfaces, by specifying the start and endradius of the fillet surface and optional limit planes. An arc or conic section shapemay be defined.

How To:

1. Set the modals and pick the first surface at a position close to the expected locationof the fillet.




5. If required, define the plane limit and confirm.

6. Flip fillet if required.


FILLET

PICK 1ST SURFACE IND. DIRECTION

IND. DIRECTION

PICK 2ND SURFACE

TRIMOFF

TRIMON

NO LIMIT PLANES WITH LIMIT PLANES

DEFINE LIMITPLANES BY :3 POINTS

DEFINE LIMITPLANES BY :3 POINTS

Figure 5-27: FILLET >> 2 SURFACE >> VARIABLE RADIUS

Interaction:

PICK 1ST SURFACESTART RADIUS = 10.000 END RADIUS = 10.000

ARC /

CONIC P = 0.3

LIMIT PLANES OFF / TRIM OFF CENTER CURVE OFF

LIMIT PLANES ON DISP. CURVES = 3 DISP. ARCS = 3

TOL. = 0.100




TRIM BOTH

PICK 1ST SURFACE Set the modals and pick the first surface at a position whichis close to the expected location of the fillet.




DEFINE PLANES If LIMIT PLANES ON is selected:

Define planes which limit the length of the fillet surface tobe created.

See Defining a Plane in Chapter 3, of the Fundamentals &General Functions Manual, for a detailed explanation of theoptions to define the limit plane.

IND.LIMIT POINT Indicate the side of the plane where the fillet should remain.

Define a second LIMIT PLANE and LIMIT POINT.

<CR> TO CONTINUE

EXECUTING The fillet surface will be displayed.

FLIP FILLET ? YES NO YES Reverse the direction of the fillet.

NO Accept the fillet surface.


FILLET

FILLET >> 3 SURFACES

Define a fillet surface between three surfaces with a fixed radius. The corner surfaceis a trimmed Surface of Revolution.

How To:



3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to create the second and third surfaces and confirm.

Interaction:

PICK 1ST SURFACE RADIUS = 10.000 TRIM OFF / CENTER CURVE OFF TOL. = 0.100

DISP. CURVES = 3 TRIM ON

DISP. ARCS = 3

CENTER CURVE OFF

CENTER CURVE ON

CENTER CURVE ONLY



PICK 2ND SURFACE

INDICATE DIRECTION

PICK 3RD SURFACE

INDICATE DIRECTION

Repeat for the second and third surfaces.

SURFACES O.K.?YES NO YES Confirm the picked surfaces. The fillet surfaces will becreated.

NO Select new surfaces.

EXECUTING


FILLET

PICK 3RD SURFACE

PICK 1ST SURFACE

IND. DIRECTION

PICK 2ND SURFACE

Figure 5-28: FILLET >> 2 SURFACE >> 3 SURFACES

FILLET >> 3 DIF. RADII

Define fillet surfaces between three surfaces with variable radii. The resulting corner surface isa non-rational NURBS surface.

How To:



3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to create the second and third surfaces and confirm.

Interaction:

PICK 1ST SURFACE RADIUS 1->2 = 30.000 RADIUS 2->3 = 20.000 RADIUS 3->1 = 10.000 TRIM OFF /

CENTER CURVE OFF TOL. = 0.100 DISP. CURVES = 3 TRIM ON

DISP. ARCS = 3

CENTER CURVE OFF

CENTER CURVE ON

CENTER CURVE ONLY


FILLET

PICK 3RD SURFACE

PICK 2ND SURFACE

IND. DIRECTION

PICK 1ST SURFACE

RADIUS 1 -> 2 = 5.000RADIUS 2 -> 3 = 8.000RADIUS 3 -> 1 = 2.000

Figure 5-29: FILLET >> 2 SURFACE >> 3 DIF. RADII


INDICATE DIRECTION Indicate the side of the surface for the fillet to be created.

PICK 2ND SURFACE

INDICATE DIRECTION

PICK 3RD SURFACE

INDICATE DIRECTION

Repeat for the second and third surfaces.


YES Confirm the picked surfaces. The fillet surfaces will becreated.


EXECUTING


FILLET

FILLET >> BASE-MULTI

Define a fillet surface(s) with a fixed radius between a base surface and a chain ofsurfaces.

How To:

1. Pick the base surface at a position close to the expected location of the fillet.

2. Indicate the side of the base surface for the fillet to be created.

3. Pick the first surface at a position which is close to the expected location of the fillet.

4. Indicate the side on which to create the fillet.

5. Pick additional surfaces and confirm.

Interaction:

PICK BASE SURFACE RADIUS = 10.000 TRIM OFF / CENTER CURVE OFF TOL. = 0.100

DISP. CURVES = 3 TRIM ON

DISP. ARCS = 3

CENTER CURVE OFF

CENTER CURVE ON

CENTER CURVE ONLY


FILLET

PICK OTHER SURF/EXIT

PICK 1ST SURFACE

IND. DIRECTION

PICK BASE SURFACE

Figure 5-30: FILLET >> BASE-MULTI

Notes: • Each surface should only be picked once and should not have morethan two adjacent surfaces.

• Each pair of surfaces must have at least one common edge.

• Multiple surfaces should not cross-intersect. In some cases, the resultmay be unacceptable to the system.

PICK BASE SURFACE Pick the base surface at a position which is close to theexpected location of the fillet.

INDICATE DIRECTION Indicate the side of the base surface for the fillet to becreated.


INDICATE DIRECTION Indicate the side on which to create the fillet.

PICK OTHER SURF. & EX Pick other surfaces. Press <EXIT> when finished.


YES Confirm the picked surfaces. The fillet surface(s) will becreated.


FILLET SURFACE <NUMBER>


FILLET

FILLET >> MULTI-MULTI

Create fillet surfaces between a set of base surfaces and a set of wall surfaces.

How To:

1. Set the modal parameters and pick the wall surfaces.

2. For each wall surface, indicate the direction in which the fillet will be created.

3. Pick the base surfaces.

4. For each base surface, indicate the direction in which the fillet will be created.

Interaction:

PICK ENTITIES & EXIT RADIUS = 1.000 TRIM OFF CENTER CURVE OFF TOL = 0.1 DISP.CURVES = 2

DISP ARCS = 2


TRIM 1ST CENTER CURVE ON

TRIM 2ND CENTER CURVE ONLY

TRIM BOTH

PICK ENTITIES & EXIT Set the modal parameters and pick the wall surfaces.

Use <SUBMENU> to multipick the entities. Press <EXIT>when finished.

INDICATE DIRECTION For each wall surface, indicate the direction in which thefillet will be created.

PICK ENTITIES & EXIT Pick the base surfaces.

Use <SUBMENU> to multipick the entities. Press <EXIT>when finished.

INDICATE DIRECTION For each base surface, indicate the direction in which thefillet will be created.

CALC. FILLET ARCS The fillets are created.


FILLET

PICK 2ND GROUP

PICK 2ND GROUP

IND. DIRECTIONIND. DIRECTION

PICK 1ST GROUP

RESULT

Figure 5-31: FILLET >> MULTI-MULTI

FILLET >> CURVE SURFACE

Define a fillet surface between a surface and a curve with a fixed or variable radius.

How To:

Interaction:

SELECT OPTION FIXED RADIUS

VARIABLE RADIUS

FIXED RADIUS Define a fillet surface between a given surface and curve, byspecifying the radius of the arcs of the fillet surface.

VARIABLE RADIUS Define a fillet surface between a given surface and curve, byspecifying the start and end radius of the fillet surface.

CURVE SURFACE >> FIXED or VARIABLE RADIUS


FILLET

PICK SURFACE

PICK 1ST CRV/EXIT

INDICATE DIRECTION

INDICATE DIRECTION

TRIM OFF TRIM ON

Figure 5-32: FILLET >> CURVE SURFACE (Fixed Radius)

How To:



3. Pick the first curve of the open or closed contour.

4. If a variable radius is required, enter a radius value, then pick a location on thecontour.

Interaction:

PICK 1ST SURFACE RADIUS = 10.000 TRIM ON / CENTER CURVE OFF TOL. = 0.100 DISP. CURVES = 3

DISP. ARCS = 3 TRIM OFF /

CENTER CURVE OFF

CENTER CURVE ON

CENTER CURVE ONLY

Notes: • For CURVE SURFACE >> FIXED RADIUS, the RADIUSparameter is displayed.

• For CURVE SURFACE >> VARIABLE RADIUS, the STARTRAD and END RAD parameters are displayed




FILLET

PICK SURFACE

INDICATE DIRECTION

INDICATE DIRECTION

PICK 1ST CRV/EXIT

1.000

3.000

2.000LOCATE RADIUS

LOCATE RADIUS

Figure 5-33: FILLET >> CURVE SURFACE (Variable Radius)


PICK 1ST CURVE /EXIT Pick the first curve of the open or closed contour.

For VARIABLE RADIUS only:

LOCATE RADIUS RADIUS = 10.000

LOCATE RADIUS Enter a radius value, then pick a location on the contour. Theend and midpoints of each curve in the contour may beselected. As you move the cursor over the contour, specialsymbols appear at these locations.

Specify additional radius values and locations, then press<EXIT>.

EXECUTING The fillet surface will be created.


FILLET

FILLET >> SPINE + 2 SRFDefine a fillet surface with sections perpendicular to a spine curve, between twosurfaces. The fillet radius may be fixed or variable.

How To:





5. Define spline contour.

6. If a variable radius is required, enter a radius value then pick a location on thecontour.

Interaction:

PICK 1ST SURFACE RADIUS = 10.000 TRIM OFF CENTER CURVE OFF TOL. = 0.100

DISP. CURVES = 3 DISP. ARCS = 3




TRIM BOTH

Notes: • For SPINE >> VARIABLE RADIUS, the RADIUS parameter doesnot appear.







For VARIABLE RADIUS only:

LOCATE RADIUS RADIUS = 10.000

LOCATE RADIUS Enter a radius value, then pick a location on the contour. Theend and midpoints of each curve in the contour may beselected. As you move the cursor over the contour, specialsymbols appear at these locations.

Specify additional radius values and locations, then press<EXIT>.

EXECUTING.... The fillet surface will be created.


FILLET

FILLET >> SPINE + 3 SRF

Create a fillet surface between two side surfaces and a base surface, while keeping the filletsections normal to a specified contour. The fillet surface is tangent to all three surfaces.

How To:

1. Pick the base surface which the fillet will touch tangentially and indicate where the filletwill be created.

2. Pick the first side surface and indicate where the fillet will be created.

3. Pick the second side surface and indicate where the fillet will be created.

4. Pick the first spine curve of the open or closed contour.

Interaction:

PICK BASE SURFACE TOL. = 0.100 KEEP BASE SURF/DELETE BASE SURF TRIM OFF CENTER CURVE OFF

DISP. CURVES = 3 DISP. ARCS = 3




TRIM BOTH

PICK BASE SURFACE Pick the base (middle) surface which the fillet will touchtangentially.

INDICATE DIRECTION Indicate on which side of the base surface the fillet will becreated.

PICK 1ST SURFACE Pick the first side surface at a position which is close to theexpected location of the fillet.


PICK 2ND SURFACE Pick the second side surface close to the expected location ofthe fillet.




EXECUTING.... The fillet surface will be created.

Note: • If there are several possible locations on a particular planes for thefillet to be created, the point closest to the spine will be chosen.


FILLET

FILLET Modal Parameter Definitions


� CENTER CURVE OFF Do not create a center curve.

� CENTER CURVE ON Create a curve which passes through the centers of arcswhich define the fillet.

� CENTER CURVE ONLY Create only a center curve.

DELETE BASE

SURFACE

Delete the base surface when creating the fillet.

� DISP. ARCS = 3 Enter the number of display arcs.

� DISP. CURVES = 3 Enter the number of display curves.

� END RAD.=20.000 Enter the radius of the last arc of the fillet surface, createdusing variable radii, (i.e., on the second limit plane).

� EXTEND OFF Do not extend the fillet to the edges of the surfaces.

EXTEND ON Extend the fillet to the edges of the surfaces.

KEEP BASE SURFACE Keep the base surface when creating the fillet.

� LIMIT PLANES OFF Do not define limit planes for a variable radius fillet.

LIMIT PLANES ON Define limit planes for a variable radius fillet.

� P = 0.300 In FILLET >> 2 SURFACES/VARIABLE, enter the conicshape parameter. A value of 1.0 gives an arc section, smallervalues give a flatter shape.

� RADIUS = 10.000 Enter the radius of the arcs of the fillet surface. The radiuswill also be the surface offset distance.

In FILLET >> SPINE/VARIABLE RADIUS, enter the radiusof the fillet at the selected location.

� RADIUS 1->2 = 30.000 Enter the radius of the arc of the fillet surface between thefirst and second original surfaces. The radius will also be thesurface offset distance.

� RADIUS 2->3 = 20.000 Enter the radius of the arc of the fillet surface between thesecond and third original surfaces. The radius will also be thesurface offset distance.

� RADIUS 3->1 = 10.000 Enter the radius of the arc of the fillet surface between thethird and first original surfaces. The radius will also be thesurface offset distance.

� START RAD.=10.000 Enter the radius of the first arc of the fillet surface, createdusing variable radii, (i.e., on the first limit plane).

� TOL. = 0.100 Enter the maximum deviation from the surfaces that will betolerated.

� TRIM BOTH Trim both surfaces when creating the fillet.

� TRIM FIRST Trim the first surface when creating the fillet.

� TRIM OFF Do not trim the surfaces.


FILLET

� TRIM ON Trim the surfaces when creating the fillet.

� TRIM SECOND Trim the second surface when creating the fillet.

FILLET Usage Envelope

All Options

1. If one of the surfaces is not smooth, the fillet might not be complete or might notfollow the tolerance. The following message is displayed:

<number of surface> SURFACE IS NOT SMOOTH

2. The surfaces should be selected at positions close to the expected location of thefillet.

3. The offsets of the picked surfaces must intersect. If they do not, a fillet surface cannotbe created.

4. The curve formed by the center points of the arcs of the fillet must not be on theoffset surfaces’ edges.

5. If a trimmed surface is selected, islands are ignored.

6. Center curves are not created for extensions of fillets, for corner fillets when filletingbetween 3 surfaces, or for internal fillets creating using the option BASE-MULTI.

2 SURFACES >> VARIABLE RADIUS

1. If the limit planes are not perpendicular to the curve of center points, the boundariesof the fillet surface will not be on the limit planes.

SPINE

1. The surfaces and contour must be smooth.

2. The spine curve must lie between the selected surfaces. When the fillet is created,arcs are created along the spine. At least one of these arcs must intersect bothsurfaces, otherwise the fillet cannot be created.

3. This option may be used to create a variable radius fillet on a closed contour.

4. A closed spine contour must be smooth at its end. Modify the slopes if necessary.

5. The OPEN CONTOUR option cannot be used for closed contours.

SPINE & 3 SRF

1. The fillet consists of 2 tangent surfaces. Different numbers of patches can be createdon these 2 parts of the fillet depending on the side surfaces.

MULTI-MULTI

1. This option works only for smoothly connected geometry.

If there is a sharp corner between surfaces of the base or walls, create a small filletbetween them before using this function. �


FILLET

MESH Create a NURBS surface by defining its section andcross-section curves.

A mesh surface passes smoothly through a series of section curves. The section curves areconnected by a series of cross-section curves.

This function can be used to create a single mesh surface or multiple surfaces.

How To:

1. Set the number of curves that will be used for display purposes. Set thetolerance permitted between the section and cross-section curves at their intersectionpoints on the surface. Pick the section and cross-section curveswhich define the surface.

2. Set whether a single surface entity or multiple surfaces will be created.

PICK 1ST SECTION DISP.CROSS-SECT. = 2 DISP.SECTIONS. = 2 NO CHECK /

MATCH CURVES TOL = 0.100


PICK 2ND SECTION

. . .

PICK nTH SECTION

Pick remaining section curves in the order the surface willpass through them.Press <EXIT> when finished picking section curves.

PICK 1ST CROSS-SECT. Pick the first cross-section curve.

PICK 2ND CROSS-SECT.

. . .

PICK nTH CROSS-SECT.

When modals are correctly set, pick remaining cross-sectioncurves in the order the surface will pass through them.

Press <EXIT> when finished picking cross-section curves.


MESH

PICK 1ST SECTION

PICK 2ND SECTION


PICK 1ST CROSS-SECT.

Figure 5-34: MESH

SELECT SINGLE SURFACE MULTI-SURFACE

Select the appropriate option.

EXECUTING . . . The surface(s) will be created and displayed.

Notes: • When a MESH surface is being created, if a required intersectionpoint is not found by the system, the following is displayed at thebottom of the screen:

INTERSECTION BETWEEN 2 CURVES WAS NOT FOUNDWITHIN THIS TOLERANCE.

In addition, the curves between which the system was attempting tofind an intersection point will be highlighted. The following willappear on the prompt line:

– DISP.CRS-SEC = <last value entered>

– DISP.SEC = <last value entered>

– TOL = <last value entered>

– MIN.DIST =< a value, greater than TOL, which is thesmallest distance between two points on the curves>.


MESH

PICK 1ST SECTION

PICK 2ND SECTION

PICK 3RD SECTION



SINGLE SURFACE MULTI-SURFACE

Figure 5-35: MESH (Multi/Single Surface)

Solution 1.

Change the TOL(erance) so that it is larger than the minimum distance found between two curvesby the system and press <EXIT>.

DISTANCE O.K.? YES NO

YES The original modals will be displayed with the newvalue of TOL. Press <CR> to accept the settings. Thedistance will be accepted and processing will continue.

NO The modals that were just displayed will be displayedagain.

Solution 2.

Help the algorithm find the intersection point as follows:

IND.1ST MARKED CURVE Indicate a point on the first curve which is in attention, closeto where the intersection point should be.

IND.2ND MARKED CURVE Do the same for the second curve which is in attention.

If there is an intersection point within the TOL specified, close to the indicated points, processingwill continue. If not, make further adjustments or <EXIT>.


MESH

NO CHECK

MATCH CURVESTOL.=10.000

PICK 1ST SECTION

PICK 2ND SECTION



Figure 5-36: MESH (Multi-Curves)

MESH Modal Parameter Definitions


� DISP. CROSS-SECT = 2 Set the number of cross-section curves per patch used todisplay the surface.

� DISP. SECTIONS = 2 Set the number of section curves per patch used to displaythe surface.

� MATCH CURVES Section curves must approximately intersect cross-sectioncurves. The intersection may miss by the value of the modalTOL.. If the tolerance entered is less than the modal TOL, anerror message is displayed along with the minimum distancetolerance.

� NO CHECK No check for intersection points will be performed. Thesurface will pass between the section curves and thecross-section curves. If MATCH CURVES is selected, theTOL modal must also be set.

� SINGLE SURFACE The mesh surface will be created as one entity.

MULTI SURFACE Multiple surface entities will be created. The boundaries willconsist of the picked section curve and cross-section curveentities.

� TOL = 0.100 Maximum variation permitted between section andcross-section curves at expected intersection points.

MESH Usage Envelope

1. At least two section curves and two cross-section curves are required to define asurface.

2. The surface will pass through section curves in the order that they are picked.

3. A maximum of 1024 section curves can be selected.

4. Curves with break points are not applicable.

5. The MULTI SURFACE option is available only when more than two section orcross-section curves have been picked.

6. It is advisable to use the MULTI-SURFACE option when the curves defining thesurface have large variations, which would result in a complex surface. The surfaceentities created in this way will be more precise.

7. Each surface entity will be drawn using the number of display curves specified in themodals. �


MESH

MODIFY Modify curves and surfaces, check smoothness, transformplanar faces into trimmed surfaces, transform trimmed surfacesinto surfaces, close gaps between curves and surfaces.

Main Options:

SELECT FAIR

LOCAL FAIR

MODIFY POINTS

MODIFY SLOPES

CREATE POINTS

SURFACE EXTENSION

PLFACE TO TRMSRF

TRMSRF TO SURFACE

ADJOIN

FAIR Check the smoothness of curves or surfaces.

Reduce waviness of one or more curves and/or surfaces byapproximation to a smooth NURBS curve or surface, withinthe specified tolerance.

LOCAL FAIR Fair NURBS surfaces in a user-defined local area.

MODIFY POINTS Check or modify the control point coordinates of splines orsurfaces (NURBS, Bezier and Gregory). For NURBS splinesand surfaces, through points (points on the spline/surface)may also be modified.

MODIFY SLOPES Redefine the slopes of splines or surfaces.

CREATE POINTS Create point entities at the locations of the control points forsplines or surfaces (NURBS, Bezier and Gregory).

SURFACE EXTENSION Linearly extend a surface at its boundaries by creating newsurface(s).

PLFACE TO TRMSRF Transform a planar face into a trimmed surface, based on theboundaries of the planar face.

TRMSRF TO SURFACE Transform a trimmed surface(s) into a surface(s).

ADJOIN Close gaps between curves and surfaces, modify asurface/trimmed surface boundary to match a contour oranother surface boundary.


MODIFY

MODIFY >> FAIR

Check the smoothness of curves or surfaces; fair (reduce waviness, eliminate breakpoints) incurves/surfaces by approximation to NURBS using a least squares algorithm.

How To:

1. Pick the surface(s)/curve(s) to be faired or checked for smoothness.

2. Confirm the fairing of the selected entity.


Interaction:

PICK SURFACES/CURVES Pick the surface(s)/curve(s) to be faired or checked forsmoothness. Use <SUBMENU> to multipick theentities. Press <EXIT> when finished.

Note: • If the entity is not smooth, the following message appears:<entity> IS NOT SMOOTH !

FAIR <entity>? YES NO YES The selected entity.

NO Do not change the entity.

<CR> TO CONTINUE CURVE/EDGE TOL. = 0.1 SURFACE TOL. = 1.0 KEEP SLOPES / KEEP ORIGINAL / AS ORIGINAL /

FREE SLOPES / DELETE ORIGINAL AS ACTIVE

DEFINE SLOPES

<CR> TO CONTINUE Set modals and press <CR> to execute.

Note: • The modal DEFINE SLOPE is only available for single curves.


IND. 1ST END Pick the endpoint whose slope will be defined.

DIRECTION: PICK CURVE Pick a curve to define the slope.

The default DEFINE SLOPE sub-option used to define theslope is IND, unless 2PT was the last used sub-option for thisfunction in the current session. (See Define Slope andDirection in Chapter 3, of the Fundamentals & GeneralFunctions Manual).


MODIFY

PICK SURFACE

EDGE TOL. = 1.0SURFACE TOL. = 1.0

Figure 5-37: MODIFY >> FAIR



IND. 2ND END/EXIT Pick the second endpoint of the spline if you wish to defineits slope. Press <EXIT> if you do not want to change theslope.

EXECUTING...

CURVE O.K.?

or SURFACE O.K.?

YES Confirm the creation of a new faired curve or surface.

NO Do not create the new curve or surface.


MODIFY

MODIFY >> LOCAL FAIR

Fair NURBS surfaces in a user-defined local area using a least squares algorithm.This option can be used to smooth defects in surfaces, e.g., in surfaces received fromreverse engineering.

How To:

1. Pick a NURBS surface for fairing.

2. Indicate a point in the region to be faired.

3. Accept the default modification area, or indicate points to move the corners of thepolygon to new locations and <EXIT>


Interaction:

PICK SURFACE Pick a NURBS surface to be faired.

IND. POINT IN AREA Indicate a point in the region to be faired.

DEFINE AREA & EXIT A red polygon appears on the surface, indicating the defaultarea of modification.

Accept the default modification area, or indicate points tomove the corners of the polygon to new locations and<EXIT>.

<CR> TO CONTINUE TOL = 20.00 DISP.CROSS SEC=2 DISP. SECTIONS = 2

KEEP ORIGINAL / AS ORIGINAL /

DELETE ORIGINAL AS ACTIVE

<CR> TO CONTINUE Set modals and <CR>.

EXECUTING... The surface is faired.


MODIFY

PICK SURFACE

DEFINE AREA

IND. POINT IN AREA

Figure 5-38: MODIFY >> LOCAL FAIR

MODIFY >> MODIFY POINTS

Redefine or verify the control point coordinates for splines (NURBS and Bezier) or surfaces(NURBS, Bezier and Gregory).

PICK CURVE/SURFACE Pick the curve or the surface to be modified.

MODIFY POINTS (for Bezier splines)

IND. POINT TO CHANGE Indicate the point for coordinate modification.

ENTER NEW COORD./CR X = 100.000 Y = 50.000 Z = 20.000 CARTESIAN MODEL

CARTESIAN

CYLINDRICAL

SPHERICAL

ENTER NEW COORD./CR Enter the new coordinates of the point or press <CR> toassign the displayed coordinates.

If the coordinates of the point were not changed, thefollowing table appears:

IND. POSITION/EXIT FREE SLOPE /

KEEP SLOPE

IND. POSITION/EXIT Indicate the new position for the spline point or press<EXIT>.

If the coordinates of the point were changed, the followingprompt appears:

<CR> TO CONTINUE FREE SLOPE /

KEEP SLOPE

<CR> TO CONTINUE Set modals and press <CR> to continue.

IND. POINT TO CHANGE Indicate a new node of the spline or press <EXIT>.

UPDATE CURVE DATA? YES Accept the changes and update the spline data.

NO Do not change the spline data.


MODIFY

MODIFY POINTS (for NURBS splines)

SELECT THROUGH POINTS CONTROL POINTS

MODIFY POINTS >> THROUGH POINTS

How To:

1. Set the modal parameters and indicate the through point whose coordinates will bemodified (or verified).

2. Enter the new coordinates of the point and indicate a new location.

3. Indicate a new point on the spline then confirm the changes.

Interaction:

IND. POINT ON CURVE GLOBAL / KEEP CURVATURE /

LOCAL FREE CURVATURE

IND. POINT ON CURVE Set the modal and indicate the through point whosecoordinates will be modified (or verified).

DEFINE AREA & EXIT For LOCAL modification:

One or two green points will appear on the spline, indicatingthe default size of the local modification area. Accept theregion, or pick another location on the spline to move thegreen point(s), then <EXIT>.

ENTER NEW COORD./CR X = 100.000 Y = 50.000 Z = 20.000

CARTESIAN MODEL

CARTESIAN

CYLINDRICAL

SPHERICAL

ENTER NEW COORD./CR Enter the new coordinates of the point. Press <CR> to assignthe displayed coordinates, or to indicate a new location.


MODIFY

KEEP CURVATURE FREE CURVATURE COMPARISONBETWEEN THETWO RESULTS

A-A DETAIL A-A

FREE CURVATURE

KEEP CURVATURE

IND. POINT ON CURVE

DEFINE AREA

IND. POSITION

Figure 5-39: MODIFY POINTS >> THROUGH POINTS >> LOCAL

IND. POSITION & EXIT Indicate a new location, or press <EXIT> to accept thecurrent location.

For 2D NURBS splines, a submenu is available. To modifythe position dynamically, choose DYNAMIC. To use thepoint indication submenu, choose POINT. The default isDYNAMIC.

IND. POINT TO CHANGE Indicate a new point on the spline or press <EXIT>.

UPDATE CURVE DATA? YES Accept the changes and update the spline.

NO Do not modify the spline.


MODIFY

MODIFY POINTS >> CONTROL POINTS

How To:

1. Indicate the control point whose coordinates will be modified or verified.

2. Enter the new coordinates of the point..

3. If required, indicate a new position and/or weight.

4. Indicate another control point and confirm the changes.

Interaction:

IND. CONTROL POINT Indicate the control point whose coordinates will be modifiedor verified.

ENTER NEW COORD./CR X = 100.000 Y = 50.000 Z = 20.000

CARTESIAN MODEL

CARTESIAN

CYLINDRICAL

SPHERICAL

ENTER NEW COORD./CR Enter the new coordinates of the point. Press <CR> to assignthe displayed coordinate, or to indicate a new location.

IND. POSITION/EXIT WEIGHT = 1.000

Indicate a new position and/or weight, or press <EXIT> toaccept the current settings.

For 2D NURBS splines, a submenu is available. To modifythe position dynamically, choose DYNAMIC. To use the pointindication submenu, choose POINT.

IND. POINT TO CHANGE Indicate another control point, or press <EXIT>.

UPDATE CURVE DATA? YES Accept the changes and update the spline.

NO Do not modify the spline.


MODIFY

MODIFY POINTS (for Bezier and Gregory surfaces)

IND.CONTROL PT./EXIT Indicate a control point to be modified (verified).


CARTESIAN

CYLINDRICAL

SPHERICAL

ENTER NEW COORD./CR Change the coordinates of the given point or press <CR>without changing, to indicate the new position graphically.

IND. POSITION/EXIT If the coordinates of the point were not changed, indicate anew position for it graphically.

UPDATE SURFACE DATA? YES Accept the changes and update the surface data.

NO Do not update the surface data.

EXECUTING... The new surface will be displayed.

MODIFY POINTS (for NURBS surfaces)

SELECT THROUGH POINTS CONTROL POINTS


MODIFY

MODIFY POINTS >> THROUGH POINTS

How To:

1. Set the modal parameters and indicate the point on the surface whose coordinates willbe modified or verified.

Interaction:

IND. POINT GLOBAL / SHAPE PARAM = 0.500

LOCAL

IND. POINT Set the modals and indicate the point on the surface whosecoordinates will be modified or verified.

MODIFY POINTS >> THROUGH POINTS >> GLOBAL

SELECT OPTION IND. NEW POSITION ALONG DIRECTION ON PLANE

MODIFY POINTS >> THROUGH POINTS >> GLOBAL >> IND. NEW POSITION

ENTER NEW COORD./CR X = 100.000 Y = 50.000 Z = 20.000 CARTESIAN/ MODEL

CARTESIAN

CYLINDRICAL

SPHERICAL

IND. POSITION Indicate a new position graphically. The point indicationsubmenu is available.

EXECUTING... The modified surface will be displayed.




MODIFY

MODIFY POINTS >> THROUGH POINTS >> GLOBAL >> ALONG DIRECTION

How To:

1. Select a direction along which the through point will be moved.

2. Pick the through point and drag it along the direction axis.

Interaction:

DIRECTION: PICK CURVE Select a direction along which the through point will bemoved. The direction indication submenu is available.

IND. POSITION SHAPE PARAM = 0.500

IND. POSITION Pick the through point and drag it along the direction axis.The surface will be modified dynamically. The shapeparameter can be modified interactively at this stage. Whenthe desired shape is obtained, <EXIT>.


MODIFY POINTS >> THROUGH POINTS >> GLOBAL >> ON PLANE

How To:

1. Define a plane using the plane indication menu.

2. Pick the through point and drag it on the plane.

Interaction:

DEFINE PLANE: Define a plane using the plane indication menu. This planewill be projected onto the selected point on the surface.

EXECUTING... The surface is displayed dynamically in yellow.


IND. POSITION Pick the through point and drag it on the plane. The surfacewill be modified dynamically. The shape parameter can bemodified interactively at this stage. When the desired shapeis obtained, <EXIT>.



MODIFY

MODIFY POINTS >> THROUGH POINTS >> LOCAL

How To:

1. Accept the default modification area indicated by a red polygon, or indicate points tomove the corners of the polygon to new locations.

Interaction:



SELECT OPTION IND. NEW POSITION ALONG DIRECTION ALONG PLANE


MODIFY

PICK CURVES/SURFACE

IND. POINT

DEFINE AREA/EXIT

SHAPE PARAM. = 0.800 SHAPE PARAM. = 0.200

Figure 5-40: MODIFY POINTS >> THROUGH POINTS >> LOCAL >> ALONG DIRECTION

MODIFY POINTS >> THROUGH POINTS >> LOCAL >> IND. NEW POSITION

How To:

1. Indicate a new position graphically.and confirm the changes.

Interaction:


CARTESIAN

CYLINDRICAL

SPHERICAL

IND. POSITION Indicate a new position graphically. The point indicationsubmenu is available.




MODIFY POINTS >> THROUGH POINTS >> LOCAL >> ALONG DIRECTION

How To:

1. Select a direction along which the through point will be moved.

2. Pick the through point and drag it along the direction axis.

Interaction:

DIRECTION: PICK CURVE Select a direction along which the through point will bemoved. The direction indication submenu is available.


IND. POSITION Pick the through point and drag it along the direction axis.The surface will be modified dynamically. The shapeparameter can be modified interactively at this stage. Whenthe desired shape is obtained, <EXIT>.



MODIFY

MODIFY POINTS >> THROUGH POINTS >> LOCAL >> ON PLANE

How To:


2. Pick the through point and drag it on the plane.

Interaction:

DEFINE PLANE: Define a plane using the plane indication menu. This planewill be projected onto the selected point on the surface.



IND. POSITION Pick the through point and drag it on the plane. The surfacewill be modified dynamically. The shape parameter can bemodified interactively at this stage. When the desired shape isobtained, <EXIT>.



MODIFY

MODIFY POINTS >> CONTROL POINTS

IND. CONTROL PT./EXIT Indicate the control point whose coordinates will be modifiedor verified.

SELECT OPTION IND. NEW POSITION ALONG DIRECTION ALONG PLANE

MODIFY POINTS >> CONTROL POINTS >> IND. NEW POSITION

How To:

1. Change the coordinates of the given point.

2. Indicate a new position for the control point and confirm the changes.

Interaction:


CARTESIAN

CYLINDRICAL

SPHERICAL

ENTER NEW COORD./CR Change the coordinates of the given point and/or press <CR>to accept the current settings, or to indicate a new positiongraphically.

If the surface being modified has non-uniform weights, thefollowing prompt will appear:

IND. WEIGHT WEIGHT = 1.000

Accept the current weight, or enter a new weight, and <CR>.

If the coordinates of the control point were not modified, thefollowing prompt will appear:

IND. NEW POSITION Indicate a new position for the control point and <EXIT>.





MODIFY

MODIFY POINTS >> CONTROL POINTS >> ALONG DIRECTION

How To:

1. Select a direction along which the control point will be moved.

2. Pick the control point and drag it along the direction axis and confirm.

Interaction:

DIRECTION: PICK CURVE Select a direction along which the control point will bemoved. The direction indication submenu is available.

IND. POSITION Pick the control point and drag it along the direction axis.The surface will be modified dynamically. <EXIT> to acceptthe new position.


MODIFY POINTS >> CONTROL POINTS >> ON PLANE

How To:


2. Pick the control point and drag it on the plane.

Interaction:

DEFINE PLANE: Define a plane using the plane indication menu. (The planewill be projected normally onto the selected control point).


IND. POSITION Pick the control point and drag it on the plane. The surfacewill be modified dynamically. <EXIT> to accept the newposition.



MODIFY

MODIFY >> MODIFY SLOPES

Redefine the slopes of splines (NURBS and Bezier) or surfaces.

How To:

1. Pick the curve or the surface to be changed.

Interaction:

PICK CURVE/SURFACE Pick the curve or the surface to be changed.


MODIFY

IND. DIR

PICK EDGE

SLOPES PLANE

SLOPES ORIG.

IND. DIR.

PICK EDGE

PICK SURFACE

SLOPES SURF.

SLOPES LINEAR

PICK EDGE

DIRECTION 2ND POINT

SLOPES CONST

DIRECTION 1ST POINT

PICK EDGE

IND. DIR.

Figure 5-41: MODIFY >> MODIFY SLOPES

MODIFY SLOPES (for Bezier splines)

Modify the slope at a node by repositioning the indicated control point.

IND.CONTROL POINT Indicate the control point to be moved.

IND. NEW SLOPE FREE SLOPE SMOOTH / SLOPE SIZE = 70.35

BREAK POINT

FREE SLOPE

FIXED LENGTH

FIXED DIRECTION

IND. NEW SLOPE Set modals and indicate a new location for the control point,then press <EXIT>.

If FIXED DIRECTION was selected, the prompt and modalsare changed to:

<CR> TO CONTINUE FIXED DIRECTION SMOOTH SLOPE SIZE = ...

<CR> TO CONTINUE Enter the new slope size and press <CR>.

IND. CONTROL POINT Indicate a new control point to be moved or press <EXIT>.

UPDATE CURVE DATA? YES Accept the changes and update the curve data.

NO Do not update the curve data.


MODIFY

PICK CURVE/SURFACE

IND. NEW SLOPE

IND. CONTROL POINT

Figure 5-42: MODIFY >> MODIFY SLOPES (Bezier Splines)

MODIFY SLOPES (for NURBS splines)

An arrow appears at the starting point of the spline.

CHANGE SLOPE ? / EXIT

YES NO

YES Change the slope at this endpoint.

<CR> TO CONTINUE FREE SLOPE /

DEFINE SLOPE

NO Do not change the slope at this endpoint. The arrowmoves to the other endpoint.

Or press <EXIT> to pick another curve or surface.


DIRECTION: PICK CURVE Pick a curve to define the slope.

The default DEFINE SLOPE sub-option used to define theslope is IND, unless 2PT was the last used sub-option forthis function in the current session. (See Define Slope andDirection in Chapter 3, of the Fundamentals & GeneralFunctions Manual).



CHANGE SLOPE ? /

EXIT YES NO

YES Change the slope at this endpoint.

NO Do not change the slope at this endpoint.

CURVE O.K.? YES Accept the changes and update the spline.

NO Do not update the curve data.


MODIFY

MODIFY SLOPES (for Surfaces)

Modify the slope at a selected boundary of any type of surface or trimmed surface.Large modifications cannot be performed.

PICK SURFACE EDGE CONST. GLOBAL / KEEP SIDE SLOPES /

LOCAL FREE SIDE SLOPES

CONST.

LINEAR

SURFACE

PLANE

SURF-NRM

PICK EDGE Set modals to define the slope definition option, whether ornot slopes of the side boundaries will be maintained and thearea of modification (LOCAL or GLOBAL).

Pick a boundary of the surface to be modified.

If LOCAL was selected:

DEFINE AREA & EXIT A red polygon appears on the surface, indicating the size ofthe local area.

<EXIT> to accept this size, or pick points on the surface toindicate the corners of the polygon, then <EXIT>.


MODIFY

MODIFY SLOPES >> CONST.

Impose a constant direction on all the slopes at the surface boundary.

How To:

1. Pick a curve to define the constant direction for all the slopes.

2. Indicate the desired direction.

Interaction:

DIRECTION: PICK CURVE Pick a curve to define the constant direction for all theslopes.


EXECUTING... The slopes are modified.

MODIFY SLOPES >> LINEAR

Redefine the slopes at the two corners of the picked edge.

How To:

1. If required, redefine the first corner slope by picking the curve to define the direction.

2. Specify the curve direction.

3. If required, redefine the second corner slope by picking the curve to define thedirection.

Interaction:

The slopes of the surface boundary will be linearly incremented between the values at the twocorners.

CHANGE SLOPE?/EXIT YES Redefine the slope at this corner of the picked edge.Continue with the interaction below.

NO Do not redefine the slope at this corner.

If YES:

DIRECTION:

PICK CURVE

Pick the curve to define the slope direction at this corner.

INDICATE DIRECTION Specify the direction for the curve.

The other end of the picked edge is marked.

CHANGE SLOPE?/EXIT YES Redefine the slope at this end of the picked edge.

NO Do not redefine the slope at this end.


MODIFY

MODIFY SLOPES >> SURFACE

Define the slopes at the picked edge of a surface such that they are tangent to the slopes on the edgeof a reference surface. The reference surface must be adjacent to the selected surface.

How To:

1. Pick the reference surface and indicate the desired direction.

Interaction:

PICK SURFACE Pick the reference surface.


EXECUTING... The slopes of the first surface are modified.

MODIFY SLOPES >> SURF-NRM

Define the slopes at the picked edge of a surface such that all normals are collinear to the normalson the edge of a reference surface.

How To:

1. Pick the reference surface and indicate the desired direction.

Interaction:

PICK SURFACE Pick the reference surface.


EXECUTING... The slopes of the first surface are modified.

MODIFY SLOPES >> PLANE

Define the slopes at the picked edge of a surface such that all slopes are tangent to a plane.

How To:

1. Define a plane and indicate the desired direction.

Interaction:

DEFINE PLANE Define a plane. The plane definition menu appears.


EXECUTING... The slopes of the surface are modified.


MODIFY

MODIFY >> CREATE POINTS

Create points from the nodes and/or control points of splines (NURBS, Bezier and cubic) orsurfaces (NURBS, Bezier and Gregory).

How To:

1. Pick the spline or the surface.

Interaction:

PICK CURVE/SURFACE Pick the spline or the surface.


MODIFY

IND. POINT TO CREATE

PICK CURVE

CONTROL POINTS

THROUGH POINTS

INFLECTION POINTS

Figure 5-43: MODIFY >> CREATE POINTS

CREATE POINTS (for Cubic Splines)

2D/3D CUBIC SPLINE CREATE ONE POINT CREATE ALL POINTS

CREATE POINTS >> CREATE ONE POINT

Create a point entity from one of the control points of the cubic spline.

IND. POINT TO CREATE Indicate the control point that will be created as a pointentity.

IND. POINT TO CREATE Indicate another point. Press <EXIT> when finished.

CREATE POINTS >> CREATE ALL POINTS

All the points of the cubic spline will be created as point entities.

CREATE POINTS (for Bezier splines)

SELECT CREATE ONE POINT CREATE ALL NODES CREATE ALL POINTS CREATE INFL PNTS


Create a point entity from one of the control points or nodes of the Bezier spline.

IND. POINT TO CREATE Indicate the control point or the node that will be created as apoint entity.

IND. POINT TO CREATE Indicate another point to create. Press <EXIT> when finished.

CREATE POINTS >> CREATE ALL NODES

Only the nodes of the Bezier spline will be created as point entities.


All the nodes and the control points of the Bezier spline will be created as point entities.

CREATE POINTS >> CREATE INFL. PNTS

All inflection points of the Bezier spline will be created as point entities. The following messagewill be displayed:

NUMBER OF INFLECTION POINTS FOUND:..


MODIFY

CREATE POINTS (for NURBS splines)

<CR> TO CONTINUE CREATE ALL POINTS / THROUGH POINTS

CREATE ONE POINT

THROUGH POINTS

CONTROL POINTS

INFLECTION POINTS


Create a point entity from a through, control point or an inflection point of a NURBS spline.

IND. POINT TO CREATE Indicate the point that will be created as point entity.

IND. POINT TO CREATE Indicate another point to create. Press <EXIT> when finished.


All of the selected type of points will be created as point entities.

CREATE POINTS(for NURBS, Bezier or Gregory surfaces)

SELECT CREATE ONE POINT CREATE ALL NODES * CREATE ALL POINTS


Create a point entity from one of the control points or the nodes of the surface.

IND.POINT TO CREATE Indicate the control point or node of the surface that will becreated as point entity.

IND. POINT TO CREATE Indicate another point to be created. Press <EXIT> whenfinished.

CREATE POINTS >> CREATE ALL NODES

Only the nodes of the surface will be created as point entity.

* Note: • This option does not appear for NURBS surface.


All the nodes and the control points of the surface will be created as point entities.


MODIFY

MODIFY >> SURFACE EXTENSION

Linearly extend a surface or trimmed surface by creating a new surface(s) along itsboundaries.

How To:

1. Pick a surface and indicate the first boundary curve along which a surface extensionwill be created.

2. Indicate the last boundary curve.

3. Indicate the side for the angular offset and confirm.

Interaction:

PICK SURFACE SURFACE /TOL. = 0.100 LENGTH = 10.000

SURFACE-NRM

ANGLE = 0.000 DISP. LINES = 2 DISP. CURVES = 2

PICK SURFACE Pick a surface.

PICK FIRST CURVE

INDICATE SIDE

Indicate the first boundary curve along which a surfaceextension will be created.

PICK LAST CURVE/EXIT Indicate the last boundary curve and <EXIT>.

If an ANGLE was specified, an arrow appears.

INDICATE DIRECTION Indicate the side for the angular offset.

CONTOURS O.K. ? YES Accept the selected boundary contours.

NO Redefine the boundary contours.

EXECUTING The extension surface(s) is created.


MODIFY

SURFACE

ANGLE = 10

IND. SIDE PICK LAST CURVE/EXIT

ANGLE = 10

SURFACE NORMALPICK FIRST CURVE

IND. SIDE

SURFACE SURFACE-NRM

Figure 5-44: MODIFY >> SURFACE EXTENSION

MODIFY >> PLFACE TO TRMSRF

Transform a planar face into a trimmed surface, based on the boundaries of the planarface.

How To:

1. Pick a planer face(s) to form the trimmed surface.


Interaction:

PICK PLFACES & EXIT <PICK> planar face(s) to be transformed into trimmedsurfaces. Use <SUBMENU> to multi pick planar faces. Press<EXIT> when finished.

<CR> TO CONTINUE TOL. = 0.001 KEEP ORIGINAL / AS ORIGINAL /


Set the modals and press <CR>.

EXECUTING The trimmed surface(s) is created.


MODIFY

PICK PLFACE/EXIT TRIMMED SURFACE

Figure 5-45: MODIFY >> PLFACE TO TRMSRF

MODIFY >> TRMSRF TO SURFACE

Transform trimmed surface(s) to untrimmed NURBS surface(s) within the boundaries of thetrimmed surfaces(s). The trimmed surfaces must have four boundaries and no islands.

How To:

1. Pick the surface(s) to transform.


Interaction:

PICK SURFACES & EXIT Pick the surface(s) to transform. Use <SUBMENU> to multipick trimmed surfaces. Press <EXIT> when finished.

<CR> TO CONTINUE TOL. = 0.1 KEEP ORIGINAL / AS ORIGINAL /


Set modals and press <CR>.

EXECUTING The NURBS surface(s) is created.


MODIFY

PICK TRMSRF/EXITSURFACE

Figure 5-46: MODIFY >> TRMSRFTO SURFACE

MODIFY >> ADJOIN

Close gaps between curves and surfaces, modify a surface/trimmed surface boundary to matcha contour or another surface boundary.

SELECT CURVES SURFACES BOUNDARIES

ADJOIN >> CURVES

Modify curves in order to close gaps in 2D or 3D contours.

How To:

1. Define the plane on which the modified 2D curves will be located (2D option).

2. Pick the curves and enter the parameter values.

Interaction:

SELECT 2D

3D

If 2D is selected:

DEFINE PLANE: Define the plane on which the modified 2D curves will belocated, using the plane indication menu.

PICK CURVES & EXIT Pick the curves in the contour to transform. Use<SUBMENU> to multi pick. Press <EXIT> when finished.

<CR> TO CONTINUE AUTO GAP = 0.010 MANUAL GAP = 0.1

Enter the parameters and press <CR>.

If 2D was selected, all entities not on the selected plane willbe projected onto it.

All gaps less than or equal to AUTO GAP will be closedautomatically. The number of gaps (which are larger thanAUTO GAP but smaller than MANUAL GAP), and thelargest gap size will be displayed in the lower left corner ofthe screen.

SELECT OPTION / EXIT SINGLE ALL VERIFY

Select the appropriate option and press <CR>.

If SINGLE is selected, for each gap, the gap size isdisplayed in the lower left corner.

ADJOIN ? YES NO YES The gap is closed.

NO The gap is not closed.

If ALL is selected, all gaps will be closed automatically.If VERIFY is selected, points are created at all gap locations.


MODIFY

ADJOIN >> SURFACES

Modify a surface so that it adjoins a selected edge (surface boundary or curve) with specifiedboundary conditions.

How To:

1. Set the modals, then pick the edge of the surface to be adjoined.

2. If required, drag the border of the polygon to increase the area. (LOCAL option)

3. Pick a reference edge to which the surface will be adjoined.

Interaction:

PICK SURFACE EDGEFREE

GLOBAL / KEEP SIDE SLOPES /TOL. = 0.1

LOCAL FREE SIDE SLOPES

DISPLAY U CURVES = 3 DISPLAY V CURVES = 3 KEEP ORIGINAL / AS ORIGINAL /


FREE

SURFACE

SURF-NRM

PLANE

PICK SURFACE EDGE Set the modals, then pick the edge of the surface to beadjoined.

If the option LOCAL is selected:


MODIFY

PICK SURFACE EDGE


IND. DIR.

PICK REF. EDGE

Figure 5-47: ADJOIN >> SURFACES (PLANE)

DEFINE AREA & EXIT A red polygon appears on the surface, indicating theminimum size of the local area.

<EXIT> to accept this size, or drag the border of the polygonto increase the area, then <EXIT>.

PICK REF. EDGE Pick a reference edge to which the surface will be adjoined.

If the option PLANE is selected:

DEFINE PLANE The plane definition submenu will appear. Select an optionand define the plane.

INDICATE DIRECTION Indicate the slope direction.

SURFACES O.K.? YES NO YES Accept the selected surface(s). The surface is adjoined.

NO Do not accept the selected surface(s). Reselect thesurface(s).


MODIFY

ADJOIN >> BOUNDARIES

Modify the boundaries of a surface (or trimmed surface) to match a target contour. The targetcontour can consist of curves and/or boundaries of other surfaces.

How To:

1. Set the modals, then pick the surface whose boundaries will be adjoined.

2. Pick the boundary curves to be modified on the selected surface.

3. Define the target contour to which the selected surface boundary will be adjoined andconfirm.

Interaction:

PICK SURFACE GLOBAL /

LOCALCONT. TOL = 0.001 DISPLAY U CURVES = 3

DISPLAY V CURVES = 3KEEP ORIGINAL /

DELETE ORIGINAL

AS ORIGINAL /

AS ACTIVE

PICK SURFACE Set the modals, then pick the surface whose boundaries willbe adjoined.

PICK FIRST CURVE

INDICATE SIDE

PICK LAST CURVE/EXIT

Pick the boundary curves to be modified on the selectedsurface. A limited chain selection is available.

<CR> TO CONTINUE GLOBAL /

LOCALTOL = 0.01 DISPLAY U CURVES = 3

DISPLAY V CURVES = 3KEEP ORIGINAL /

DELETE ORIGINAL

AS ORIGINAL /

AS ACTIVE


MODIFY

PICK FIRST CURVE

PICK NTH CURVE/EXIT

IND. SIDE

PICK LAST CURVE

PICK SURFACE

IND. DIRECTION

DEFINE CONTOUR

Figure 5-48: MODIFY >> ADJOIN >> BOUNDARIES

DEFINE CONTOUR

INDICATE DIRECTION

PICK nth CRV /EXIT

Define the target contour to which the selected surfaceboundary will be adjoined.

If the option LOCAL is selected:



<CR> TO CONTINUE <CR> to modify the surface

The modified surface will be displayed.


MODIFY

MODIFY Modal Parameter Definitions

� ANGLE Angle between normals to the original and the resultingsurfaces.

� AS ACTIVE Assign the active level, line font, pen and color to the newcreated entity.

AS ORIGINAL Assign the level, line font, pen and color of the originalentity to the new created entity.

� AUTO GAP = 0.01 When adjoining curves, all gaps less than or equal to thisvalue will be closed automatically.

MANUAL GAP = 0.1 When adjoining curves, you will be prompted to close allgaps greater than AUTO GAP but less than or equal toMANUAL GAP. The value of MANUAL GAP should begreater than AUTO GAP.

� BREAK POINT The node on the new slope of the Bezier spline will be abreak point.

SMOOTH The new slope of the Bezier spline will go through theclosest node smoothly and the control point on the far side ofthe node will move accordingly.

� CARTESIAN The coordinates of the points are calculated in the Cartesiancoordinates system.

� CONT. TOL = 0.001 Maximum distance permitted between the selected entities.

� CONTROL POINTS The points which define a NURBS or Bezier spline orsurface, or a Gregory surface.

� CONTROL PTS = 4 Number of control points in sections for NURBS surface.

CROSS-CONTROL

PTS = 3

Number of control points in cross-sections for NURBSsurface.

� CURVE/EDGE TOL = 0.1 Tolerance used to approximate curves/surface boundaries.

� DEFINE SLOPES Define slope at the endpoint of a curve when fairing.

� DISP. U CURVES

DISP. V CURVES

The number of curves used to display the new surface.

� DEGREE = 3 Degree of spline.

� DELETE ORIGINAL Delete the original entity.

KEEP ORIGINAL Keep the original entity.

� DISP. CURVES

DISP. LINES

The number of curves and lines used to display the newsurface.


MODIFY

� FREE Adjoin a surface with a reference edge. The slope of thesurface that is adjoined will not be modified.

� FREE SIDE SLOPES The slopes on the sides of the surface will not be maintained.

KEEP SIDE SLOPES The original slopes on the sides of the surface will bemaintained.

� FREE SLOPE Slope at endpoint of NURBS spline, or surface slope, iscalculated automatically.

KEEP SLOPE The current slope at the endpoint of a NURBS spline, or asurface slope, is kept.

� FREE SLOPE For Bezier spline change the slope at the node to be moved.


MODIFY

PICK SURFACE EDGE PICK REF. EDGE

ORIG.

Figure 5-49: ADJOIN >> SURFACES (FREE)

� FREE CURVATURE The original curvature of the NURBS spline will not beretained at the start and end of the modification region.

FIXED LENGTH The new point is on the slope connecting the indicated pointwith the closest node, and at the same distance from it.

FIXED DIRECTION The new point is on the slope connecting the old point withthe closest node and at a distance from the node equal to theslope size.

� GLOBAL The surface will be modified globally.

� INFLECTION POINTS Create a point entity at all points at which the derivative ofthe slope of a 2D spline changes sign.

� KEEP CURVATURE The curvature of the NURBS spline will be retained.

� LENGTH Length of the surface extension.


MODIFY

IND. NEW SLOPE

IND. CONTROL POINT

PICK CURVE/SURFACE

Figure 5-50: MODIFY POINTS/SLOPES for Bezier Splines: FREE SLOPE

FIXED DIRECTION

NEW POSITION

IND. POSITION

FIXED LENGTH

IND. POSITION

NEW POSITION

Figure 5-51: MODIFY SLOPES for Bezier Splines: FIXED DIRECTION/LENGTH

� LOCAL The surface will be modified locally, within the area definedby the red polygon.

� MODEL The point’s coordinates are presented in the MODEL UCS.

� NON-PERIODIC The NURBS curve or surface is non-periodic.

PERIODIC The NURBS curve or surface is periodic. The end points of aperiodic NURBS spline coincide, as do the derivatives atthese points.

� PLANE Adjoin a surface to a reference edge on a specified plane.The normals of the surface at the adjoined edge will becollinear with the normal to the plane.

� SHAPE

PARAMETER = 0.5Vary the shape of the modification. Values close to 1 createa “table” shape, while values close to zero create a “pointed”shape.

� SLOPE SIZE = 70.35 The value of the slope of a Bezier spline.


MODIFY

PICK SURFACE EDGE


IND. DIR.

PICK REF. EDGE

Figure 5-52: ADJOIN >> SURFACES (PLANE)

� SURFACE When adjoining a surface to the edge of a reference surface,or creating a surface extension, the surface normals and theparameteric directions will be tangent.

� SURF-NRM When adjoining a surface to the edge of a reference surface,or creating a surface extension, only the surface normals willbe tangent.


MODIFY

ORIG.

PICK SURFACE EDGE PICK REF. EDGE

SURFACE

Figure 5-53: ADJOIN SURFACES (SURFACE)

PICK SURFACE EDGE

PICK REF. EDGE

SURF-NRM

Figure 5-54: ADJOIN >> SURFACES (SRF-NRM)

� SURFACE TOL = 0.1 Tolerance used to approximate the internal region of asurface(s); cannot be less than the CURVE/EDGE TOL.

� THROUGH POINTS The points which a NURBS spline or surface passes throughexactly.

� TOL. = 0.001 Maximum distance permitted between the boundary curvesand the created surface.

� X = ...

Y = ...

Z = ...

Enter coordinates of points.

� WEIGHT = 1.000 The relative influence of the control point on the NURBScurve/surface.


MODIFY

MODIFY Usage Envelope1. If the option DELETE ORIGINAL is set, the parameters AS ACTIVE/AS ORIGINAL are

not displayed. The result will always be AS ORIGINAL.

2. Surfaces created in 3D applications cannot be modified in 2D applications.

ADJOIN

BOUNDARIES

1. The result of this function is a new trimmed NURBS surface.

2. This function can be applied to any type of surface/trimmed surface.

3. Slope conditions cannot be defined.

4. Only open contours can be used, i.e., the option cannot be used to modify the entireboundary of a surface in one operation.

5. Large modifications will not be performed.

CURVES

1. When using the 2D option, entities which are do not lie on the selected plane areprojected onto it at the beginning of the interaction. Note that such entities aremodified by the projection, even if the user only selects the VERIFY option. If thismodification is not wanted, the only recourse is to use the UNDO function.

SURFACES

1. Only the first surface selected is modified.

If the surface to be modified is not a NURBS surface, it is approximated to NURBSwithin the specified tolerance.

2. The resuIting surface is a minimum energy NURBS surface, to ensure maximumsmoothness.

3. A trimmed surface may be adjoined, however the selected edge cannot be a trimmedboundary. However, for the special case where the surface to be adjoined is atrimmed surface with four boundary curves and no islands, the trimmed boundary maybe selected. In this case the TRMSRF TO SURFACE algorithm is applied.

4. The reference edge must be smooth.

5. The surface to be adjoined may have no more than one degenerated edge.

6. When the option PLANE is selected, the reference edge must lie on the plane.

7. If the surface to be modified already meets the requested conditions, no operation isperformed and the following message is displayed:CURRENT SURFACE ALREADY SATISFIES TOLERANCE + SLOPE CONDITIONS.

8. When adjoining a complex, non-NURBS surface, using the LOCAL option, theconversion to a NURBS surface may take time.

9. The area to be modified cannot contain more than 600 control points for non-rationalNURBS and 100 points for rational NURBS.

10. Options SURFACE and SURF-NRM:

The resulting surface satisfies an angular tolerance of 0.45 degrees with respect to thereference surface. However, if the reference surface has large slope variations, theangular tolerance may not be met in these areas. If this occurs, a warning message isdisplayed:WARNING: EXCESSIVE VARIATIONS FOUND IN REFERENCE SURFACE SLOPES

If the reference surface is a trimmed surface, the option SURF-NRM gives the sameresult as SURFACE.


MODIFY

CREATE POINTS

1. Inflection points may only be created for Bezier splines and 2D NURBS splines.

2. It is not possible to create points for a TRIMMED surface.

3. If a non-NURBS surface is trimmed by parameter, the points of the original surfacemay be created.

FAIR

1. Any kind of curves and surfaces may be faired/checked for smoothness.

2. Multi-pick is available for the selection of curves and surfaces.

3. When a surface is faired, the result is a non-rational (uniform weights) NURBSsurface.

LOCAL FAIR

1. This option can only be applied to NURBS surfaces.

2. The purpose of this option is to reduce the energy in a localized wavy region of asurface. If the boundaries of the surface are themselves wavy, you cannot use thisoption to “flatten” a local region, because this would increase the energy of thesurface.

MODIFY POINTS

1. When modifying the points of a 2D NURBS spline, dynamic display (dragging) isavailable.

2. Through points of periodic NURBS splines cannot be modified.

3. Through points of NURBS splines of degree 4 and higher cannot be modified.

4. For NURBS surfaces, additional patches may be created, if required, to modify athrough point.

5. The minimum region of modification for NURBS surfaces is approximately 1/100 of theparametric range.

6. For offset NURBS surfaces, only the control points of the original surface may bemodified.

7. For Bezier Mesh or Gregory surfaces, only the nodes may be repositioned. Thecoordinates of the other control points may be only verified.

8. To change the coordinates of Bezier Mesh surface or Gregory surface control points,run Cimatron with the option cim90 -au (advanced user).

9. If a non-NURBS surface was trimmed by parameter, the control points of the originalsurface may be modified. The shape of the resulting surface is changed accordingly.


MODIFY

MODIFY SLOPES

SPLINES

1. The slopes of periodic NURBS splines cannot be modified.

2. For non-periodic NURBS splines, only the slopes at the endpoints of the spline maybe modified.

3. Non-periodic NURBS splines, of degree 9 and higher, cannot be modified.

SURFACES

1. Any type of surface can be modified with this option, however, the result will be aNURBS surface.

2. Large slope modifications (> 45 degrees) will not be performed.

3. The clipped boundary of a trimmed surface cannot be modified, i.e. only isoparametricedges of trimmed surfaces can be modified.

4. LINEAR option cannot be applied to closed surface boundaries.

5. LINEAR option cannot be applied to an edge which has a degenerated corner.

6. LINEAR and SURFACE options cannot be applied to a degenerated boundary.

7. With option MODIFY SLOPE - SURF-NRM the parametric curves of the surface arenot changed as with option MODIFY SLOPE - SURFACE.

NURBS Surfaces

8. In the following cases, the original surface is deleted and a new entity is created:

- The original surface is of degree 1 in the U or V direction

- The original surface has less than 7 control points.

- The original surface is trimmed by parameter or by using VERIFY.

9. For the PLANE option, the selected edge must lie on the defined plane within adistance of one percent of the edge’s length.

10. For the SURFACE and SURF-NRM options, the modified surface satisfies an angulartolerance of 0.45 degrees with respect to the reference surface.

PLFACE TO TRMSRF

1. The resulting surface is usually a trimmed Drive/Parallel surface. However, if thePLFACE has three or four boundary curves and no islands, a Ruled Surface(untrimmed) is created.

SURFACE EXTENSION

1. The surface is extended linearly, according to the defined length.

2. The resulting surface is a NURBS surface.

3. Multiple boundary curves may be selected.

TRMSRF TO SURFACE

1. Only trimmed surfaces with 4 boundaries and no islands may be modified.

2. Many trimmed surfaces may be treated at once. However, each surface has to bepicked individually, as each surface is evaluated individually. �


MODIFY

PARTLN Create a parting line(s) and parting a surface(s) to indicatewhere the mold should be cut in order to remove a part.

The parting line(s) pass on the surface(s) through points where the surface normals are parallel tothe specified plane.

The parting surface is the surface tangential to a given surface at a point where the parting linepasses through.

DEFINE PLANE The work plane options are displayed. Use one of theseoptions to define a plane.


Main Options:

SELECT CURVE

SURFACE

CURVE Create parting line(s).

SURFACE Create parting surface(s).


PARTLN

ANGLE

PICK POINTS TO DEFINE PLANE

Figure 5-55: PARTLN

PARTLN >> CURVE

Create a parting line(s).

How To:

1. Pick surfaces on which to create a parting line(s).

Interaction:

PICK SURFACES & EXIT TOL = 0.100 DIVIDE OFF / ANGLE = 1.000

DIVIDE ON

PICK SURFACES & EXIT Pick surfaces on which to create a parting line(s). Use<SUBMENU> to multi-pick more than one surface.

Press <EXIT> when finished. Parting lines are created withthe active line attributes.


PARTLN

ANGLE = 10

ANGLE = 0

DEFINE PLANE( 3 POINTS )

PICK SURFACE/EXIT

INDICATE DIRECTION

Figure 5-56: PARTLN >> CURVE

PARTLN >> SURFACECreate a parting surface(s).

How To:

1. Pick the surfaces.


3. Indicate the direction of the parting surface.

Interaction:

PICK SURFACES & EXITTOL = 0.100

DIVIDE OFF / ANGLE = 1.000 PARTLINES ON

DIVIDE ON PARTLINES OFF

DISP. LINES = 3 DISP. CURVES = 3

PICK SURFACES & EXIT Pick surfaces on which to create a parting surface(s). Use<SUBMENU> to multi-pick more than one surface.

Set the modal parameters. A positive draft angle isrequired.Press <EXIT> when finished.

INDICATE DIRECTION Indicate the direction in which the parting surface will becreated.

PARTLN Modal Parameter DefinitionsThis section explains each of the modal parameters used in this function.

� ANGLE = 1 Enter the value of the draft angle.

� DISP. CURVES Enter the number of displayed curves which will representthe surface.

� DISP. LINES Enter the number of displayed line segments which willrepresent the surface.

� DIVIDE ON Create the parting line on the surface and divide the surfaceat the parting line.

DIVIDE OFF Create the parting line on the surface without dividing thesurface.

� PARTLINES ON Display the parting lines. Only appears if the SURFACEoption has been selected.

PARTLINES OFF Do not display the parting lines. Only appears if theSURFACE option has been selected

� TOL = 0.100 Enter the maximum tolerance allowed.

PARTLN Usage Envelope1. The parting surface is a RULED surface.

2. When there is more than one possible parting line on a single surface, the partingline created is that nearest to the point picked on the surface.

3. When the specified plane is coincident with the display, the parting line will becomean outline curve.

4. When using multi-pick options, you may find the result to be unacceptable. In suchcases, use the single-pick option to define additional surfaces. �


PARTLN

PLFACE Create a planar face which is bounded by a 2D closed contourand may contain islands.

Note: • All curves picked to define the contour and islands in each planarface, must lie on the same plane.

PICK 1ST CURVE SYMBOL SIZE = 3.000 KEEP ORIGINAL /

DELETE ORIGINAL

PICK 1ST CURVE Pick a curve to define the boundary of the planar face.

PICK 2ND CURVE Pick a second curve. The CHAIN CURVE picking option isautomatically activated. If the curve is not closedautomatically, continue to pick curves to close it.

Note: • The endpoints of curves defining closed contours or islands mustcoincide.

ISLAND 1: 1ST CURVE Pick the first curve which defines an island in the planar faceas described for the outer edge of the planar face or <EXIT>.

ISLAND N: 1ST CURVE Continue to define islands in the same way. <EXIT> whenfinished.

ISLAND N: NTH CURVE After <EXIT> is pressed to end island definition, the planarface will be created.

One triangle symbol will appear at the midpoint of each curvedefining the face. Triangles will point towards the inside ofthe first contour defined. Triangles will point towards theoutside of islands.


PLFACE

PICK 2ND CURVE

PICK 1ST CURVE

ISLAND ( NTH CURVE )

PLFACE SYMBOL

Figure 5-57: PLFACE

PLFACE Modal Parameter Definitions


� SYMBOL SIZE = 3.000 Use this modal to set the size of the triangle symbol whichindicates a planar face.

Note: • Use VERIFY >> SURFACES >> SURFACE DATA to change thesize of the symbol on planar faces already created.

� DELETE ORIGINAL Delete the original entities that make up the planar face.

� KEEP ORIGINAL Keep the original entities that make up the planar face. �


PLFACE

PNTSRF Create a NURBS (Non-Uniform Rational B-Spline) surfaceentity by defining its section and cross-section curves by meansof THROUGH or CONTROL points.

A major advantage of NURBS surfaces over other surface types is the local control property. Bymoving a CONTROL point, it is possible to change the shape of a surface in a specific vicinitywithout affecting the shape of the curve in regions which are far removed from the altered point.


PNTSRF

IND. CNTRL.PT ( N, M )

IND. CNTRL. PT ( N , M )

1.12.1

3.14.1

5.16.1

6.2

6.5

6.4 6.3

1.5

1.31.2

1.4

Figure 5-58: NURBS SURFACE

PNTSRF >> THROUGH POINTS

Create a surface by defining the THROUGH points of its section and cross section curves. Thesurface will pass through each point.

How To:

1. Pick surfaces on which to create a parting line(s) and set the modal parameters.

Interaction:

IND. THRU PT(1,1) NO. PTS IN ROW = 4 DISP.SECTIONS = 5 DISP.CROSS.SECT = 5

IND. THROU PT (n, m) Set the modals and indicate the THROUGH points for eachrow.

n is the number of the section (row) and m is the number ofthe point with respect to the row. Both numbers will start with1 and be incremented automatically as points are indicated.

Press <EXIT> when the final point has been indicated.

PNTSRF >> CONTROL POINTS

Create a surface by defining the CONTROL points of its section and cross section curves.

Interaction:

IND. CNTRL PT(1,1) NO PTS IN ROW = 96 DISP.SECTIONS = 5 DISP.CROSS.SECT = 5

WEIGHT = 1.000 DEGREE SECTIONS = 2 DEGREE CROSS SECT. = 2

IND. CNTRL PT (n, m) Set the modals and indicate the CONTROL points.

n is the number of the section (row) and m is the number ofthe point with respect to the row. Both numbers start with 1and are incremented automatically as points are indicated.

Press <EXIT> when the specified number of control pointshas been indicated.

END DEFINITION?YES NO YES Surface will be created.

NO Change modals and/or define more points.

EXECUTING The surface will be displayed after processing is complete.

PNTSRF Modal Parameter Definitions


� CONTROL PTS = 3 Number of control points in one direction.

� DEGREE = 2 Degree of spline curves which are defined by control pointsin one direction.

� DISP.CROSS SECT = 2 Number of curves used to display the surface in the Vdirection.

� DISP.SECTIONS = 2 Number of curves used to display the surface in the Udirection.


PNTSRF

� NO. PTS. IN ROW Number of points defined per section curve.

� WEIGHT = 1.000 Enter the relative influence this control point will have on thesurface. If all weights are equal, the result will be anon-rational NURBS surface.

PNTSRF Usage EnvelopeThe following table presents the range of values that can be entered for the modal parameters:

Parameter Maximum Minimum

CONTROL PTS 96 3

NO PTS IN ROW 96 2

DEGREE (THROUGH POINTS) 32 in section direction, 1 in

cross section direction

DEGREE (CONTROL POINTS) 10 2

DISP.SECTIONS 1000 0

DISP.CROSS SECT 1000 0

WEIGHT 100000 0.001

GENERAL

1. At least three sections must be defined.

THROUGH POINTS

1. The total number of through points must be a multiple of the value entered for theparameter NO. PTS IN ROW.

CONTROL POINTS

1. The number of CONTROL points in each direction must be n (value of the degree) +1.

2. All section curves must have the same number of control points.

3. The number of CROSS CONTROL POINTS is defined by the system according to thedefinition of the sections. The user only defines cross-section parameters such asDEGREE, etc..

4. The WEIGHT modal parameter controls the influence that each control point has onthe surface. If all weights are equal, the surface is a non-rational NURBS surface.

5. A degenerated boundary may be creating by selecting all of its control points at thesame location. �


PNTSRF

SCALE Create new entities from originals by specifying X and/or Yand/or Z scale factors, according to the coordinate system.

PICK UCS X SCALE = 0.5 Y SCALE = 0.7 Z SCALE = 0.85 TOL. = 0.1 KEEP ORIGINAL/ AS ORIGINAL / NO ATTRIB /

DELETE ORIG. AS ACTIVE SAME ATTRIB

PICK UCS Pick the UCS to be used to perform the scaling.

PICK ENTITIES & EXIT Pick the entities to be scaled. Use <SUBMENU> for themultipick option. Press <EXIT> when finished.

EXECUTING The new entities are created.

SCALE Modal Parameter Definitions


� AS ACTIVE Assign the active level, line font, pen and color to the copies.

� AS ORIGINAL Assign the level, line font, pen and color of the originalentities to the copied entities.

� DELETE ORIGINAL Delete the original entities.

� KEEP ORIGINAL Retain the original entities.


� SAME ATTRIB Attach attribute records to the new entities.

� TOL. = 0.1 Set the maximum approximation tolerance.

� X SCALE = 2 Scale factor for the X axis.

� Y SCALE = 2 Scale factor for the Y axis.

� Z SCALE = 2 Scale factor for the Z axis.


SCALE

X scale = 0.5

Y scale = 0.7

Z scale = 0.85

PICK ENTITIES/EXIT( ALL )

PICK UCS/EXIT

ZY

X

Figure 5-59: SCALE

SCALE Usage Envelope

1. All types of geometric entities may be handled.

2. If an original entity is a:

point- it is copied to a point with new coordinates;line- it is copied to a line;circle- a conic (ellipse) is created if scale factors are not equal;curve- a NURBS spline is created as a result of scaling.surface- a NURBS surface will be created.

3. If scale factors are equal in all directions, the new entity will be of the same type asthe original, (e.g. an original RULED surface will result in the creation of a newRULED surface).

4. If a trimmed surface is scaled, the new surface will also be a trimmed surface.However, the original trimmed surface is transformed into a NURBS surface.

5. After picking a UCS, the parameter KEEP ORIGINAL / DELETE ORIGINAL is blockedand cannot be changed. �


SCALE

SRFCRV Create curves according to the U or V direction of surfaces, orthe boundaries of trimmed surfaces and planar faces.

PICK SURFACES&EXIT Pick surfaces, trimmed surfaces or planar faces.

If more than one entity is selected, only boundary curves willbe created.

<CR> TO CONTINUE TOL = 0.001 KEEP DUPLICATED /

DELETE DUPLICATED

Set the modals and <CR>.

EXECUTING ... The boundary curves are created.

If only one entity is selected, the options displayed dependupon its type:

SURFACE TRIMMED SURFACE PLANAR FACE

SELECT OPTION CURVE SELECT OPTION BOUNDARY CURVES SELECT OPTION SINGLE CURVE

DISPLAY CURVES DISPLAY CURVES ALL CURVES

BY INDICATION

SURFACE

If a surface is picked, continue to select one of the following options. If a trimmed surface ispicked, see TRIMMED SURFACE after the SURFACE description.

SELECT OPTION: CURVE

DISPLAY CURVES

CURVE Create one curve entity on a surface at a distance from asurface boundary, at a constant parametric value. This curveentity may either be created at a specified parametric distancefrom the surface boundary, or at an indicated point on thesurface.

DISPLAY CURVES Create a net of curves on a surface according to theparametric directions.


SRFCRV

SRFCRV >> CURVE (Surface)

Create one curve entity on a surface at a distance from a surface boundary, at aconstant parametric value.

How To:

1. Pick the surface either at the boundary or at the parametric display curve relative towhich the curve will be created.

2. Set the modals, indicate the point on the surface where the new curve is to becreated, and enter the permitted tolerance.

Interaction:

SELECT BY PARAMETER BY INDICATION


SRFCRV

BY INDICATION

IND. POINT ON SURFACE

PICK SURFACE/EXIT

UV

V - DIRECTION

Figure 5-60: SRFCRV >> CURVE (BY INDICATION)

CURVE >> BY PARAMETER

Enter a parameter value to determine the position of the curve on the surface.

How To:

1. Enter the required modal parameters and pick a boundary curve.

Interaction:

IND. BOUNDARY CURVE TOL = 0.100 P-VALUE = 0.500

IND. BOUNDARY CURVE Enter the appropriate parameters and pick a boundary curve.

E X E C U T I N G The curve will be created.


SRFCRV

BY PARAMETER

P- VALUE = 0.00

P - VALUE = 0.75

P - VALUE = 1.00

IND. BOUNDARY CURVE

PICK SURFACE/EXIT

Figure 5-61: SRFCRV >> CURVE (BY PARAMETER)

CURVE >> BY INDICATION

Indicate a point to determine the position of the curve on the surface.

How To:

1. Set the required modal parameters and indicate a point.

Interaction:

IND. PT ON SURFACE TOL = 0.100 U-DIRECTION /

V-DIRECTION

IND. PT ON SURFACE Two arrows are displayed at the location where the surfacewas picked. These arrows show the U and V directions of thesurface.

Select the required modal parameters and indicate a point(press <SUBMENU> to use the point indication options).

The curve will be created.

Note: • If a point outside the surface boundary is selected, the parametriccurve is drawn at the closest point on the surface.


SRFCRV

SRFCRV >> DISPLAY CURVES (Surface)

Create a net of curves on a surface.

How To:

1. Use the parameters to set the number of curves to be created in the U and Vdirections (the default is the number of currently displayed curves) and also themaximum deviation from the surface that will be tolerated.

Notes: • To create curves at the boundary of a surface, set the number ofdisplay curves in the U and V directions to 0.

• Parameters that consist of numbers, refer to numbers per patch. Forexample, NO. OF LINES means the number of lines per patch.

<CR> TO CONTINUE NO. OF LINES = 2 NO. OF CURVES = 3 TOL = 0.100

<CR> TO CONTINUE

E X E C U T I N G The curves will be created.


SRFCRV

PICK SURFACE/EXIT

NO. OF LINES = 2NO. OF CURVES = 3

NO. OF LINES = 4NO. OF CURVES = 4

Figure 5-62: SRFCRV >> DISPLAY CURVES

TRIMMED SURFACE

Create curve entities on a trimmed surface.

SELECT OPTION BOUNDARY CURVES

DISPLAY CURVES

BY INDICATION

BOUNDARY CURVES Create individual curves at the boundaries of the trimmedsurface.

DISPLAY CURVES Create a net of curves on the trimmed surface.

BY INDICATION Indicate a point to determine the position of the curve on thetrimmed surface.

Note: • To create all curves at the boundary of a trimmed surface and theboundaries of any islands, select:TRIMMED SURFACE >> BOUNDARY CURVES >> ALLCURVESorTRIMMED SURFACE >> DISPLAY CURVES, and set thenumber of display curves in the U and V directions to 0.

SRFCRV >> BOUNDARY CURVES (Trimmed Surface)

SELECT OPTION SINGLE CURVE

SINGLE CONTOUR

ALL CURVES

BOUNDARY CURVES >> SINGLE CURVE

IND. CURVE TOL = 0.100

IND. CURVE Indicate a boundary of the trimmed surface.

E X E C U T I N G The curve will be created.

BOUNDARY CURVES >> SINGLE CONTOUR

IND. CONTOUR TOL = 0.100

IND. CONTOUR Indicate a boundary of the trimmed surface.

E X E C U T I N G The whole inner or outer boundary contour will be created.


SRFCRV

BOUNDARY CURVES >> ALL CURVES

<CR> TO CONTINUE TOL = 0.100

<CR> TO CONTINUE Press <CR> to select all the curves.

E X E C U T I N G All boundary contours will be created.

SRFCRV >> DISPLAY CURVES (Trimmed Surface)

Create a net of curves on a trimmed surface.

Note: • Parameters that consist of numbers, refer to numbers per patch. Forexample, NO. OF LINES means the number of lines per patch.

How To:

1. Use the parameters to set the number of curves to be created in the U and Vdirections (the default is the number of currently displayed curves) and also themaximum deviation from the surface that will be tolerated.

Interaction:

<CR> TO CONTINUE NO. OF LINES = 3 NO. OF CURVES = 2 TOL = 0.100

<CR> TO CONTINUE

E X E C U T I N G The curves are created.

SRFCRV >> BY INDICATION (Trimmed Surface)

How To:

1. Select the required direction (U or V).

2. Select the required modal parameters and indicate a point.

Interaction:

IND. PT ON SURFACE TOL = 0.100 U - DIRECTION

IND. PT ON SURFACE Two arrows are displayed where the surface was picked.These arrows show the U and V directions of the surface.Select the required direction.

Select the required modal parameters and indicate a point.(Press <SUBMENU> to use the point indication options).

The curve will be created.

Note: • If a point outside the surface boundary is selected, the parametriccurve is drawn at the closest point on the surface.


SRFCRV

PLANAR FACE

Create curves at the boundaries of a planar face.

SELECT OPTION SINGLE CURVE

ALL CURVES

SINGLE CURVE Create individual curves at the boundaries of the planar face.

ALL CURVES Create curves at all boundaries of the planar face.

SRFCRV >> SINGLE CURVE (Planar Face)

PICK CURVES & EXIT Pick the boundary where the curve is to be created.

SRFCRV >> ALL CURVES (Planar Face)

SELECT OPTION KEEP ORIGINAL /

DELETE ORIGINAL

SELECT OPTION Select to either delete or keep the original planar face andpress <CR> to execute.

EXECUTING The boundaries of the planar face will be created as curves.

SRFCRV Modal Parameter Definitions


� DELETE DUPLICATE Delete duplicate boundary curves.

KEEP DUPLICATE Keep duplicate boundary curves.

� DELETE ORIGINAL Delete the original planar face.

KEEP ORIGINAL Keep the original planar face.

� NO. OF ARCS = The number of arcs which define a REVOL surface.

� NO. OF CRS-SEC = The number of cross-section curves for a Bezier or Gregorysurface.

Note: • The default for the number of sections and cross-sections is thecurrent number of curves on the surface.

� NO. OF CURVES = The number of curves that cross the arcs or line segments ona REVOL or RULED surface.

� NO. OF DRIVES = The number of curves in the direction of the DRIVE curvefor a Drive/Parallel surface.

� NO. OF LINES = The number of line segments which define a RULED surface.


SRFCRV

� NO. OF SECTIONS = The number of section curves for a Bezier, Gregory orDrive/Parallel surface.

� NO. OF U-CURVES = The number of curves in the U direction which define aNURBS surface.

� NO. OF V-CURVES = The number of curves in the V direction which cross the Ucurves on a NURBS surface.

� P-VALUE = 0.500 A value between 0 and 1 to set the parametric distance of thenew curve from the picked boundary curve.

Note: • A P-VALUE of 0 will cause the new curve to be created on thepicked boundary.

A P-VALUE of 1 will cause the new curve to be created on theopposite boundary.

Values between 0 and 1 create curves between the two boundaries.

� TOL = 0.100 Enter the maximum deviation from the surface that will betolerated.

� U - DIRECTION Create a curve in the U direction.

� V - DIRECTION Create a curve in the V direction.

SRFCRV Usage Envelope

DISPLAY CURVES

1. The modals NO. OF SECTIONS/CRS-SEC/U-CURVES/V-CURVES/DRIVES/ARCS/LINES are explained on page II-6, Display of the Surface on the Screen.

2. The resulting curves may be lines, arcs, circles or NURBS splines. �


SRFCRV

SRFLAT Flatten a surface or a trimmed surface, creating a 2D contour.

How To:

1. Define a new active plane and indicate a reference point on it.

2. Indicate another point to define a direction.

3. Pick the surface to be flattened.

4. Indicate a reference point on the surface and confirm.


SRFLAT

IND. REF. PT. ON SURF.

IND. REF. PT. ON PLANE

PICK SURF. OR TRMSRF.

IND. DIRECTION

DEFINE PLANE

Figure 5-63: SRFLAT

Interaction:

Note: • To be able to flatten a surface, one of the surface’s directions (U orV) must be defined by geometrically straight lines.

DEFINE PLANE Use one of the work plane options to define a different activeplane temporarily.

See Defining a Plane in Chapter 3, of the Fundamentals &General Functions Manual for a detailed explanation of theoptions.

IND.REF.PT. ON PLANE Indicate a point on the active work plane to be used as areference point for positioning the flattened surface.

IND. DIRECTION Indicate a point on the plane which, together with thereference point, defines a direction.

The straight line that defines the surface that passes throughthe reference point on the surface (to be indicated in the nextstep) will coincide with this direction. See the note atbeginning of this function.

PICK SURF. OR TRMSRF CONTOUR TOL = 0.100 PLANE TOL = 0.010 NSEG = 100

PICK SURF. OR TRMSRF <PICK> the surface to be flattened.

IND. REF. PT. ON SURF Indicate a point on the surface to be placed at the referencepoint indicated above. The surface will be placed relative tothis point.

REFERENCE PT. OK? YES The flattened 2D contour is produced and displayed.

NO Re-indicate the reference point.

SRFLAT Modal Parameter Definitions


� CONTOUR TOL = 0.100 Enter the maximum deviation for creating splines to representflattened boundaries that are not straight contours.

� PLANE TOL = 0.010 Enter the maximum deviation permitted between planarsegments used to represent the surface and the actual surface.

� NSEG = 100 Specify the number of planar segments to be used to createthe flattened surface. A larger number will result in a moreaccurate surface. �


SRFLAT

SRFSEC Create a curve entity where one surface penetrates another orwhere surface(s) are cut by a work plane.

Main Options:

SELECT SECTION TYPE PLANE

SURFACE

PLANE Create 2D curve entities where surfaces are surface(s) are cutby a work plane. Additional curve entities may be created byoffsetting the work plane linearly, or angularly with respect toa defined axis.

SURFACE Create a curve entity where surfaces penetrate each other.

SRFSEC >> PLANE

Create 2D curve entities where surface(s) are cut by a work plane. Additional curveentities may be created by offsetting the work plane linearly, or angularly with respectto an axis.

Notes: • A section plane is, temporarily, the active work plane.

• When a surface is planar and lies on the indicated plane, anintersection will not be found.

SELECT OPTION PARALLEL SECTIONS

RADIAL SECTIONS


SRFSEC

PLANE >> PARALLEL SECTIONS

Create 2D curve entities where selected surface(s) are cut by a work plane. Additional curvesmay be created by offsetting the work plane in a defined direction.

How To:

1. Define a new active plane.

2. Pick the surface(s) that will be penetrated by the section plane(s), and set theparameters.

3. Indicate the direction in which the section planes will be offset from the active workplane.

Interaction:

DEFINE PLANE : The work plane options are displayed. Use one of theseoptions to define an active work plane temporarily (thedefault is the XY plane of the active coordinate system).


PICK SURFACES & EXIT TOL = 0.100 NO. OF SECTIONS = 2 DELTA = 10.000

PICK SURFACES & EXIT Pick the surface(s) that will be penetrated by the sectionplane(s), and set the parameters.

INDICATE DIRECTION If the number of section planes > 1, specify the direction inwhich the section planes will be offset from the active workplane.

EXECUTING The curves will be created.

EXECUTE: 1ST SURFACE

EXECUTE: NTH SURFACE


SRFSEC

PLANE >> RADIAL SECTIONS

Create 2D curve entities where selected surface(s) are cut by a work plane which isoffset radially around a selected axis. The work plane is defined by two points on theaxis, and a point on the surface.

How To:

1. Pick surface(s) that will be cut by the radial plane(s), and set the parameters.

2. Indicate a point to define the origin of the axis of rotation .and a point to define thedirection.

3. Indicate the start point of the radial section and confirm.

Interaction:

PICK SURFACES & EXIT TOL = 0.100 NO. OF SECTIONS = 2 DELTA ANGLE= 10.000

PICK SURFACES & EXIT Pick surface(s) that will be cut by the radial plane(s), and setthe parameters.

INDICATE AXIS ORIGIN Indicate a point to define the origin of the axis of rotation.

INDICATE AXIS DIRECTION Indicate a point to define the direction of the axis.

IND. START POINT Indicate the point on the surface at which the first radialsection will be created.

POINTS O.K.? YES NO YES The section curves will be created.

NO Redefine the axis direction point.



SRFSEC

PICK SURFACES

IND. AXIS ORIGIN

IND. AXIS DIRECTION

IND. START POINT

Figure 5-64: SRFSEC>> PLANE >>RADIAL SECTIONS

SRFSEC >> SURFACE

Create curve entities between penetrating surfaces at one intersection or at all intersections.

Note: • If the surfaces are picked at positions which are not close enough tothe penetration curve, the algorithm may fail.

SELECT OPTION LOCAL INTERSECTION

GLOBAL INTERSECTION

SURFACE >> LOCAL INTERSECTION

Acquire one intersection between selected surfaces, near the locations where they are picked.

How To:

1. Pick the first and second surfaces and confirm.

Interaction:

PICK 1ST SURFACE TOL = 0.100

PICK 1ST SURFACE Pick the first surface.

PICK 2ND SURFACE Pick the second surface.

SURFACES O.K.?

YES NO

YES Accept the picked surfaces. The intersection curve willbe created.

NO Reselect the second surface.

EXECUTING


SRFSEC

PICK 1ST SURFACE

PICK 2ND SURFACE

Figure 5-65: SRFSEC>> PLANE >>LOCAL INTERSECTION

SURFACE >> GLOBAL INTERSECTION

Acquire all the intersection between selected surfaces.

How To:

1. Pick the surfaces which are penetrated.

2. Pick the surfaces which will penetrate the other surfaces.

Interaction:

PICK CUT SRF(S) & EXIT TOL = 0.100

PICK SURFACES & EXIT Pick the surfaces which are penetrated.

PICK CUT SRF(S) & EXIT Pick the surfaces which will penetrate the other surfaces.



SRFSEC

PICK 1ST SURFACE

PICK 2ND SURFACE

Figure 5-66: SRFSEC>> PLANE >>GLOBAL INTERSECTION

SRFSEC Modal Parameter Definitions


� DELTA = 10.000 Enter the offset distance between parallel section planes.

� DELTA ANGLE= 10.000 Enter the offset angle between radial section planes. Theangle must be greater than 0.

� NO OF SECTIONS = 2 Enter the number of section planes (i.e., the number of 2D curveentities which will be created.)

If NO OF SECTIONS > 1, specify the offset distance(PARALLEL SECTIONS) or angle (RADIAL SECTIONS).

� TOL = 0.100 Maximum distance permitted between the curve entities andthe surface on the section plane. �


SRFSEC

SURF_EXT Extend a sequence of surfaces.

The interaction is basically the same as in EXTENSION. The system tries to find themost probable direction according to the chosen contour out of the X, -X, Y –Ydirections. You may change that direction later on. It is important to stress that intangent extensions, the direction is only used in ambiguous situations.

How To:

1. Pick an implicit contour (the usual submenu options are available for the chaining ofimplicit curves : i.e. SINGLE CURVES, CHAIN CURVES and LIMITED CHAIN) andthen perform an extension operation on it.

2. At the beginning of each operation, a tolerance for the contour is set. If the contourhas large gaps, you may redefine a larger tolerance and then re-pick the contour.

The contour tolerance entered at the beginning of each operation refers only to theselection of the contours; the extension surfaces will be created according to theGeometry Tolerance specified in the Preference File (see Names & Tolerances onpage ).

3. When creating the extensions, the system bridges over gaps in the geometry.

4. For the next extension operation, the contour is automatically picked. In the TANGENT,DIRECTION and TANGENT 2 DIR. options, described below, the system combinesextension surfaces where it is relevant, to create better geometry.

Interaction:

PICK SURFACES & EXIT Select the faces to be extended.

<CR> TO CONTINUE CONT. TOL = 0.100

� CONT. TOL Set the contour tolerance and then select <CR> to continue.

You are then prompted to define the boundary of the surfaces to be extended. For adetailed explanation of point/curve picking and indicating directions, see Chapter 3 ofthe Fundamentals and General Functions Manual.

PICK 1ST CRV/EXIT Pick the first curve from the boundary of the burningsurfaces.

INDICATE DIRECTION Indicate the desired direction. Use the submenu chainingoptions as required.

SINGLE CURVES

CHAIN CURVES

LIMITED CHAIN

PICK 2ND CRV/EXIT Pick the second curve from the boundary of the burningsurfaces. Use the submenu chaining options as required.Select <EXIT> when finished.


SURF_EXT

Main Options:

The SURF_EXT function options are then displayed:

SELECT TANGENT

DIRECTION

TANGENT 2 DIR.

FILLER SURFACE

TANGENT In general, the first extension in any set of extensions shouldbe a tangent extension. The faces are extended tangentiallyby a certain value or to a plane. In this option, you canchange the direction.

DIRECTION Create extension surfaces (in a specified direction).

TANGENT 2 DIR. Create a tangent extension out of a complex 3D contour thatcannot be extended in one direction only.

FILLER SURFACE Usually after one or two side extensions, the open face has tobe sealed. This function creates a surface that ‘closes’ thecontour.


SURF_EXT

SURF_EXT >> TANGENT

In general, the first extension in any set of extensions should be a tangent extension. The faces areextended tangentially by a certain value or to a plane.

The following options are available under TANGENT:

<CR> TO CONTINUE LENGTH LENGTH = 10.000 CHANGE DIRECTION FLIP DIRECTION

LENGTH

MIN. DISTANCE

TO POINT

TANGENT >> LENGTH

Each surface will be tangentially extended by the defined length.

Interaction:


� LENGTH = 10.000 Define the length by which to extend the tangent extension.


SURF_EXT

INDICATE DIRECTION INDICATE DIRECTION

PICK 1ST CRV( CHOOSE LIMITED CHAIN )

PICK LAST CURVE

Figure 5-67: TANGENT >> LENGTH

TANGENT >> MIN. DISTANCE

All the surfaces will be tangentially extended to a plane (normal to the defined direction) at thedefined distance.

Interaction:

<CR> TO CONTINUE MIN. DISTANCE LENGTH = 10.000 CHANGE DIRECTION FLIP DIRECTION

� LENGTH = 10.000 Define the minimum distance from the nearest point on thecontour.


SURF_EXT



PICK LAST CURVE

Figure 5-68: TANGENT >> MIN. DISTANCE

TANGENT >> TO POINT

All the surfaces will be tangentially extended to a plane (normal to the defined direction) at aposition indicated by a point.

Interaction:

<CR> TO CONTINUE TO POINT CHANGE DIRECTION FLIP DIRECTION

INDICATE POINT Define a point. The usual submenu options for defining pointsare available.


SURF_EXT



PICK LAST CURVE

Figure 5-69: TANGENT >> TO POINT

SURF_EXT >> DIRECTION

Create extension surfaces in a specified direction.

The following options are available under DIRECTION:


LENGTH

MIN. DISTANCE

TO POINT

DIRECTION >> LENGTH

Each surface will be extended in a specified direction, by the defined length.

Interaction:


� LENGTH = 10.000 Define the length by which to extend the Direction extension.


SURF_EXT

INDICATE DIRECTION

INDICATE DIRECTION


PICK LAST CURVE

Figure 5-70: DIRECTION >> LENGTH

DIRECTION >> MIN. DISTANCE

All the surfaces will be extended in a specified direction, to a plane (normal to the defineddirection) at the defined distance.

Interaction:

<CR> TO CONTINUE MIN. DISTANCE LENGTH = 10.000 CHANGE DIRECTION FLIP DIRECTION

� LENGTH = 10.000 Define the minimum distance from the nearest point on thecontour.


SURF_EXT

INDICATE DIRECTION

INDICATE DIRECTION


PICK LAST CURVE

Figure 5-71: DIRECTION >> MIN. DISTANCE

DIRECTION >> TO POINT

All the surfaces will be extended in a specified direction to a plane (normal to the defined direction)at a position indicated by a point.

Interaction:

<CR> TO CONTINUE TO POINT CHANGE DIRECTION FLIP DIRECTION

INDICATE POINT Define a point. The usual submenu options for definingpoints are available.


SURF_EXT

INDICATE POINT( SURF-C )

INDICATE DIRECTION

INDICATE DIRECTION


PICK LAST CURVE

Figure 5-72: DIRECTION >> TO POINT

SURF_EXT >> TANGENT 2 DIR.

Create a tangent extension out of a complex 3D contour that cannot be extended in one directiononly. The faces will be tangently extended and trimmed by 2 planes (one parallel to the XY and theother normal to a defined direction).

Interaction:

<CR> TO CONTINUE MIN. DELTA Z = 1.000 MIN. SIDE DISTANCE = 3.000

CHANGE DIRECTION FLIP DIRECTION

SURF_EXT >> FILLER SURFACE

Usually after one or two side extensions, the open face has to be sealed. The FILLER SURFACEoption creates a surface that ‘closes’ the contour even if it is an open contour, provided that thecontour is more or less planar.


SURF_EXT

INDICATE DIRECTION

PICK 1ST CRV( CHOOSE LIMITED CHAIN )PICK LAST CURVE

Figure 5-73: TANGENT 2 DIR.

INDICATE DIRECTION


PICK LAST CURVE

Figure 5-74: FILLER SURFACE

SURF_EXT Modal Parameter Definitions


� CHANGE DIRECTION Change the direction. The direction here is used only forambiguous situations. For a detailed explanation of directions,including use of the submenu, see Defining Slope Directionin Chapter 3 of the Fundamentals and General FunctionsManual.

� FLIP DIRECTION Flip the direction.

� MIN. DELTA Z = Define the minimum distance in the Z direction.

� MIN. SIDE DISTANCE = Define the minimum distance from the nearest point on thecontour. �


SURF_EXT

SURFSORT Process surfaces into 4 groups according to their visibility fromthe ± Z direction of the ACTIVE UCS and define their displayparameters.

The function divides the picked surfaces into 4 groups.

The first group contains those surfaces that are seen from the -Z direction (TOPSIDE).

The second group contains those surfaces that are seen from the +Z direction(BOTTOM SIDE).

The 3rd group contains those surfaces that are partly seen from the ± Z (BOTHSIDE).

The last group contains those surfaces that are totally parallel to the Z axis (NONE)(the normal at each point on the surface is normal to the Z axis), and also those innersurfaces that are not seen from the outside of the model.

PICK SURF. & EXIT CURR. NUM. OF PART SRF. = 0

PICK SURF. & EXIT Pick the surfaces to be processed.

Press <SUBMENU> for the surface selection options.


SURFSORT

PICK SUFACES & EXIT(ALL)

Figure 5-75: SURFSORT

<CR> TO CONTINUE TOL=0.1 DEFINE PLN

LEVEL COLOR PEN LINE FONT

TOP SIDE —————— ————— —————

BOTTOM SIDE —————— ————— —————

BOTH SIDE —————— ————— —————

NONE —————— ————— —————

—————— PEN 1 SOLID

LEVEL=—— PEN 2 DASH

LNAME=—— PEN 3 CENTER

ACTIVE LEVEL PEN 4 L DASH

PEN 5 FONT 5

PEN 6 FONT 6

PEN 7 FONT 7

PEN 8 FONT 8

————— —————

Select level, color, pen and/or line font parameters.

Press <CR> to display the result.

EXECUTING

Notes : • The ——————— signs indicate that no output method isdefined.

• Colors are set with default values and cannot be unset.

• You don’t have to set display parameters for all the groups.

SURFSORT: Modal Parameter Definitions


� ACTIVE LEVEL Set the ACTIVE level to be the target level

� DEFINE PLN Define the Z axis as the normal to the plane.

� ——————— Unset the target level.

� LEVEL = ——————— Chose an existing level name from the level map.

� LNAME =——————— Set a target level name.

� TOL Define the tolerance (a finer tolerance produces better results,however, this increases the execution time). �


SURFSORT

SWEEPF Sweep planar faces along a vector to create new planar faces.

Main Options:

SELECT DELTA

REF. POINTS

DELTA Sweep planar faces a given distance along an axis which isparallel to the active Z axis.

REF. POINTS Sweep planar faces along a vector which is defined by twopoints.

Notes: • If a planar face includes lines that are not straight, i.e. curves, thecurves become drive surfaces when swept.

• Do not pick planar faces that are parallel to the sweep vector.


SWEEPF

PICK PLFACE/EXIT

IND. DIRECTION

DEFINE PLANE

Figure 5-76: SWEEP >> DELTA

SWEEPF >> DELTA

Sweep planar faces a given distance along an axis which is parallel to the active Zaxis.

How To:

1. Define a new active plane.


3. Pick all the planar faces to be swept and indicate the desired sweep direction.

Interaction:

DEFINE PLANE Use one of the work plane options to define a different activeplane temporarily.


<CR> TO CONTINUE DELTA Z = 50.000

<CR> TO CONTINUE Set the modal and press <CR> to continue.

PICK PLFACES & EXIT SYMBOL SIZE = 5.000

Note: • The size of the symbols on the new planar face (parallel to theoriginal planar face) created by the sweep cannot be changed. Onlythe size of the symbols on the walls can be changed.

PICK PLFACES & EXIT Pick all the planar faces to be swept. Use the <SUBMENU>to pick multiple planar faces.

<EXIT> when finished.

INDICATE DIRECTION Indicate the desired sweep direction. The planar face(s) isswept.


SWEEPF

SWEEPF >> REF. POINTS

Sweep planar faces along a vector which is defined by two points.

How To:

1. Indicate an origin and endpoint for the sweep vector.

2. Pick all the planar faces to be swept and indicate the desired sweep direction.

Interaction:

IND.REFERENCE POINT Indicate an origin for the sweep vector.

IND.TARGET POINT Indicate an endpoint for the sweep vector.

PICK PLFACES & EXIT SYMBOL SIZE = 5.000

Note: • The size of the symbols on the new planar face (parallel to theoriginal planar face) created by the sweep cannot be changed. Onlythe size of the symbols on the walls may be changed.

PICK PLFACES & EXIT Pick all the planar faces to be swept. Use the <SUBMENU>to pick multiple planar faces.

<EXIT> when finished.

INDICATE DIRECTION Indicate the desired sweep direction. The planar face(s) isswept.

SWEEPF Modal Parameter Definitions


� DELTA Z = 50.000 Enter the length of the sweep vector.

� SYMBOL SIZE = 5.000 Enter a size, in the unit of measure of the part, for the planarface symbol(s) that will appear on the walls created by thesweep. �


SWEEPF

TRMPLF Create a new planar face by trimming it by a 2D contourwhich lies on the original planar face.

How To:

1. Pick the planar face from which the new planar face will be created.

2. Define the first contour.

3. Select another contour and indicate the region of the planar face which will remainafter trimming.

Interaction:

Note: • It is the user’s responsibility to define contours that trim the planarface in a reasonable way.

PICK PLF TO EDIT SYMBOL SIZE = 3.000 TOL. = 0.100 KEEP ORIGINAL /

DELETE ORIGINAL

PICK PLF TO EDIT Pick the planar face from which the new planar face will becreated.

Note: • To select a planar face, <PICK> a symbol on one of its boundaries.

SELECT OR EXIT CLOSED CONTOUR OPEN CONTOUR

PICK 1ST CURVE Pick the first curve in the 2D contour.

Continue to define the contour(s) as described in DefiningContours in Chapter 3, Fundamentals & General FunctionsManual.


IND REMAINING PART Select another contour or <EXIT> to continue.

Indicate the region of the planar face which will remain aftertrimming. This may be inside or outside the first contour.

EXECUTING The new trimmed planar face is created with its own planarface symbol.

TRMPLF Modal Parameter Definitions


� DELETE ORIGINAL The original planar face will be deleted.

� KEEP ORIGINAL The original planar face will be retained.

� SYMBOL SIZE = 3.000 Use this modal to set the size of the triangle symbol whichindicates a planar face.

� TOL. = 0.100 Set the maximum deviation permitted between the contour(s)and the planar face. �


TRMPLF

TRMSRF Trim a surface to create trimmed surface, restore all or part ofthe original surface, modify the boundaries of a trimmedsurface.

Main Options:

SELECT TRIM OPTION PLANE

SURFACE

PARAMETER

CONTOURS

ORIGINAL

EDIT CONTOURS

MODIFY BOUNDARY

FIX BOUNDARY

PLANE Create a new surface based on an existing surface, withboundaries defined by a plane that intersects the surfaces.

SURFACE Create a new surface based on an existing surface, withboundaries defined by other intersecting surfaces.

PARAMETER Create a new surface based on an existing surface and a U orV parameter value at a point indicated on the surface.

CONTOURS Create a new surface based on an existing surface, withboundaries defined by a contour(s) on, or projected onto, thesurface.

ORIGINAL Restore the original surface from which a trimmed surfacewas created.

EDIT CONTOURS Cancel some or all of the trimming contours to create a newtrimmed surface; create partial or full complement surfaces(the part of the original surface which was trimmed away).

MODIFY BOUNDARY Redefine the division of a trimmed surface boundary.

FIX BOUNDARY Find and fix trimmed surfaces with incorrect contourdirections or hierarchy, or with self-intersecting contours.


TRMSRF

TRMSRF >> PLANE

Create a new surface based on an existing surface, with boundaries defined by aplane that intersects the surface.

How To:

1. Pick the surfaces to be trimmed.

2. Define a trimming plane.

Interaction:

PICK SURFACES & EXIT TRIM / TOL = 0.100 DISP. U CURVES = 6 DISP. V CURVES = 6

DIVIDE

PICK SURFACES & EXIT Pick the surfaces to be trimmed. Use <SUBMENU> for themultiple pick options.

If more than one surface is picked, the following promptappears:

SURFACES O.K. ? YES Accept the picked surfaces.

NO Define different surfaces.

DEFINE PLANE: Use one of the work plane options to define a different activeplane temporarily.

EXECUTING The new surface(s) is created.


TRMSRF

DEFINE PLANE

PICK 3RD SURFACE PICK 4TH SURFACE

PICK NTH SURFACE

PICK 2ND SURFACE

PICK 1ST SURFACE

TRIM DIVIDE

Figure 5-77: TRMSRF >> PLANE

TRMSRF >> SURFACE

Create a new surface based on an existing surface, with boundaries defined by otherintersecting surfaces.

How To:

1. Pick the surface from which the new surface will be created.

2. Pick the trimming surface(s) and confirm.

Interaction:

PICK SURFACE TO TRIM TRIM ALL SURFACES / TRIM / TOL = 0.100 DISP. U CURVES = 6 DISP. V CURVES = 6

TRIM ONE SURFACE DIVIDE

PICK SURFACE TO TRIM Pick the surface from which the new surface will be created.

PICK 1ST SURFACE Pick the trimming surface(s) and <EXIT>. The surfaces mustbe picked in sequence.

SURFACES O.K. ?

YES NO

YES Accept the trimming surfaces.

NO Select different trimming surfaces.



TRMSRF

TRIM ONE SURFACE TRIM ALL SURFACES

PICK SURFACE TO TRIM

PICK NTH SURFACEPICK 1ST SURFACE

Figure 5-78: TRMSRF >> SURFACE

TRMSRF >> PARAMETER

Create a new surface based on an existing surface and a U or V parameter value at apoint indicated on the surface.

How To:

1. Pick the surface from which the new surface will be created and set the modalparameters.

2. Pick a point on the surface where the surface will be trimmed.

Interaction:

PICK SURFACE TO TRIM TRIM / U - DIRECTION / DISP. U CURVES = 6 DISP. V CURVES = 6

DIVIDE V - DIRECTION


IND. PT ON SURFACE Pick a point on the surface. This point specifies where thesurface will be trimmed.


TRMSRF >> CONTOURS

Create a new surface based on an existing surface with boundaries defined by a contour(s) on,or projected onto, the surface.

SELECT PROJECTED ON SURFACE


TRMSRF


IND. PT. ON SURFACE TO TRIM

TRIM IN U - DIRECTIONTRIM IN V - DIRECTION

U

V

Figure 5-79: TRMSRF >> PARAMETER

CONTOURS >> PROJECTED

Create a new surface based on an existing surface, with boundaries defined by acontour(s) projected onto the surface.

How To:

1. Define the contour.

2. Select an additional contour or <EXIT> to pick the surface to be trimmed.

3. Pick the surface from which the new surface will be created

4. Define the direction in which the contour will be projected onto the surface. If the draftangle ≠0, indicate the draft direction (side).

Interaction:


PICK 1ST CURVE Define the contour or <EXIT> to finish.


Select an additional contour or <EXIT> to pick the surface tobe trimmed.

PICK SURFACE TO TRIM TRIM / TOL = 0.100 ANGLE = 0 DISP. U CURVES = 6 DISP. V CURVES = 6

DIVIDE


DIRECTION: PICK CURVE Pick the direction curve.

INDICATE DIRECTION Define the direction in which the contour will be projectedonto the surface.

INDICATE SIDE If ANGLE ≠ 0°, indicate the direction of the angle. IfANGLE = 0°, the following prompt appears:


TRMSRF


DIRECTION: 2ND POINT

DIRECTION: 1ST POINT

PICK 1ST CRV/EXIT(CLOSED CONTOUR )

PICK 1ST CRV/EXIT( OPEN CONTOUR )

IND. DIRECTION

Figure 5-80: TRMSRF >> CONTOURS >> PROJECTED

CONTINUE ? YES NO YES Continue with the execution.

NO Reselect the direction curve.


CONTOURS >> ON SURFACE

Create a new surface based on an existing surface with boundaries defined by acontour(s) on the surface.

How To:

1. Define the contour.

2. Select an additional contour or <EXIT> to pick the surface to be trimmed.

3. Pick the surface from which the new surface will be created

Interaction:


PICK 1ST CURVE Define the contour or <EXIT> to finish.


Select an additional contour or <EXIT> to pick the surface tobe trimmed.

PICK SURFACE TO TRIM TRIM / TOL = 0.100 DISP. U CURVES = 6 DISP. V CURVES = 6

DIVIDE


SURFACE O.K. ? YES NO YES Create a new surface.

NO <PICK> another surface to be trimmed.



TRMSRF

PICK NTH CRV.( OPEN CONTOUR )


PICK 1ST CRV.( OPEN CONTOUR )

Figure 5-81: TRMSRF >> CONTOURS >> ON SURFACE

TRMSRF >> ORIGINAL

Restore the original surface from which a trimmed surface was created.

How To:

1. Pick the trimmed surface from which the original surface will be restored.

Interaction:

PICK SURF TO RESTORE KEEP TRIMMED SURF / AS TRIMMED / DISP. U CURVES = 6 DISP. V CURVES = 6

DELETE TRIM SURF AS ACTIVE

PICK SURF TO RESTORE Pick the trimmed surface from which the original surface willbe restored.

EXECUTING The original surface is restored.

TRMSRF >> EDIT CONTOURS

Edit full or partial external contours of a trimmed surface; create partial or fullcomplement surfaces.

A complement surface is the part of the original surface which was removed in orderto create the trimmed surface. For example, consider a trimmed surface whichcontains a single island (hole). The complement is the part of the original surfacewhich was within the island.

How To:

1. Set the modal parameters and pick the boundary to be edited.

2. Select the boundary contours (between the symbols) to be canceled, or to be used tocreate the complement surfaces, then confirm.


TRMSRF

PICK CONTOUR

PICK BOUNDARY/EXIT

COMPLEMENT

CANCEL

Figure 5-82: TRMSRF >> EDIT CONTOURS - PARTIAL

Interaction:

PICK CONTOURS & EXIT COMPLEMENT /AS ACTIVE /AS TRIMMED

CANCELKEEP ORIGINAL /DELETE ORIGINAL

AS ORIGINAL /AS ACTIVE

DISP. U CURVES = 3 DISP. V CURVES = 3WHOLE /PARTIAL

Note: • The modals WHOLE/PARTIAL do not appear until the boundarycontours are defined.

PICK CONTOURS & EXIT Set modals and pick the boundary to be edited. The externalboundary, and/or internal islands may be selected.

<CR> TO CONTINUE If the external boundary is selected:

The intersections of the boundary with the original surface’sboundaries will be highlighted with a special symbol: a redpoint surrounded by a yellow box.

If PARTIAL is selected:

PICK BOUNDARY

& EXIT

Select the boundary contours (between the symbols) to becanceled, or to be used to create the complement surfaces.

If WHOLE is selected, hatches will appear along all of theboundary contours.

CONTOURS O.K. ? YES Accept the contours and create the complement surfacesor the modified trimmed surface.

NO Repick the trimmed surface contour.


TRMSRF

TRMSRF >> MODIFY BOUNDARY

Redefine the division of a trimmed surface boundary by adding or removing pointswhich indicate the internal division of the boundary.

How To:

1. Select the boundary of a trimmed surface.

2. Pick a point to add or remove then confirm.

Interaction:

PICK BOUNDARY Select the boundary of a trimmed surface.

The points are displayed.

SELECT OR EXIT ADD POINTS REMOVE POINTS

PICK POINT/EXIT Pick a point to add or remove. When adding points, the pointindication submenu is available.

When finished selecting points, <EXIT>.

SELECT OR EXIT ADD POINTS REMOVE POINTS

Add or remove additional points, or <EXIT> to update theboundary.

POINTS OK ? YES NO YES Update the surface boundary.

NO Do not update the surface boundary. Continue to selectpoints to add or remove.


TRMSRF

TRMSRF >> FIX BOUNDARY

Find and fix trimmed surfaces with incorrect contour directions or hierarchy, or withself-intersecting contours.


TRMSRF

PICK SURFACES & EXIT

PICK SURFACES & EXIT

GREATER THAN LOOP (TOL.=0.01)

SMALLER THAN LOOP (TOL.=0.001)

Figure 5-83: Fix Boundary of Trimmed Surface

How To:

1. Pick the surfaces to be checked/fixed.

Interaction:

The FIX BOUNDARY option is used for checking surfaces that have been importedfrom other systems using the Data Interface Utilities. The geometry of the surfaces ischecked to ensure that the database is correct. If errors are found, they are corrected.

It is imperative that incorrect trimmed surfaces are fixed, particularly if these surfacesare to be used later in other processes, for example in NC or when converting thesurfaces to solid using the SRFSOL function.

PICK SURFACES & EXIT Pick the surfaces to be checked/fixed and press <EXIT>.

The selected surfaces are then checked and an appropriatemessage is displayed.

If no errors are found, all your surfaces are correct and youcan exit the function.

If one or more surfaces are found to be incorrect, thefollowing table is displayed:

<CR> TO FIX / EXIT LOOP SIZE = 0.100

Analyzing the Result

If errors are found, the above message refers to two types ofproblematic surfaces:

– Surface with self-intersections (looped curves) – markedin yellow and red.

– Surfaces with incorrect contours – marked in purple.

Surfaces with incorrect contours are surfaces whose contourdirection or hierarchy is wrong, which results in an incorrectidentification of the surface by the database.


TRMSRF

PICK SURFACES (ALL)

Figure 5-84: Fix Boundary of Trimmed Surface

Fixing the Surfaces

Surfaces with incorrect contours are corrected automaticallyby pressing the Enter key.

Surfaces with self-intersections (looped curves) are fixed bydetermining the loop size.

When setting the loop size, you actually determine how totreat the loop. If the loop is bigger than the LOOP SIZE youdefine, it will be converted into a trimmed surface.Otherwise, the loop will be deleted.

EXECUTING..

TRMSRF Modal Parameter Definitions


� ADD POINTS Redefine the division of a trimmed surface boundary byadding points which indicate the internal division of theboundary.

� ANGLE = 0.000 Angle of projection.

� AS ACTIVE Assign the active level, line font, pen and color to therestored surface.

� AS TRIMMED Assign the level, line font, pen and color of the trimmedsurface, to the restored surface.

� CANCEL Cancel one or more contours of a trimmed surface’sboundary curves, including islands. A modified trimmedsurface will be created.

� COMPLEMENT Create the complement of a trimmed surface in the region ofthe selected boundary curve.

� DELETE TRIMMED SURF. Delete the trimmed surface.

� DISP. U CURVES = 6

DISP. V CURVES = 6

Specify the number of display curves in the U/V directionthat will be used to display the new surface.

� DIVIDE Divide the surface into two surfaces.

� KEEP TRIMMED SURF. Retain the trimmed surface.

� LOOP SIZE Fix surfaces with self-intersections (looped curves) bydetermining the loop size.

If the LOOP SIZE is smaller than the looped curve, the curvewill be converted into a trimmed surface.

If the LOOP SIZE is larger than the looped curve, the curvewill be deleted.

� PARTIAL When editing the external boundary contour of a trimmedsurface, only the selected contours will be canceled, or usedto create the complement surface(s).


TRMSRF

� REMOVE POINTS Redefine the division of a trimmed surface boundary byremoving points which indicate the internal division of theboundary.

� TOL = 0.100 Specify the maximum tolerance between the trimmed surfaceand the plane, contour or trimming surface.

� TRIM Trim the surface.

� TRIM ALL SURFACES Trim or divide the surface to be trimmed and all the trimmingsurfaces.

� TRIM ONE SURFACE Trim or divide only the surface to be trimmed.

� U - DIRECTION Trim or divide the surface in the U direction.

� V - DIRECTION Trim or divide the surface in the V direction.

� WHOLE When editing the external boundary contour of a trimmedsurface, all of the contours will be canceled, or used to createthe complement surface(s).

TRMSRF Usage Envelope

GENERAL

1. If TRIM is selected, the side of the surface that is picked will remain.

2. The trimmed surface is created with the same attributes as those of the originalsurface.

3. Trimming by plane and by surface is performed locally, not globally. The trim isperformed at the intersection that is closest to the picked point.

4. If the trimming contour is not closed and its edge does not reach the surface’sboundary, the trimming contour is extended.

SURFACE

1. Trimming is performed locally, i.e. if the trimming surface cuts the trimmed surfacetwice, only one section (nearest to the picking point) will be performed. This causesthe following results:

In case of a cyclic surface only the part of a surface between thetrimming surface and the boundary can be obtained.

When a trimming surface passes exactly through the coincidingboundary, the trimming will be performed only if the trimming surfacewas picked at the opposite side to the coinciding boundary.

2. When the trimming surfaces intersect, the trimming curves are cascaded, according tothe order of selection, to form the trimming contour.

PARAMETER

1. A surface trimmed using the PARAMETER option will be of the same surface type asthe original surface.

2. When a NURBS surface is trimmed by parameter, the result is a new NURBS surfacewith new parameterization. The original surface cannot not be restored.


TRMSRF

3. When using the PARAMETER option, the point on the surface must be picked closeto a display curve, by using one of the surface point indication options.

CONTOURS

1. An implicit surface boundary may be used as a contour.

2. In the option, the common algorithm INDICATE DIRECTION is used. Direction arrowsare displayed, however, the projection is always executed in the surface direction.

3. With closed surfaces, trimming will take place only up to the surface boundary.

ORIGINAL

1. The parameters AS TRIMMED / AS ACTIVE appear only if KEEP TRIMMED SURFhas been selected.

2. A surface which has been trimmed by PARAMETER may also be restored. This doesnot apply to NURBS surfaces.

EDIT CONTOURS

1. The parameters AS TRIMMED / AS ACTIVE appear only if CANCEL and KEEPTRIMMED SURF have been selected.

2. When an external boundary is selected to create a complement surface, and only twointersection symbols appear, the parameter PARTIAL will give the same result asFULL.

MODIFY BOUNDARY

1. Breakpoints cannot be removed.

2. A point that was added during the same interaction can also be removed.

3. This option can be used to modify a trimmed surface so that it meets the condition of4 boundary curves as required by many functions (e.g. MODIFY >> TRMSRF toSURFACE, MODIFY >> ADJOIN SURFACES).

4. The last point cannot be removed.

FIX BOUNDARY

1. The following types of problems can be fixed:

• self-intersecting contours (outer or inner). The intersection point is marked by a

red-yellow rectangle.

• incorrect contour direction (for inner contours) CCW or CW. The incorrect

contours are marked in yellow

• incorrect hierarchy of inner and outer contours. Incorrect contours are marked

in purple.

2. If the loop area is greater than the LOOP SIZE parameter, the trimmed surface isdivided in the intersection point.

If the loop is smaller than the LOOP SIZE parameter, the extra loop will be deleted.

3. In some cases, trimmed surfaces cannot be fixed because of overlapping contours,too many intersections, etc. Such trimmed surfaces are marked in red. �


TRMSRF

Index

!

2 CURVES option 1-9, 1-38

See also CIRCLE

See also LINE

2 PLANES option 1-46

See also LINE

2 POINTS + CURVE option 1-11

See also CIRCLE

2 POINTS option 1-5, 1-31

See also CIRCLE

See also LINE

2 SURFACES option 5-45

See also FILLET

3 CURVES option 1-10

See also CIRCLE

3 DIF. RADII option 5-51

See also FILLET

3 POINTS option 1-6

See also CIRCLE


See also FILLET

A

ADJOIN option 5-95 - 5-96, 5-98

See also MODIFY

ANGULAR option 3-14

See also PATTDIM

ANGULAR SWEEP option 1-116

See also SWEEP

APPEND SUB-ASSM opt 2-10

See also EXTRACT

B

BASE-MULTI option 5-53

See also FILLET

BLEND function 5-3 - 5-18

CONSTANT option 5-7

CORNER option 5-13

CURVATURE option 5-12

FREE SLOPES option 5-6

LINEAR option 5-8

PLANE option 5-11 - 5-12

REGION option 5-16

SECTIONS option 5-4

SOAP option 5-15

SRF-NRM option 5-9

SURFACE option 5-9

BOUNDING BOX option 1-118

See also SWEEP

BOX option 1-40

B-SPLINE 2D(3D) option

See also SPLINE

C

CATALOG option 2-22, 3-29

See also PATTUSE

See also PLACE

CENTER + POINT option 1-4

See also CIRCLE

CENTER + RADIUS/DIAM option 1-3

See also CIRCLE

CHAMFER option 1-22

See also CORNER

CIRCLE function 1-2 - 1-12

2 CURVES option 1-9

2 POINTS + CURVE option 1-11

2 POINTS option 1-5


3 POINTS option 1-6

CENTER + POINT option 1-4

CENTER + RADIUS/DIAM option 1-3

POINT + 2 CURVES option 1-10

POINT + CURVE(PT) option 1-8

Cimatron Modeling 13 Index-1

Index

POINT + CURVE(RAD) option 1-7

COMCRV function 1-13 - 1-16

CREATE option 1-13

EXPLODE option 1-15

COMSRF function 5-19 - 5-20

CONIC function 1-17 - 1-20

ELLIPSE option 1-17

ENDS & P/Q option 1-19

ENDS & SHLDR PT opt 1-18

CONSTANT option 5-7

See also BLEND

CONTOUR option 1-62, 4-3

See also OFFSET

See also REVOL

CONTOURS option 5-155

See also TRMSRF

CONTROL POINTS option 1-104

See also SPLINE

CORNER function 1-21 - 1-24

CHAMFER option 1-22

CORNER option 1-23

MULTI RADIUS option 1-22

RADIUS option 1-21

CORNER option 1-23, 5-13

See also BLEND

See also CORNER

CREATE option 1-13, 2-16, 2-26, 3-22

See also COMCRV

See also GROUP

See also PATTERN

CREATE POINTS option 5-89

See also MODIFY

CURVATURE option 5-12

CURVE option 1-60, 1-64

See also OFFSET

CURVE POINT option 4-11

See also RULED

CURVE SURFACE option 4-8, 4-10, 5-56

See also FILLET

See also RULED

CURVES option 1-110, 4-3

See also REVOL

See also STRETCH

D

DELETE option 2-18, 3-23

See also GROUP

See also PATTERN

DELTA option 1-52, 5-149

See also MOVE

See also SWEEPF

DIAMETER option 3-17

See also PATTDIM

DIM_EDIT option 3-18

See also PATTDIM

DIM_PAR option 3-18

See also PATTDIM

DIRECTION option 5-141

See also SURF_EXT function

DIVIDE BY CURVES option 1-124

See also TRIM

DIVIDE BY POINT option 1-125

See also TRIM

DIVID-LN option 1-41

See also LINE

DRIVE function 5-21 - 5-42

PARALLEL SEC option 5-23

PIPE option 5-25

SPINE & EDGES option 5-34

SPINE & PLANE option 5-30

SPINE option 5-26

TWO SPINES option 5-38

E

EDIT CONTOURS option

See also TRMSRF

EDIT_SET function 5-43

Index-2 Cimatron Modeling 13

Index

ELLIPSE option 1-17

See also CONIC

ENDS & P/Q option 1-19

See also CONIC

ENDS & SHLDR PT opt 1-18

See also CONIC

EXPLODE function 2-2 - 2-3

EXPLODE option 1-15

See also COMCRV

EXPONENTIAL option 1-28

See also HELIX

EXPORT CATALOG opt 2-9

See also EXTRACT

EXPORT LEVELS opt 2-13

See also EXTRACT

EXTRACT CATALOG opt 2-7

See also EXTRACT

EXTRACT function 2-4 - 2-14

APPEND SUB-ASSM opt 2-10

EXPORT CATALOG opt 2-9

EXPORT LEVELS opt 2-13

EXTRACT CATALOG opt 2-7

EXTRACT SUB-ASSM opt 2-5

IMPORT CATALOG opt 2-11

IMPORT LEVELS opt 2-12

EXTRACT SUB-ASSM opt 2-5

See also EXTRACT

EXT-VIEW option 2-25

See also PLACE

F

FAIR option 5-68

See also MODIFY

FAIRING POINTS option 1-106

See also SPLINE

FILLER SURFACE option 5-144


FILLET function 5-44 - 5-62


3 DIF. RADII option 5-51


BASE-MULTI option 5-53

CURVE SURFACE option 5-56

MULTI-MULTI option 5-55

SPINE + 2 SRF option 5-59


FIX BOUNDARY option 5-161

See also TRMSRF

FIXED option 1-26

See also HELIX

FREE SLOPES option 5-6

See also BLEND

G

GROUP function 2-15 - 2-19

CREATE option 2-16, 2-26

DELETE option 2-18

GROUP option 2-19

RENAME option 2-19

GROUP option 2-19

See also GROUP

H

HELIX function 1-25 - 1-29

EXPONENTIAL option 1-28

FIXED option 1-26

LINEAR option 1-27

HOR/VER option 1-39

See also LINE

I

IMPORT CATALOG opt 2-11

See also EXTRACT

IMPORT LEVELS opt 2-12

See also EXTRACT

INTERNAL option 2-21, 2-27, 3-27


Index

See also PATTUSE

See also PLACE

INT-VIEW option 2-24

See also PLACE

L

LINE function 1-30 - 1-48


2 PLANES option 1-46

2 POINTS option 1-31

BOX option 1-40

DIVID-LN option 1-41

HOR/VER option 1-39

LN-CURVE option 1-37

OFFSET option 1-33

PARALLEL option 1-32

PT-ANGLE option 1-34

PT-CURVE option 1-36

SURF-NRM option 1-43

SURF-TAN option 1-42

TAN/NORM option 1-45

LINEAR option 1-27, 3-6, 5-8

See also BLEND

See also HELIX

See also PATTDIM

LINEAR SWEEP option 1-113

See also SWEEP

LN-CURVE option 1-37

See also LINE

LOCAL FAIR option 5-70

See also MODIFY

M

MESH function 5-63 - 5-66

MIRROR option 1-56

See also MOVE

Modeling Functions - Wireframe 1-1

MODIFY BOUNDARY option 5-160

See also TRMSRF

MODIFY function 5-67 - 5-108

ADJOIN option 5-95 - 5-96, 5-98

CREATE POINTS option 5-89

FAIR option 5-68

LOCAL FAIR option 5-70

MODIFY POINTS option 5-71

MODIFY SLOPES option 5-83

PLFACE TO TRMSRF option 5-93

SURFACE EXTENSION option 5-92

TRMSRF TO SURFACE option 5-94

MODIFY POINTS option 5-71

See also MODIFY

MODIFY SLOPES option 5-83

See also MODIFY

MOVE function 1-49 - 1-58

DELTA option 1-52

MIRROR option 1-56

POINT-ANGLE option 1-50

REF.POINTS option 1-55

ROT.AXIS option 1-54

UCS TO UCS option 1-57

MULTI RADIUS option 1-22

See also CORNER

MULTI-MULTI option 5-55

See also FILLET

MULTI-POINTS option 1-84

See also POINT

O

OFFSET function 1-59 - 1-71

CONTOUR option 1-62

CURVE option 1-60, 1-64

SURFACE CURVES option 1-67 - 1-68

SURFACE option 1-65

OFFSET option 1-33

See also LINE

ORIGINAL option 5-158

See also TRMSRF


Index

P

PARALLEL option 1-32

PARALLEL SEC option 5-23

See also DRIVE

PARAMETER option 5-155

See also TRMSRF

PARTLN function 5-109 - 5-111

PATTDIM function 3-2 - 3-21

ANGULAR option 3-14

DIAMETER option 3-17

DIM_EDIT option 3-18

DIM_PAR option 3-18

LINEAR option 3-6

RADIAL option 3-17

PATTERN function 3-22 - 3-24

CREATE option 3-22

DELETE option 3-23

RENAME option 3-24

PATTUSE function 3-25 - 3-29

CATALOG option 3-29

INTERNAL option 3-27

PIPE option 5-25

See also DRIVE

PLACE function 2-20 - 2-28

CATALOG option 2-22

EXT-VIEW option 2-25

INTERNAL option 2-21, 2-27

INT-VIEW option 2-24

REF-ASSM option 2-26

SUB-ASSM option 2-25

PLANAR FACE option 1-110, 5-126

See also SRFCRV

PLANAR FACES option 1-110

See also STRETCH

PLANE option 5-11 - 5-12, 5-130, 5-153

See also BLEND

See also SRFSEC

See also TRMSRF

PLFACE function 5-112 - 5-113

PLFACE TO TRMSRF option 5-93

See also MODIFY

PNTSRF function 5-114 - 5-116

POINT + 2 CURVES option 1-10

See also CIRCLE

POINT + CURVE(PT) option 1-8

See also CIRCLE

POINT + CURVE(RAD) option 1-7

See also CIRCLE

POINT function 1-72 - 1-87

MULTI-POINTS option 1-84

SINGLE POINT option 1-72

POINT-ANGLE option 1-50

See also MOVE

PROJECT CONTOUR option 1-96

See also PROJECT

PROJECT CURV & PNT option 1-91

See also PROJECT

PROJECT function 1-88 - 1-100

PROJECT CONTOUR option 1-96

PROJECT CURV & PNT option 1-91

PROJECT POINTS option 1-88

PROJECT POINTS option 1-88

See also PROJECT

PT-ANGLE option 1-34

See also LINE

PT-CURVE option 1-36

See also LINE

R

RADIAL option 3-17

See also PATTDIM

RADIUS option 1-21

See also CORNER

REF. POINTS option 5-150

See also SWEEPF

REF.POINTS option 1-55

See also MOVE

REF-ASSM option 2-26


Index

See also PLACE

REGION option 5-16

See also BLEND

RENAME option 2-19, 3-24

See also GROUP

See also PATTERN

REVOL function 4-2 - 4-3

CONTOUR option 4-3

CURVES option 4-3

ROT.AXIS option 1-54

See also MOVE

RULED function 4-4 - 4-12

CURVE POINT option 4-11

CURVE SURFACE option 4-8, 4-10

TWO CONTOURS option 4-6

TWO CURVES option 4-5

S

SCALE function 5-117 - 5-118

SECTIONS option 5-4

See also BLEND

SINGLE POINT option 1-72

See also POINT

SOAP option 5-15

See also BLEND

SPINE & EDGES option 5-34

See also DRIVE

SPINE & PLANE option 5-30

See also DRIVE


See also FILLET


See also FILLET

SPINE option 5-26

See also DRIVE

SPLINE function 1-101 - 1-108

CONTROL POINTS option 1-104

FAIRING POINTS option 1-106

THROUGH POINTS option 1-102

SRFCRV function 5-119 - 5-127

PLANAR FACE option 5-126

SURFACE option 5-119

TRIMMED SURFACE option 5-124

SRFLAT function 5-128 - 5-129

SRF-NRM option 5-9

See also BLEND

SRFSEC function 5-130 - 5-135

PLANE option 5-130


STRETCH function 1-109 - 1-112

CURVES option 1-110

PLANAR FACE option 1-110

PLANAR FACES option 1-110

SUB-ASSM option 2-25

See also PLACE

SURF_CUT function 4-13 - 4-14

SURF_EXT function 5-136 - 5-145

DIRECTION option 5-141

FILLER SURFACE option 5-144

TANGENT 2 DIR. option 5-144

TANGENT option 5-138

SURFACE CURVES option 1-67 - 1-68

See also OFFSET

SURFACE EXTENSION option 5-92

See also MODIFY

SURFACE option 1-65, 5-9, 5-119, 5-133, 5-154

See also BLEND

See also OFFSET

See also SRFCRV

See also SRFSEC

See also TRMSRF

SURF-NRM option 1-43

See also LINE

SURFSORT function 5-146 - 5-147

SURF-TAN option 1-42

See also LINE

SWEEP function 1-113 - 1-119

ANGULAR SWEEP option 1-116


Index

BOUNDING BOX option 1-118

LINEAR SWEEP option 1-113

SWEEPF function 5-148 - 5-150

DELTA option 5-149

REF. POINTS option 5-150

T

TAN/NORM option 1-45

See also LINE

TANGENT 2 DIR. option 5-144


TANGENT option 5-138


THROUGH POINTS option 1-102

See also SPLINE

THROU-PT option

See also LINE

TRIM BY CURVE option 1-121

See also TRIM

TRIM BY PLANE option 1-123

See also TRIM

TRIM BY POINT option 1-122

See also TRIM

TRIM function 1-120 - 1-125

DIVIDE BY CURVES option 1-124

DIVIDE BY POINT option 1-125

TRIM BY CURVE option 1-121

TRIM BY PLANE option 1-123

TRIM BY POINT option 1-122

TRIMMED SURFACE option 5-124

See also SRFCRV

TRMPLF function 5-151

TRMSRF function 5-152 - 5-165

CONTOURS option 5-155

EDIT CONTOURS option 5-158

FIX BOUNDARY option 5-161

MODIFY BOUNDARY option 5-160

ORIGINAL option 5-158

PARAMETER option 5-155

PLANE option 5-153


TRMSRF TO SURFACE option 5-94

See also MODIFY

TWO CONTOURS option 4-6

See also RULED

TWO CURVES option 4-5

See also RULED

TWO SPINES option 5-38

See also DRIVE

U

UCS TO UCS option 1-57

See also MOVE

W

WIRE_EDM function 1-126 - 1-127


Index

Documents

cad-cam Modeling.pdf